Home

Axxon Soft Inc Axxon Smart Software Package The User`s Guide

1. Ll Computer r Bae Grabber 1 see ao Camera 2 oe Ray 1 i p Ti Ran 2 lig Beitr Ay i Ray 4 a Ray 5 i a Fay 6 Restore i aii Ray reece Fay 6 Video Board oe 7 Channel ii Pre alarm record Hame Resolution Normal Post alarm record Record alarms Hot rec rate 0 D Hot record time i D 0 Disable Recording rate Color mas z z max z i a j IE ime E Realtime min mn z processing recording Figure 5 5 1 3 To set the values of these parameters manually check the checkbox and move the sliders to the desired positions If you want the parameters to be optimized based on manually set values for Brightness and Contrast put the square symbol Repeated clicking of the checkbox keeps it checked but makes it appear grey which means that the parameters are optimized based on manually set values NOTE To check square and uncheck left click on the checkbok The Camera object settings panel displays a bar chart for Brightness in the surveillance window The bar chart for Brightness features brightness in terms of black to white half tones plotted against the horizontal axis while the vertical axes shows the number of pixels for a given brightness level With the bar chart facility you can sample the video quality Use the bar chart for Brightness to adjust colors brightness and contrast of the video image To display the bar chart in the surveil
2. Figure 5 4 1 12 To check the driver has been installed correctly use the CodeReader exe utility included in the Axxon Smart installation kit which reads the video capture card codes Alternatively in the Start menu select Programs then Axxon Smart then Utilities then Capture boards code reader utility The window will open displaying the video capture card codes Figure 5 4 1 13 77 Code Reader x Figure 5 4 1 13 If the drivers were installed correctly all the codes will be displayed If a card has several ADCs its card code is repeated the number of times equal to the number of ADCs It may happen that the drivers were installed incorrectly though Figure 5 4 1 14 m Computer Management ol x m File Action View Window Help Computer Management Local I jib System Tools IDE ATASATAPI controllers 2 Keyboards gnl Event Viewer I Mice and other pointing devices E G Shared Folders H Monitors 2 Local Users and Groups c Network adapters E Performance Logs and Alerts m Ports COM amp LPT z Device Manager E a Processors ge Storage i es SCSI and RAID controllers Removable Storage Se Sound video and game controllers seen Disk Defragmenter ve P Audio Codecs Multimedia Controller Multimedia Controller Multimedia Controller Multimedia Controller seve 2 Legacy Audio Drivers vod P Legacy Wideo Capture Devices A Media Control Dev
3. Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 E Line 24 Pkt Line 25 Telemetry panel System security service ow EB Schedule In the Device drop down list select the device to execute the action upon In the Action drop down list select the action to execute 261 Line 17 S Line 18 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 ool Line 24 bolt Line 25 Telemetry panel Schedule ee Macros 10 00 00 Relay 1 18 00 00 Relay 1 0 00 00 All cameras Figure 9 6 2 2 10 SERVICE MODULES 10 1 NOTIFICATION MODULES The notification modules are designed for notifying users about the events registered by the system Specific services are used to notify the users short messages SMS mail messages E mail voice messages V Dial Figure 9 6 2 1 262 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel System security service E Schedule Settings OW WAWWHMWWHMWHMwH Ye YY _ Protect archive with password Figure 9 6 2 1 10 1 1 Voice notification setup The Axxon Smart provides voice notification to the operator about the alarm events registered in the system To use voice notification the following is required 1 An installed third party standard sound card possibly integrated into the motherboard 2 Speakers or headphones connected to the sound card audio outputs Voice notification is enabled by default To disable voice notifi
4. Figure 12 4 9 3 13 7 ARCHIVE PLAYBACK AND CONVERSION The Archive Player and Converter utility Converter exe Figure 12 4 9 1 is designed for e Playing video and audio archives e Transferring the video archive in original format e Converting the video archive into other formats e Creating the backup copy broken down into disks NOTE When synchronously created video and audio recordings are converted the output file will include the sound To start the utility run the executable in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder or use the Windows taskbar Start gt Programs Axxon Smart gt Playback and Conversion 340 aT z a 5 Archive s converter aje 1 5 le E f19 01 2009 15 13 08 a 26 02 2009 v 17 55 06 Camera Ai AJA A M alg Figure 12 4 9 1 13 7 1 Archive selection To start processing an archive do the following Figure 13 7 1 1 1 Select the camera and its number in the lower left corner Click the Drives Folder Scanning button next to the camera number The Drives Folder Selection dialog box will open If any of the drives are selected the utility will look for Video folders on all the selected drives where archives are located If a folder is selected remember that this folder must contain video archives select either drives or a folder not both For example D Video 3 Enter the archive password if necessary Click the Scan button in the lower right corner of the
5. Video Advanced Compression Detector Titles Detection zone Direction i ae Sensitivity Contrast l 3 Filtration Size _ Show Color m Detection frequency Frame scale Figure 5 11 1 1 i p Relay 6 g Relay 7 io g Relay 8 a a Graba e oS RaT eR Rey 12 ay Ray 13 i Relay 9 ame Relay 10 vate Relay 11 age Relay 12 h Relay 13 L as Grabber 3 i k Camera 4 u study ae pea Camera 5 Detector Detection zone Direction Nog Name Main Sensitivity max Contrast v Alarmed ii Always amed Filtration 3 Size Detection frequency Activity ma BBS se Frame scale Stability Background change Blind Close Face Lost items PTZ Trace _ Classic Figure 5 11 1 2 5 11 1 1 Using detection zones The list of detectors for a given camera is displayed in the functional menu of the relevant surveillance monitor window To arm a detection zone check the corresponding item in the functional menu of video surveillance window The standard window shows the relevant menu item of an armed detection zone in yellow Figure 5 11 1 3 181 Whereas the standard window shows the relevant menu item of a disarmed detection zone in green EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a 0 EI UOCE E 7 4fps 26876 640x480 FE amp ABOLKLGL 5 bi O AAt titititi Git A AAGA 16 04 18 T 2 16 04 18 F _ Camera Show titles Processing Export Start recording Ar
6. 1 Ci Alarmed 2 g Filtration Contrast ize Add ka View Show i Detection frequency Detector type Eoo Blind Frame scale Figure 5 11 7 1 5 11 7 2 Detector in operation The camera blinding detector discovers attempts to over illuminate the camera lens to make the surveillance ineffective Its operation is based on comparing the histograms of the received frames with the sample blind frame histogram pure white 193 5 11 8 Camera blinding detector 5 11 8 1 Setup The detector is set up using the settings panel The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 8 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 The Sensitivity slider Here this setting corresponds to the contraction rate of the frame histogram i e ratio of grey which triggers the detector g Relay 11 owe Relay 12 ome Relay 13 Grabber 3 p Camera 4 ee Camera 5 en
7. Number of ray lines 4 16 Galvanic isolation V 2000 aa Audio digitizing frequency kHz Watchdog hardware control of OS hang up Yes 5 3 2 2 2 FS 6C FS 16 cards EXP Figure 5 3 2 4 shows the general view of the FS 6C video capture card Figure 5 3 2 4 Figure 5 3 2 5 shows the general view of the FS 16 EXP video capture card 63 Figure 5 3 2 5 Table 5 3 2 compares the technical characteristics of the FS 6C and FS 16 EXP video capture cards Table 5 3 2 Signal type CCIR PAL NTSC 16 min colors 256 shades of gray in PAL 64 Resolution pixels m e ep Number of multiplexed video inputs Number of non multiplexed live video inputs 25 30 Video input rate per non multiplexed channel per card fps PAL NTSC Total video input rate for all multiplexed 64 704 288 352 288 standard channels fps PAL 48 704 576 full Total video input rate for all multiplexed 80 640 240 320 240 standard channels fps NTSC 60 640 480 full Total video input rate for non 100 120 multiplexed channels fps PAL NTSC M Audio digitizing frequency kHz 8 16 32 Watchdog hardware control of OS Yes hang up Digital analog conversion bit NOTE FS 16 EXP card can be identified as FS6e as well 5 3 2 2 3 FS 8 card Figure 5 3 2 6 shows the general view of the FS 8 video capture card 65 Figure 5 3 2 6 Table 5 3 3 shows the technical characteristics
8. _ Sa g NA PA ated Camera 7 s Show titles Processing Export Stop recording 17 03 06 7 Figure 5 9 4 5 5 9 4 5 Contrasting an image The objects are not always illuminated sufficiently to obtain a clear high quality image suitable for visual recognition across the entire observed scene Some of the problems in the images can be corrected using tools such as contrasting 165 The contrasting function is recommended for use in dark or stormy ambient conditions To enable contrasting in the surveillance window menu select Processing then Contrasting Figure 5 9 4 6 The image from the active camera will become more contrast making it easer to recognize the details To disable contrasting select the same menu item option again highlighting of the option will be removed B oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a 0 Bx UOCE a ol 24fps 8152 320x240 2Z3 93 Camera Show titles gt C Processing PPA zoom Export p Magnifier Stop recording A Sharpness Disarm Contour cL Detector mask EKKKHASSH SHC AGAES SHOC CALS Figure 5 9 4 6 5 9 4 6 Outlining of moving objects In dark or stormy ambient conditions or in case of highly detailed scenes visual analysis of moving objects becomes difficult To facilitate visual identification of moving objects the dynamic outlining function is used To enable outlining go to the surveillance window menu select Processing then Outlinin
9. archive The access to the archive is not restricted by default The password restricts the playback of all video recordings from the cameras analog and network of a video server If the password protection is enabled all recordings made after the password had been set and before it was cancelled or changed will be accessible for playback upon entering the password only 296 To enable password protection and to create change or cancel passwords use the Computer object settings panel To enable archive password protection do the following Figure 11 2 2 1 1 Check the Protect Archive with Password checkbox 2 Enter the password in the field below the checkbox NOTE The password field cannot be left blank if the checkbox is checked 3 Repeat the password in the second field To disable archive password protection uncheck the Protect Archive with Password checkbox The password entry fields will be cleared and disabled a Settings J Info Storage drives Voice notification dice t 27 ate sie zi el wol i ia Tum off sound Mor MM wHMwHY Hee ee Sound from cameras Protect archive with password Figure 11 2 2 1 NOTE After the password is cancelled or changed you will not be able to play the recordings made when the password was active The video recordings protected with a previous password during the time when that password was active cannot be played a blue area will be displayed in the mo
10. Courier Hem the beginning of the documen String C Yellow A CJ Word E clack a E Show titles Figure 5 5 5 1 Setting up the titles will be discussed later in more detail 5 6 STORING THE VIDEO ARCHIVE 5 6 1 Selecting the disk to save the recordings Archive files are located on video server local and removable disks in the VIDEO folders Select the disks for storing the archive in the Settings tab for the Computer object Figure 5 6 1 1 114 Hig Grabber 1 Sa Grabber 2 pea Camera 1 pa Camera 3 pa Camera 4 ia Ray 9 Ray 10 St Ray 11 5S Blew Te By Ray 13 owe Relay 10 Relay 11 oa Relay 12 wae Relay 13 S Grabber 3 a Camera 5 Cetin if Storage drives Voice notification bie ite s 4 stele els i i Tu off sound Hci Sound from cameras _ Protect archive with password Figure 5 6 1 1 The disks available for storing the archive are displayed in the Storage drives table The disk names as well as the numbers of the cameras available for storing the archive are presented in the columns To save a recording from a given camera check the cell for the selected disk row and the column with the relevant camera To stop a recording from a given camera uncheck that cell NOTE A By default Axxon Smart will check all the cells in the table for you NOTE B If the storage disk has not been selected you can t start recording the archive NOTE C To estimate the size of the archive
11. Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c Connectio Query is c Titl Connectio Query is c Titl f Connectio Query is c aa P m S a S oa B oa SE a S a S aa S oa B oa GE oa B oa B ma B oa E ma E o B oa B m BE m S ma S co oo E as Figure 12 4 4 1 12 4 5 Viewing the list of receipts found in the search The list of found receipts is displayed in the Search Results panel The Search Results panel consists of the following elements Figure 12 4 5 1 1 The tabs representing different terminals form the upper part of the panel The number of found receipts for the terminal is indicated next to the terminal name in the tab 2 The Transaction column displays the numbers of the found receipts 325 NOTE The numbers given to receipts by the POS subsystem usually have no relation to real numbers of the receipts 3 The Date Time column displays the date and time of registration of the receipt EJ Search substring a
12. R 0 500 G 0 419 B 0 0813 128 This format is based on the idea that the brightness Y channel is more important than the two other components AXXON video capture cards use digitizing formats 4 2 2 Figure 3 3 7 2 and 4 2 0 Figure 3 3 7 3 DOD OD OOOO DOPOD OPOOP Figure 3 3 7 2 DODOD POPOP OOOO OOOO DODOD POPOP OOOO OOOO DOD OD OOOO Figure 3 3 7 3 Notation QO brightness signal only D brightness and color difference signal Digital coding and compression formats are used to compress audio and video signals Let s describe some of them OOOO OOOO DOROP OPPOPP MPEG 4 is a format that was developed for object oriented compression Several versions of the format exist MPEG 4 compresses audio and video for a wide range of data transfer rates It is applicable in 58 various areas where low speed communication channels are used such as mobile phones Internet or television M JPEG Motion JPEG is a format where each frame or field is compressed as a separate image Motion WaveLet is a compression algorithm developed by AXXON company based on an original mathematical model It effectively combines the best achievements of the leading compression algorithms and the unique needs of security television It is one of the few algorithms designed specifically for security television It offers considerable advantages compared to other widely used algorithms MPEG2 MPEG4 MJPEG Frame siz
13. To change the background select the desired color from the Color list To restore the default background color select Default in the list 204 Monitor 1 AO v0 TOON H 5i 1 Gaton gt 2Gleme E 3 a Alon nove 5 Ci 6 amp x _BE_ D Figure 5 11 12 1 6 2 USING THE SCENE OBJECT 6 2 1 OPENING THE SCENE OBJECT WINDOW Monitor 1 Scene 1 Telemetry panel POS Hide all Figure 6 2 1 1 To open the Scene interface window use the Interface menu of the Main control panel Figure 6 2 1 1 To stop using the Scene object select the same menu item again or select the Hide All item of the same menu NOTE 1 Clicking the Close button in the Scene window title bar will shut down the Axxon Smart system NOTE 2 If the user does not have the right to use the Scene object the corresponding item in the Interface menu will not be displayed 6 2 2 COMPONENTS OF THE SCENE WINDOW 6 2 2 1 THE SCENE WINDOW The Scene window consists of the video surveillance panel the toolbar for changing the video display options the menu for selecting the layouts the displayed cameras sensors and relays the Demo button and the date time display box 205 The toolbar is located at the top of the Scene window NOTE The Scene window can be set up to display no toolbar Description of the scene window components Figure 6 2 2 1 1 The buttons for selecting the video processing mode navigation moving perspective
14. 3 Ifthe sound card is not used in this computer and has been physically removed or is out of order the microphones assigned to this card are displayed in the Unused Microphones list Click the Add button to add the selected microphone to a valid sound card Specify the card in the Board field 234 Grab frequency 8 2 1 Audio setup for IP devices aot Camera 21 pe Camera 22 S Grabber 12 impo Camera 23 poh Camera 24 Bg Grabber 13 2 pel Camera 25 Se Sucio 1 ei Microphone 1 oft Microphone 2 i Microphone 3 oof Microphone 4 coi Microphone 5 off Microphone 6 oof Microphone 7 off Microphone 8 off Microphone 9 eff Microphone 10 Unused microphones Figure 8 1 1 1 If a Grabber object exists in the system with an IP device that has audio outputs it is listed in the list of sound cards Figure 8 2 1 1 235 ef Microphone 12 ef Microphone 13 ef Microphone 14 ef Microphone 15 ef Microphone 16 off Microphone 17 E Audio 2 ol Audio 3 E Audio 4 i Audio 5 FA Audio 6 Audio r J Monitor 1 LE Monitor 2 Ld Monitor 3 eo Monitor 4 Unused microphones Board IpCam Axis 192 168 1 66 a Add Grab frequency Figure 8 2 1 1 8 2 2 Audio subsystem setup in case of using the FS 6c and FS 16 exp video capture cards The FS 6C and FS 16 EXP cards have eight dedicated line audio inputs Figure 8 2 2 1 Figure 8 2 2 2 Sound card socket i DB9_ M to 8 RCA F
15. Another way of using the Axxon Smart software is by running it as a Windows service Service functionality allows creating executable applications that work continually as separate Windows sessions The services may have no interface elements and may be started on computer power on closed at will and started again This allows using the services on the server or other computers with no user interaction Besides the service can be started in the security context different from the current Windows user or in the security context of another user or the default user of the computer To install Axxon Smart as a service check the Install Axxon Smart as a Service checkbox in one of the installation wizard windows at the time of system installation When Axxon Smart runs as a service the system is entered under the system user only The name of the created service Axxon Smart The description of the created service Runs video exe as a Windows service To set up start and stop the services use the Computer Management window which can be opened by right clicking the My Computer icon on the Desktop and selecting Manage in the context menu View and edit all existing services on the computer in the Services and Applications tab To modify enter the properties of the required service A service can be started manually or automatically by selecting the corresponding options If the service fails response actions can be set ex service re start a
16. Automatic ee of this user in Windows with no Enable password request The user name password and network domain workgroup to be used for automatic Windows authorization The Domain User name Password Domain a field is populated automatically depending on certain Windows settings To restore previous start up settings you need to open the TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility again If Axxon Smart is set up to start automatically instead of Explorer you won t be able to use standard file browsing capabilities do the following to start the utility 1 Run the Windows Task Manager Press Ctrl Alt Del and select Task Manager in the menu that opens Alternatively press Ctrl Shift Esc In the File menu select New Task Run In the dialog box that opens enter the full pathname to TweakiAxxon Smart exe file For example it might be C Axxon Smart Tools TweakiAxxon Smart exe Click OK 5 Select the Explorer radio button in the Windows settings panel of the utility 6 Restart the computer 13 8 2 The video section This section includes the video subsystem settings Table 13 8 2 describes the settings of the Video section 353 JPG amp AM files export path f By default C V4ssonSmart Telemetry About C Other Frames count 500 Debug mode Mone Dort allow to hide interface w assonzott com Ok Figure 13 8 2 1 Table 13 8 2 Export Path The folder to save exported
17. Axxon Smart Modules webroot Figure 10 4 2 1 The home page template contains the parameters of the page and of the Java applet controlling the surveillance windows display 275 fm C 4xx0n Smarti Modules webroot ioj x File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help Back z Search lear Folders gt x e BAL Address CHasccon SmartiModulestwebroot Go Snag E py Dimensions cc jar 100 KB Executable Jar File 30 11 2008 1 02 Il favicon ico o4 KE ACDSee6 ICO Image 09 06 2006 17 34 Efajget_java_blue button aif 4KB ACDSee GIF Image 09 06 2008 17 54 58 x 31 index htm SEB HTML Document 09 06 2005 17 34 Figure 10 4 2 1 10 4 3 Applet parameters The Java applet settings in the home page html code can be used to specify the video and controls transmission parameters in case of using a third HTTP server change the interface components of the applet and enable the current traffic display Figure 10 4 3 1 The description of each parameter takes a separate line and starts from the lt param name tag followed by the quoted parameter name Then the value tag and the quoted parameter value follow The line ends with the gt symbol In general each line looks like lt param name Parameter_Name value Parameter_Value gt NOTE If a parameter is not specified in the index htm template the default value is used 276 Ej index htm WordPad O x File Edit View Insert Format He
18. Down MBPEG 4 Decoder which enables streaming video in Microsoft Toternet Feolorer ni F a ieee Figure 5 4 1 31 Use the settings panel for the Grabber object to choose an IP device and connect Axxon Smart to it Figure 5 4 1 32 To set up the Grabber object do the following 90 1 Select the video digitizing device local or network Specify the Type for IP cameras IP device Choose the type of the IP camera in the Brandname list Enter the IP DNS address Enter the number of the port a aot ee Enter the user name and the password into the User Name and the Password fields to access the IP camera Authorization parameters are identical to the ones used to access the device from the Web browser By default the user name and password included in the documentation are used amp a H Computer Eas Grabber 1 pea Camera 1 po Camera 2 pe Camera 6 ope Camera 7 Password p Sii Figure 5 4 1 32 5 4 1 7 Receiving the video Set up the Camera object of the Axxon Smart software to receive video The Video tab of the Camera object displays the number of the Grabber object that matches the IP camera in the Card field To receive the video from the IP camera specify 1 in the Channel field Figure 5 4 1 33 91 ideo Compression Detector Title Board Name Record alarms C Disable _ Brightness Contrast max z min at Realtime processing recording Figur
19. Mid 5 f s Min 2 f s 10 The Resolution slider This setting is for the frame resolution To cut on PC resources used to process images the resolution of a processed image is reduced below that of the displayed stored to disk image Max gives the resolution of 352x288 for PAL 320x240 for NTSC Mid 176x144 PAL 160x120 NTSC Min 88x72 PAL 80x60 NTSC 5 11 3 2 Detector in operation A motion detector recognizes moving objects within the controlled scene Detected moving objects are outlined on screen Figure 5 11 3 2 Motion detectors catch and outline moving objects fast and in good quality 188 EB axon Smart Monitor 1 H oO Cali CEE E wa gt 4 9fps 608256 704x576 amp ABACK OG CAS _ o V 2 Gi amp i CG AABAAAAae Aa 16 48 04 J The detector is set up using the settings panel The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 4 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 The Armed Always ch
20. and its width and height in the W and H fields The coordinates and dimensions are set as percentage of the screen size 2 Select the overlay type Overlay II is usually the optimum choice This type is selected by default NOTE Some video cards do not support any of the Axxon Smart overlay types 3 Inthe Archive Search Depth field specify the default search depth if the operator does not set another value Search Depth is set in days To clear the list of previous search strings click the Clear History button 5 Todisplay the video image in the same size and proportions as the POS object surveillance window check the Free Layout checkbox 6 To enable printing and export of receipt reports check the Allow Print Report checkbox If this checkbox is checked the Print button is displayed in the POS window By selecting a receipt and clicking this button you create a printed report containing the receipt text and the video frame at the moment of receiving the selected line of the receipt or the first line if no lines were selected 7 To show only the Title N tabs where at least one receipt has been found in the Search Results panel check the Show Only None Empty Fetching checkbox 8 To choose the color scheme of the POS window use the Window Color drop down list 9 To choose the color of the receipt lines containing the search strings use the Color for Search Criteria drop down list 317 Line 10 Line 11 Line
21. cceccceccseeceseceecceecceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 243 8 3 3 Playing an audio recording from the archive ccseccseccsecceeccecceeccseccsecesecaueceucceeesseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 244 S34 TAS MICFOPMONEGINGICAlOl nrar a R sae cauuaeousy oaiGee eee haleNe tia eade toda Meuse A 245 8 3 5 IREAlIME AUCIO DIdV dCi ariani a hana etacaniieteam iaetecnas a R T 246 8 4 Possible audio Setup problems and SOLUTIONS ccsccsccesccscceccecceccesccscceccesccncceccesccecceccesscnccescesscecceses 246 SAT MheAudio Wizard ICI EY aii Sacttets race a a a A A A AT E E eee 246 9 THERAY RELAY SUBSYSTEM spn aries asians ens a ec ee 247 9 1 GENERALINFORMA ON iiissccssscnvsdcsssncsadetsawatebaesadsenevsnesssnen E vepenesoosnentsroessbepeucouneseies 247 9 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 4 4 RAY RELAY CARDG ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 247 9 2 1 Ray relay cards installation ON FS Cards ccccccsesccccesscceceeccccescceceeccecueeceseeeceeseeeceesegecesseecetsaeeenes 248 9 3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 16 4 RAY RELAY CARDG ssscccccccsssssseeeeccccccesssseceeccccenesseeeeeceeeees 250 9 3 1 Ray relay cards installation onto the FS Cards cc ceeeccccsscceceesceceeecceceeccceeecceeeeceeeeeceesegecetseeeenes 251 9 4 RAY CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR 4 4 AND 16 4 RAY RELAY CARDG cccccssssscccccssssceccccsssscceceeeess 253 9 5 AXXON SMART SETUP FOR USING THE RAY RELAY CARD cccccss
22. e Line 25 Telemetry panel 10 00 00 Camera 1 Start recording 10 00 00 Camera 1 Stop recording 0 00 00 All cameras Arm Figure 5 9 2 4 9 9 3 INDICATION OF CAMERA STATUS 5 9 3 1 Color codes for borders of surveillance windows The color of the video surveillance window border indicates the current detectors status The color codes representing the camera status are set up in Axxon Smart settings The surveillance window border is set by default to the following colors Figure 5 9 3 1 e Light green The Main detector zone has been disarmed for the camera but one or some auxiliary zones may be armed e Yellow The main motion detection zone has been armed for the camera The camera ID icon also becomes highlighted in yellow when the main zone is armed e Red Armed zone detector sends an alarm Alarm color indication 155 E3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 O fj wm ict a e mg eo 5 4fps 13010 320x240 16 08 22 FI study CRHGREGEH KH AAAS SACK KSC S Figure 5 9 3 1 NOTE When several detection zones are armed arming an auxiliary detector does not turn the border to a yellow color if the main detector is not armed The border remains green in this case The camera ID icon border also remains green If an auxiliary detector zone is armed and detects motion the color of video surveillance window border becomes red skipping the phase of being yellow 5 9 3 2 Choice of colors for indication of camera status borders
23. ea Camera 5 io Camera 6 3 Grabber 4 bp Camera F peo Camera 8 3 H Grabber 5 poh Camera 9 p Camera 10 3 Grabber amp inp Camera 11 ope Camera 12 i i Grabber 7 pea Camera 3 J ides Advanced Compression betector y Tiles Detection zone Direction No 9 Hame Detection frequency Lost items Frame scale Figure 5 11 10 1 5 11 10 2 Detector in operation The lost items detector is capable of recognizing newly appeared or disappeared items within the scene this is also called objects tracking If the presence absence time of a motionless object exceeds the pre defined time value a rectangular border outlines the critical object Figure 5 11 10 2 The detector operation is based on the images averaged over different time intervals The detector is capable of recognizing lost objects and the objects that reside within the scene This is done using an activity detector which registers the object s appearance in the field of view 198 g3 axxon Smart Monitor 1 ao ax B i ii EGOE 4 9fps 608256 704x576 A CAAA GAEE AACCCVCAS 4 17 4447 Age Figure 5 11 10 2 5 11 11 Object tracking detector 5 11 11 1 Setup The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are available 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed NOTE If the Recording Alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactiv
24. m Detection frequency max E the detector must trigger Minimum filtration value makes the system detect objects moving at any speed This setting allows eliminating detector triggering on the noise snow rain etc mir NOTE To setup a motion detector properly assign minimum initial values to the Sensitivity Contrast and Filtration parameters The Sensitivity is selected so that the detector does not trigger on the static image 8 The Size slider This setting value corresponds to the part of the total frame square occupied by 10 SLET Detector in operation the smallest detected object The detector zone triggers an alarm if it detects the movement of an object bigger than the specified size The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms The Detection Frequency slider This setting relates to how often a detector retrieves signals from a video image It should be set to the lowest level sufficient for correct recognition of a moving object Max stands for 8 frames per second Mid 5 f s Min 2 f s 10 The Resolution slider This setting is for the frame resolution To cut on PC resources used to process images the resolution of a processed image is reduced below that of the displayed stored to disk image Max gives the resolution of 352x288 for PAL 320x240 for NTSC Mid 176x144 PAL 160x120 NTSC Min 88x72 PAL 80x60 NTSC Th
25. magnifier 128 164 MANUAL 16 33 Masking 147 149 182 Microphone 137 227 M JPEG 57 MODULES 33 246 Moment Quest 45 Monitoring 275 278 280 281 343 Motion Wavelet 66 108 MPEG 4 57 N navigation 174 175 319 NTSC 63 67 O Outlining of moving objects 167 Overlay 121 122 143 304 337 p 371 PAL 54 55 60 61 63 65 67 68 77 99 107 188 204 351 POCKET PC 266 Post alarm recording 105 Pre alarm 104 R Receipt 292 293 294 295 Relay 240 241 Resolution 55 60 61 63 65 67 99 188 203 324 S Scene 37 45 119 343 Schedule 52 154 245 Sensor 136 240 242 243 Settings panel 46 47 48 49 51 52 240 343 SMARTPHONE 35 269 SMARTPPC 36 SoundSet exe 323 Subnet mask 84 93 Subtitles 137 Support exE 341 T TOOLS 34 135 TweakiAxxonSmart exe 39 40 288 337 338 339 V video capture cards FS 8 68 video capture cArds FS 5B 69 Video sequence export 177 372 video server 58 94 107 111 119 120 131 132 173 voice notification 34 247 W Watchdog 61 64 65 68 69 77 253 254 255 256 257 258 WAV 34 252 253 Window Options 123 137 138 WS hardware compression card 66 Y YUV 55 104 Z zoom 128 143 163 164 170 174 214 273 ZOOM 217 zoom out 143 373
26. oa Cut 24 07 INNA 16 28 20 Pn Figure 12 4 8 1 12 4 9 Printing and exporting the receipt reports The Titles Search window allows printing and exporting the report about the selected receipt containing the contents of the receipt and the video frame corresponding to the selected line To start printing or exporting click the Print button NOTE Axxon Smart can be set up to prevent an operator from printing and exporting reports the Print button is not displayed in this case To print or export a receipt report double click the receipt in the Search Results panel To include the video frame double click the desired line in the Titles panel NOTE The Print button is not enabled right after the Titles Search window is opened The button becomes enabled if at least one receipt is selected in the Search Results panel Clicking the Print button Figure 12 4 9 1 opens the report preview window The preview contains the report as it will be printed The size of the report fits into A4 page format 329 Saar ue ctriney Amex ava Period irene 23 02 2009 23 5959 16 09 08 7 16 09 13 ix 24 02 2009 23 5959 16 09 24 16 09 39 3 16 09 42 Search regulis visa iE 16 09 45 ce Dua by Aun y 16 09 51 S Titles 1 55 ymai aza 3 16 10 13 ye Por Zation 16 10 35 Transaction Date Time sd inj uggs Eevee chema 1048610 18 00 16 10 55 24 02 2009 16 26 28 neme SMGHORA za 1
27. the elements cannot be moved The vertical line in the right corner of the element group indicates that this group can be moved To move an element group click and hold the vertical line in the left corner of the group then move the group to another location Figure 6 2 2 4 The element groups in the Scene toolbar can be displayed vertically or horizontally To change the orientation of a group drag it close to the corresponding edge of the Scene window For example to rotate a vertical group to a horizontal position drag it close to the top or bottom edge of the window After the element groups have been placed in the desired locations they can be locked to prevent further movement 209 E3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 A x 2E CEES EB oxxon Smart Scene 1 g OX To add or select the element layout to be displayed in the toolbar use the Interface Modes button To add an available toolbar element layout select Add in the Interface Modes menu of the toolbar Figure 6 2 2 5 To select a layout click it in the list To remove available layouts use the Delete menu item To edit the toolbar element layout drag the element groups onto it then add it to the list by clicking the Add menu item of the Layouts menu and entering a name for it The elements and their locations in the layout are locked To set the number of cameras to be displayed use the corresponding button in the Scene too
28. 00 Total Due 18 00 19 29 10 Balance Due 92 01 Payment Authorization Payment Authorization Lean Chit Figure 12 4 2 1 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 9A N INNA 16 26 29 The Titles Search window contains the following elements Figure 12 4 2 1 search request creation panel search results display panel the list of POS terminals registered in Axxon Smart and the indication of connection availability for the terminals 320 4 the Print button for printing or exporting the receipt report 5 video surveillance window Two modes of the Titles Search surveillance window are available a viewing the real time video image with limited camera control functionality b playing the archive recordings including the video frames corresponding to the selected receipt lines NOTE The titles are always displayed in the Titles Search window irrespective of the titles display settings of the camera monitor 6 The Titles contents display window 12 4 3 Creation of a search request To create a search request do the following 1 Inthe Search String field enter the symbol sequence words to search for in the receipts database NOTE The
29. 12 Line 13 Line 14 a Line 15 Line 16 Telemetry panel System security service E Schedule ee T est search lt oy a Lites out wo EH C Allow print report C Show only none empty fetching C Overlay Type l Tetley Lue M Window color a Color for search criteria E Archive search depth daps a Clear history Figure 12 3 4 1 12 3 5 Showing and hiding the titles in the surveillance window The video surveillance and POS operations control are synchronized in Axxon Smart by displaying the receipt text lines over the video image in the surveillance windows The receipt lines are displayed as titles running over the video image The following options are available for operator convenience changing the color of the titles color highlighting of specific symbol sequences words and or lines 3 choosing the location of the titles in the surveillance window for example in the area where they do not obstruct the cash register cashier or customer in the image 318 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 0 a x B naa aama e 8 3fps 152064 352x288 Processing Export Stop recording Arm all zones Disarm all zones Fo Main Zone 8 1 Zone 6 2 zone 8 5 Zone 8 6 16 30 04 Ape O HURKEKGR KAKA SHOCK CLK Figure 12 3 5 1 To disable the titles display select Show Titles then Titles in the surveillance window context menu Figure 12 3 5 1 To enable the ti
30. 328 MS UTILH IES induindjnin EES 332 13 1 GENERALINFORMATION iaon aae EEE T 332 13 2 ARCHIVE CREATION DATE CORRECTION sssessesoseosessssoseeseosescssosecsesoseosesossosecsesoseosesossosecsesosessesossosee 333 13 3 READING THE VIDEO CAPTURE CARD CODES AND HARDWARE PROTECTION KEYS cssccssecssecnseees 334 13 4 Audio s bsystem setup wizard accicssscsesacwseesssewsaeeseendanenavuacassecobensavswoaedlensaay aaa a raaa aaa 334 13 5 PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT esessssosessssosecsesosecsescssosecsssoseosesossosecsesossossosecossosecsesossosecsesosecsesossosee 335 13 6 DIGITAL SIGNATURE VERIFICATION is cssscvnsicsvavendecesseanesseessees venvededccnusdsves cuvasseaseneysvensedeeveessaewsseueasveseveeess 337 13 7 ARCHIVE PLAYBACK AND CONVERSION ssccssccsssccsssccssccsssccssccssscssccnssccssscescccssscescscesscessssessenssesonss 339 13 7 1 Akenve selechon nerea Oe ge a ea 340 13 7 2 Recordihe s DAY ACK cssuueansacs a a tetany ouvtel aavonaedede aus sTecabanawdeabiun Duvobasandeouaeecaehs 341 13 7 3 Searching the archive rinnce pious S OTEA nub ean eaawadeeaeneau maoreeneoiestaaets 342 13 7 4 EXPOrting ramet BIVIP OrJPG TINGS sss sta cichi ce weaned E E E A 343 13 7 5 Converting wenes to AVONA terse st cacedcccctan sl meted cosa al ae aan meceiaan ed donaes saces E 345 13 7 6 The SOUIIEY setUDnsn a AE A 348 13 8 TWEAKING UTILITY eiis ranere ar a E T E n A A 350 13 8 1 WAIRGOWS SE UO Aane E A EE E TE T 351 13 8 2 MEGO
31. 60 5 32 Wideo Capture Card ES SClEGS heoa a aa aa aaa a a 60 5 3 2 1 Video capture card resources real time and multiplexing modes o nosnssssesseesessessessessrsersrrsees 60 53 2 2 VIDEO CAPTURE CARDS SPECIFICATIONS x cas con dcesiecs aa beanies 61 Bd Zee de ESO BCA aa ste sagen a E E sigeas das a E vastectdesasaaeaeeeas 61 5 3 2 2 2 FSGC FS I6 Cards A EXP noina ance pecicasaires A devedecavtaned ante J alee R 63 SoA Fo S Ca E E E A 65 S23 HARDWARE COMPRESSION CARD S iaae T a E ata saalaxenntautieet 66 SA MMEFOCUCTION ea TAT E E a T A a ontconentaetaatieanes 66 5 3 3 2 WSA WS E CA Sora NAN N EAN a a N 67 SoA Analoge VIGGO OULCArG INStAllatlOn saia a ion eaausevasacs nvnsaanieeatasgiatsnammentaunieentaanmneoes 69 S35 The DeSUB BNG XX Interace tabl Enine dance aanccusan iment vies n Sonicare anidnieanoasn addon a soatennts 70 5 4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND SETUP ccssccsscccscccsccscccsscnsscnsscnsscnsscssccsccossccssccsscesscesscesessscosscosses 71 SA PSOE Cara SOU U Dena aaa aa aa aaa aaa eaaa 71 SALL FGC Cara iStallaulOn se a a a EA A ace A aero A eee 71 SALLI Diver stallat on eras AE A A aa a a a a a a a a teaius 72 54 11 2 Testing the video capture card INStallatiOn x seeestiessteewiewssceseeareees a A a a a edness 76 5 4 1 2 Possible installation problems and reMedies ccccseccssccsecceeceecceeccsecceeeeeceauceeeceeuceseeseeeaeeeaeees 77 SA Setting Up Grabber objects sscan n n a n
32. 9 2 3 RECOFOING USING a MaC Onion An E aT A anes onduaesuewinaeeedeaesn deta dendscnussenstss 152 D2 SENEduledTecordNE neiaie R E AE EA 153 5 9 3 INDICATION OF CAMERA STATUS crot Tan A E N E AA AEE I ATA 154 5 9 3 1 Color codes for borders of surveillance wiNndOWsS ssssssssessessessessessrssrsersrrseesersessessesseserserseese 154 5 9 3 2 Choice of colors for indication of camera status borders of the camera windows seeescssese 155 5 9 3 3 Colors of the borders for camera ID INdICaAtOrS ccccseccssccsecceeccecceeceeucceeecseceseeeuceeseeueeeenees 157 5 9 3 4 Color codes for borders of surveillance windows and camera ICONS cceecceeceeeeeecceeceeecceeeeees 158 5 9 3 5 Camera CONTOUICONS aeaiia A E S 159 SHIA image Procesna N A A E TA eeenenen ener aaa 160 SIAE DEMEI E Aa E E E E E aanasdnaus eeteanat onuan aoa 161 594 2 ZOOMING NONTNEINA E ee a E eesnnseeseamaanacs 162 DOA MapN ea a A AE O anena ene maeeiaes 163 SIJAA IMA BS SHARD SMI SB acra E A E Tease AA 164 5 9 4 5 CONTAS UNE IMT ale Ea E A E E a a 164 D926 OUTLINING OF MOVING oD eCie a ianw carniennstastinanaononcnssaarmanonceut 165 59 5 EXPO ANG PRIit OU iyaa a A A aN A O A 166 5 9 5 1 Frame EXON ornare eset poeneunetacsartecachaynetounantendead ueaaadawaten he ema aceo a eeeaaeecatenenenh ccs 166 S952 PURI AS UMa E atest cra rater cere cree ated terrace ante scete aa ae cece cre tous aie tarot E ead ncowseaweanen case 167 5 9 6 Keyboard shortcuts to
33. ARCHIVE NAVIGATION To navigate the archive use the navigation timescale and the timestamps panel where the starting times of the recordings are displayed To move up and down the timestamps panel use the scrolling bar or the up and down arrow keys When you switch the window to playback mode the timescale contains 24 intervals corresponding to the hours of the day Blue markers on the scale indicate the recorded periods Clicking the hours on the timescale zooms the timescale in and re calibrates it to minutes Figure 6 2 4 4 Keep zooming in until the maximum scale factor is reached the whole timescale corresponds to a 5 minute interval Zoom out by right clicking the scale To move the enlarged interval along the timescale drag it using the mouse When you click a blue marker the corresponding timestamp is highlighted in the timestamp panel 219 E oxxon Smart Scene 1 0O EI o MAon Qu a CEE 04 09 08 a gt E TS 18 03 53 In the archive playback mode the box in the bottom right corner of the Scene window shows the date and time of the displayed recordings This information helps navigate the archive The current date and time are shown in the information box at the right side of the Scene toolbar Figure 6 2 4 5 The box can be set up to show the playback rate in frames per second 3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 O Lx o Pron QuwQ a CZE 0i Besides showing the date and time of the displayed recording
34. B 915 B 970 B 975 JVC all models all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras oh A Panasonic all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A Samsung SNC B5395 SNC B2315 SNC M300 TrendNet all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A Arecont all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A MicroDigital all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A Pixeye all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A D Link DCS 6620G DCS 5220 DCS 3420 DCS 3220G Sony all models http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph A Axis All models except versions with firmware less than 4 cm http www axxonsoft com products axxon professional integration cameras ph 47 Brand of IP device Model of IP device 4 Setting parameters of IP device that has to be added to the objects tree on the tab Hardware is performed in the group Add device manually IP address of the required device is set in the fielf IP address Figure 3 3 3 2 1 5 When necessarychange port of IP device s connection to the server Intellect in the field Port Figure 3 3 3 2 2 Select the brand of IP device from the dropdown list Figure 3 3 3 2 3 Selec
35. Back and Forward grouped at the centre of video monitor tools panel to go toa particular camera window Slide show is performed by sequential displaying of single camera windows if 1x view is selected four camera windows if 4x view is selected etc The left and right arrow keys on the keyboard have the same functionality as the Back and Forward buttons on the monitor control panel Note A The control panel including the browsing buttons can be set not to be displayed NOTE B If a camera is turned off it is not included in the slide show and browsing 140 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a0 ux aes Ble e mal o gt 25fps 5933 320x240 OH MMMM eR ses Kec sscas Figure 5 8 6 1 5 8 7 Active surveillance window camera To start working with a video surveillance window activate it Left click inside the window to activate it Activation of surveillance window is indicated by the grey color of the camera ID icon and the grey triangular button meant for switching to archive mode Figure 5 8 7 1 To de activate the currently active surveillance window either activate another window or left click the free space on the video monitor tools panel You can switch between the cameras on the video monitor by activating them using A n J hotkeys It starts with the first activated camera 141 ooonSmart o Monitor 1 oom H Ha f 25fps 6170 320x240 O OAA AAAA SECARA Figure 5 8 7 1 NOTE If n
36. Camera 6 iat Grabber 4 pea Camera 7 e Camera 8 i Grabber 5 ipa Camera 9 pe Camera 10 Fei Grabber 6 iden Advanced Compression Detector ities Detection zone Direction Me ee if J Sensitivity Mame n Alarmed Contrast Filtration ize ees ki View Show i Detection frequency Detector type Eoo Blind Frame scale Figure 5 11 8 1 5 11 8 2 Detector in operation The lens blocking detector discovers attempts to block the camera lens Its operation is based on analysis of the broadening of the frame histogram relative to the histogram median of the reference closing frame grey 194 5 11 9 Face detector Face detector recognizes every human face within the observed scene A recognized face is outlined The recognition technique is based on cascade linear discriminant algorithm LDA 5 11 9 1 Setup The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 9 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighte
37. Drivers V Include this location in the search O F556 C Guardant CAD ocuments and Settings tatpana makarovalDesk Browse 3 Mis O Key Don t search will choose the driver to install O languages Choose this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does not guarantee that Manual the driver you choose will be the best match for pour hardware C Redist ee R a E x lt Back Next gt Cancel Cancel Figure 5 4 1 8 At the next step the operating system searches for the video input card driver and installs it The monitor will display the corresponding dialog boxes Select Continue Anyway in the dialog box requesting confirmation for the installation of hardware which has not been tested for Windows OS compatibility Figure 5 4 1 9 Found New Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software__ IT FS5 6 Ly Setting a system restore point and backing up old files in case Your system needs to be restored in the future Back Hegt gt Figure 5 4 1 9 75 As soon as the driver is installed the monitor displays a dialog box to close the New Hardware Wizard application Figure 5 4 1 10 Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for fa ITY F556 Click Finish to close the wizard Back Cancel Figure 5 4 1 10 Select Finish in the above dialo
38. External ground RELAY Figure 9 3 1 2 Power relay connection example with external power supply J6 SOCKET COLLECTOR EMITTER DI Digital in ray DO Digital out relay GND Ground computer casing CGND External ground RELAY Power source power Connection option of a power relay PCB power supply Connector J6 DI 1 24w DI 2i 24 DI 3 24y Collector Emitter DI Digital in sensor DO Digital out relay GND Ground to the computer tower CGND External ground T RELAY Figure 9 3 1 3 Low current relay connection example power supply on board J6 SOCKET COLLECTOR EMITTER DI Digital in ray DO Digital out relay GND Ground computer casing CGND External ground RELAY 255 Consider the following technical characteristics of the ray relay cards when connecting the rays Table 9 4 1 Table 9 4 1 pe 4 4 ray relay card 16 4 ray relay card Breakdown voltage 1000 V for up to 1 minute 1000 V for up to 1 minute Open collector interface 24 V 30 mA 24 V 30 mA 9 5 AXXON SMART SETUP FOR USING THE RAY RELAY CARD Before using the rays and relays with Axxon Smart the Ray and Relay objects should be created and set up Axxon Smart registers the rays and relays automatically The number of the Ray and Relay objects registered automatically is determined by the key file included with Axxon Smart installation The Ray and Relay objects are c
39. FS 6C and FS 16 EXP video capture cards Figure 5 3 4 1 The FS 8 video capture card has a built in analog video output Figure 5 3 4 2 To install the analog video out card do the following 1 Make sure that the video capture card is unplugged the computer power supply is off or the video capture card is not installed in a computer 2 Install the analog video card into the appropriate slots on the video capture card Figure 5 3 4 2 3 Connect the red BNC socket of the interface cable to the analog monitor Connecting the ray relay cards and the Watchdog health monitoring cards will be described in other sections 70 5 3 5 The D SUB BNC XX interface cable The D SUB 25 BNC XX interface cable is used to connect TV cameras to the external D SUB 25 socket of the FS 5B video capture card The D SUB 25 BNC XX cable has the following sockets Figure 5 3 5 1 D SUB 25 1 BNC XX depends on the system configuration Figure 5 3 5 1 5 4 HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND SETUP 5 4 1 FS 6C card setup 5 4 1 1 FS 6C card installation To install the FS 6C video capture card do the following Turn off the computer take the power cable plug out of the mains outlet Take the computer case cover off 3 Install the video capture card into a free PCI slot in the motherboard Figure 5 4 1 1 Secure the card into its place with screws 71 Figure 5 4 1 2 NOTE Prior to card installation ensure there is no static ele
40. FUN Bosch dll telemetry run E car _title run telemetry _Panel run COMARTZA dll titleviewer run rts LUsbAdc cll Crelatsz dll Yms FUN a DeviceManager dll wWweb5erver run a Exportmodeller dll fey WizardHost exe F53 14 WS6 14 F55 1A W714 F56 14 W814 idk cll X xerces c_2_8 dll IpDevwWizard wiz Ipint24dapter dll Tpint34dapter all Ipint CriverManager dll a Itv videocam dll LCard IA S lcomp dll Fe Loader exe MediaConverterManager dll Figure 1 5 3 1 1 5 4 Utilities tools All system utilities are located in the Tools folder The utilities will be described in detail later Figure 1 5 4 1 31 E C Axon Smarti Tools File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back gt z Bi a Search gt Folders Vo it x ie Em Address E Caxson Smart Tools Go Snagit E ea Perform a Snaglt Cap yA Audio Wizard exe 119 KB Application 09 07 2009 16 41 E Boards exe 1504KE Application 09 07 2009 16 37 D3 codereader exe 476 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 34 P Convert exe 256KB Application 09 07 2009 16 32 Ee Converter exe 2 336 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 34 Po dbview exe 1112KB Application 09 07 2009 16 53 H Fos exe 1616KEB Application 09 07 2009 16 36 a ordapi3z dll 672 KB Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 32 a guardant api32ru dll 36 K6 Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 32 Eal Signcheck exe 1 192KB Application 09 07 2009 16 33 5 Support exe 1 180 K6 Application 09 07 2009 16 33 E3 Tweakiexe z4
41. JPG and AVI files By default the Default Axxon Smart Export radio button is selected which saves files to the Export folder of the Axxon Smart program folder To choose another folder select the Other radio button and enter the pathname Enter the pathname into the field below or by clicking the Open button next to it Ring Minimum free space left on the archive drives In megabytes The archives are saved in a loop that is the earliest records are overwritten if less than the specified amount of free space is left on the disk By default the value is 1000 MB Frames Count Maximum number of frames in an archive file If this value is 100 and a recording consists of 300 frames then 3 files by 100 frames will be created By default the value is 500 Debug Mode Debug 1 Show the Debug window Module errors are registered in the logs Debug 2 Show the Debug window Module errors and warning events are registered in the logs Debug 3 Show the Debug window Allow opening the modules console 354 Disallow Hide Interface Do not allow the user to hide interface windows in Axxon Smart 13 8 3 The PTZ section This section is used to set up the PTZ telemetry devices Table 13 8 3 describes the PTZ settings Table 13 8 3 a ES Delay between Commands Time delay between the PTZ controls execution In milliseconds By default 250 ms Priority Delay Time delay before the control is passed to the interface component
42. MS5QL msdblog ldF mssqisystemresource ld My Documents SOL Server Database Transac SOL Server Database Transac 2 045 KB 512 KB 4 My Computer Le My Network Places wih mssqisystemresource mdr tempdb mdf SOL Server Database Primary SQL Server Database Primary 39 232 KB 2 240 KB Details templog IdF titles mdf SOL Server Database Transac SQL Server Database Primary 512 EB 2 240 KB titles _log LDF SQL Server Database Transac S60 KB Figure 1 5 1 1 1 5 2 User manual manual The Manual folder contains the documentation for Axxon Smart Figure 1 5 2 1 E C Aron Smarti Manual File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Bek gt Bi pO Search gt Folders FE Ez x if m Address E Ciasexon Smart Manual Go Date Modified Manual pdf 18 594 K6 Adobe Acrobat Doc 27 06 2009 0 01 amp Snagit T Figure 1 5 2 1 1 5 3 Modules modules Several connectable modules form the software structure of the system Each module is represented by an executable file The video exe module runs other modules executables when necessary All software modules are located in the Modules folder Figure 1 5 3 1 B C Akon Smart Modules File Edit view Favorites Tools Help sak od gt z T a Search Folders es E x lz Em Address E C 4ccxon Smart Modules Go Snag Fal iy Player run pos run RAS rum SB 1A ALDER 14 SDKBoschWrapper dll audio run Sms
43. Mask and select the relevant detector Figure 5 11 1 4 182 E3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 H o Bix IOE a mGa eo 7 7fps 25245 640x480 amp ASOVCC LAS _ c y A CGGGGGG HAEE aoe Camera d Show titles d Export gt SA Zoom Start recording Magnifier Arm all zones ier Sharpness Disarm all zones xe Contrast Main xal Contour Zone 1 1 C Detector mask J Figure 5 11 1 4 On entering the mask display editing mode a cross shaped cursor appears at the centre of the video surveillance window To create a mask over a surveillance window image do the following 1 Move the cursor to a desired masking area of the video image and press the left mouse button 2 Drag the cursor diagonally still holding the mouse button pressed a rectangular field is created 3 Release the left mouse button A rectangular netted pattern mask will be displayed over the image indicating the area where motion detection is disabled Figure 5 11 1 5 183 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 amp o Ax Oi ee mm gt gt 5 4fps 25026 640x480 GG AAAAAAAas ASCKCAaKs BACCCLCAS Figure 5 11 1 5 To delete edit the detector mask right click and hold the mouse button then drag the cursor across the image NOTE This is the only way to delete a mask After exiting the masking mode the netted pattern over the image becomes invisible but the defined mask persists You can check this by re entering the maski
44. Microsoft Office Tm TRADOS MultiTerm 7 d Utilities Capture boards cade reader utility k Wink GR a About y Digital signature checking utility P gt intellect exe TRADOS 7 Freelance P 2 Axxon Smart H FFS testing utility an VE are ie Uninstall E Playback and converter utility Asccon Smart T User Manual H Sound system s tweaking utility All Programs Microsoft ActiveSync SS Tweaking utility Log OFF Shut Down stat S G oo gi Figure 12 4 9 1 To start this utility use the executable in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder or the Windows taskbar menu Start gt Programs gt Axxon Smart gt Reading the Hardware Keys Figure 12 4 9 1 Code Reader x FS 5 6 8176 Figure 12 4 9 2 If the FS WS video capture card drivers or the Guardant Stealth Net USB Dongle hardware protection keys are installed in the computer then running the Codereader exe utility opens the window showing the codes of the card or Guardant section Figure 12 4 9 2 13 4 Audio subsystem setup wizard The SoundSet exe utility Figure 12 4 9 1 is designed for extended setup of the audio subsystem The utility allows setting up the microphone sensitivity soeaker volume test audio playback microphone operation sound recording and playback 335 I audio Wizard x Playback check Adjust audio volume to desired Walle Do you hear the music No es Cancel Figure 12 4 9 1 This utility execut
45. NOTE If the list contains no database names this means that invalid SQL Server access settings have been entered user name and or password Verify the settings and change if necessary There is another way of selecting the database a Select the Attach Database File Named radio button b Doone of the following e Enter the titles database name in the field below e Enter the full pathname of the database in the Using the File Name field e Select the database file in the standard dialog box for file opening by clicking the button next to the Using the File Name field 4 Toverify all the database connection settings click the Test Connection button The Connection Test Success message will be displayed in case of successful connection to the database 5 Toconfirm the database connection settings click OK to cancel the changes click Cancel To get information about the Connection tab click Help 314 ES Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Specity the following to connect to SOL Server data 1 Select or enter a server name local SOLESPRESS Refresh Enter information to log on to the server f Use Windows NT Integrated security Use a specific user name and password User rane Password Blank password P Allow saving password 4 Select the database on the server titles Attach a database file as a database name ities Using the tile
46. Other Places c Intellect v 4 7 4_BA45E My Documents F My Computer a My Network Places Details 4 My Computer Figure 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 Drivers You will always find all the required drivers in the Drivers folder of the Axxon Smart installation CD During the installation all the drivers necessary for the chosen configuration are copied and registered in the C Windows Drivers system folder Figure 1 2 1 1 Pain Npaska Bug Us6panHoe Cepsuc Cnpaska Q Has gt z bi Mover 4 Mansa FAL Aapec C Documents and Settings Desktop smart Installer wls Drivers x Nepexog CJ Fs5_6_8_16 Cl Ws File and Folder Tasks Other Places Details Figure 1 2 1 1 12 1 2 2 Key file Key _ ioj xi Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help E7 Q O B rotors f l Address D axxon SmartKey 0 go Pie androider tasks A p Kosec see EJ Make a new folder a Publish this folder to the Web tea Share this folder Other Places a wx E My Documents 4 My Computer My Network Places Details y Figure 1 2 2 1 The video sec key file is required for activating the software The key file is included in the installation kit and is located in the Key folder of the installation CD The key file determines the configuration of the Axxon Smart instance to be installed Figure 1 2 2 1 NOTE Axxon Smart will not work without the key file If the key file is lost or unavaila
47. Overlay M 3 2 Proportions Always On Top Figure 13 7 6 1 Table 13 7 1 a Folder Selection Folder The folder for exported files The pathname can be entered manually or selected in the standard dialog box that opens upon clicking the button next to the field Volume Size Maximum size of the exported file in megabytes If the fragments to be converted are larger than this value several Frames per Second The sampling rate of the exported video Archive export Archive is copied to the specified location with no AVI conversion Separate file will be created for each recording 350 fom The codec to be used for audio conversion POS Terminal The name of the POS terminal the titles from this terminal will be displayed over the exported video image Name Date Time Display camera name and number and creation date of the current frame X Y W H Coordinates and size of the titles area in the video image As a percentage of screen dimensions Overlay Use Overlay mode to display video in the utility window This mode is similar to Overlay Type II Always on Top The utility window is displayed above all other windows 3 2 Ratio 3 2 ratio is maintained when changing the dimensions of the utility window 13 8 TWEAKING UTILITY The TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility Figure 13 7 6 1 is designed for configuring Axxon Smart by editing some Windows registry sections The utility window consists of the sections tree and
48. POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 7 gt id lt 8 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 8 gt id lt 8 gt POS 1 SETUP interval lt 2 gt port_type lt TCP gt CAM_TITLE cam_title_id co Start listen server POS 1 TCP port 2215 0K Client connected to POS 1 port 2215 Kon topapa 10439 Topap Curapetet WINSTON sant tfy J T Hena 22 90 Kongo 1 000 Cymma no ToBapy 22 90 Umanenne ToBapa H3 4eKa Utpux Kon Kon tosapa 49046 Tosap Xne6 QAPHMLIKMK opmoso npamoyr 500r ynak Lena 8 30 Konso 1 000 Cymma no ToBapy 8 30 Umanenne ToBapa H3 Yeka Utpux Kon Koan topapa 56120 Topap MayaapHubl ceexnHe nmn Mapokko Lena 69 90 Kongo 0 846 Cymma no Topapy 59 14 CAM 4 REC_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt CAM 4 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 12 993 gt CAM 4 ARCH_NEW time1 lt 24 06 08 15 07 07 gt time2 lt 24 06 08 15 07 71 CAM 2 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 13 086 gt CAM_ZONE 1 1 MD_STOP md_fps lt 1 gt contour_color lt 16448250 gt sla CAM 7 REC_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt CAM MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 23 946 gt CAM 3 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 24 039 gt CAM ARCH_NEW time1 lt 24 06 08 15 06 56 gt time2 lt 24 06 08 15 07 4 CAM 1 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 24 91 4 gt CAM 8 REC_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt
49. Packets Sent 4 Received Minimum Oms Maximum ms Average CG 5 Documents and Settings tat yana makarova _ Figure 5 4 2 6 5 4 2 1 2 Opening the IP server home page on the built in Web server To open the home page run your browser and enter the IP address in the URL line http assigned IP address Figure 5 4 2 7 95 Live view AXIS 207 Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt A gt Search 5 Favorites f 3 Address http 4192 168 0 1607 Figure 5 4 2 7 A dialog box will open asking for a user name and password for accessing the device home page Figure 5 4 1 27 The user name and password are included in the device documentation Default ones for Axis user name root password root Figure 5 4 2 8 A Index page Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 lol x Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q k 7 z x a TN JO search ST Favorites Ol 2 i LJ lee rel Address E http 192 168 0 160 co Links amp Snagt g Connect to 192 168 0 160 2 xi i I User name X Password D Remember my password OK Cancel l Opening page http 192 168 0 160 view index shtml ff j Internet 7 Figure 5 4 2 8 Enter the user name and password then click OK If valid user name and password have been specified the window will show the video image received from
50. Smart program folder The pathname to the file is displayed in the top right area of the window Click the pathname to access the file The Tools folder will open 14 REMOTE WORKSTATION SETUP 14 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE WORKSTATIONS Remote workstations are used for remote control of the digital video surveillance system The workstations are connected to video servers using the local network and the TCP IP protocol The workstation configuration of Axxon Smart provides the following functionality 1 Monitoring and control of the devices cameras microphones PTZ rays and relays connected to video servers in case the user has appropriate rights Connecting to 4 video servers at a time 3 Interface object configuration 4 Monitor and 1 Scene objects for each workstation 14 2 VIDEOSERVER CONNECTION SETUP Use the Settings panel to set up the connection to the video servers Connection creation and setup will be described in detail below 357 14 2 1 Connection creation To create a connection do the following in the Connection tab Figure 14 2 1 1 1 Inthe IP Address field enter the IP address of the video server to connect to 2 Click the Add button Figure 14 2 1 1 A connection account will be created the video server IP address will be inserted in the Registered IP Addresses list and an object will be created under the Connection node named after the created IP address Figure 14 2 1 2 358 Figure
51. This format is used in TV broadcasting in Canada most Central and South American countries Japan South Korea and Taiwan Each TV line in NTSC is represented by a brightness component Y and two color components El 0 737U 0 268V EQ 0 478U 0 413V The reason for the shift from U V color coding coordinates to Q coordinates is the need for narrower color subcarrier bandwidths down to 0 5 MHz NTSC uses 56 the narrowest video signal bandwidth Since the human eye percepts small details in green and magenta color Q axis as non colored I axis is perpendicular to Q the Eq and Ei signals can be narrowed with no resolution losses The color difference signals are transmitted using the amplitude modulation of the subcarriers of the same frequency with a phase shift of 90 degrees This is very important for separation of the received signals However due to non linear distortions in the transmission channel the subcarriers become modulated by the brightness signal in both amplitude and phase So the color tone depends on the brightness of the image elements For example human faces become a reddish color in shadows and a greenish color in highlights This is the main disadvantage of NTSC format Technical characteristics of NTSC Resolution 525 lines Frames per second 30 Number of fields 60 59 94 to be exact Interlacing PAL Phase Alternation Line is another analog color TV system This system is used in TV
52. Windows has loaded instead of the Explorer program Thus the user will not be able to run other installed applications and use dialog windows To set up Axxon Smart to start instead of the Windows shell some registry parameters should be modified To edit the registry use the TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility Start the utility from the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder ex C Axxon Smart Tools or from the Windows Start menu Start gt Programs gt Axxon Smart gt Utilities gt Tweaking utility Figure 2 3 2 1 In the TweakiAxxon Smart dialog window open the Windows section and set the Shell group to File option To start Axxon Smart in the Video Server configuration specify the full pathname of the video exe file into the field in the Shell group Type the filename and pathname in manually or use the Browse button to locate the file The TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility does not allow setting up Axxon Smart to start instead of the shell in the Workstation configuration x e gt Window gt Video s D Telemetry n D About Shell Explorer File E son Smart ideo exe Auto login l Enable User name elena mazaa g Password e Domain ITVGROUP CXM AIL Seorysorh com Ok Figure 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 Setting up Windows to start with no password authorization If user authorization is required at Windows start up e g in case of several user accounts the default user Windows start up sho
53. a device the device home page on the built in Web server is not accessible The home pages of the IP devices connected to the network in the Web server module allowing to set up the audio or video IP device and view the video image received from the IP devices in the standard Web browser 82 G Fa i Figure 5 4 1 20 5 4 1 5 1 IP UTILITIES SEARCH AND SETUP The specific utilities for network devices setup are usually included in their installation kit These utilities can be used to search for certain types of devices connected to the network For example the IPUtility exe is used to search for Axis cameras This utility is located in the program folder of the Axis camera software To find the Axis cameras connected to the local network click the Refresh button in the IPUtility exe window The list of all Axis cameras available on the network will be displayed in the IPUtility exe dialog window Figure 5 4 1 21 aa AXIS IP Utility Ol x Serer View Help MAFIE IP address AXIS 213 OD408C82BE 96 192 168 0 191 OO408C82BE 96 AXIS 207MW OO408C8034FC 192 169 0120 OO408C8034FC ASS 2410 OOANBCAI2R EE 192 169 0121 OO408C832BE6 Sl5 215 PTZ 00406C829110 132 165 0 253 00408829110 Workstation mtertace 1 10 0 1 35 Figure 5 4 1 21 Make sure that the required device is in the list The Name field displays the model name and serial number of the device 83 To operate the IP devices in the l
54. and camera icons Several color combinations of different indicators in video surveillance window are possible Yellow color of video the surveillance window border indicates that the camera has been armed by the Main default detector zone In this case yellow color of camera ID icon border means that video signal from this camera is not being recorded to HDD at the moment Red color of video surveillance window border indicates that the camera is in alarm status Red color of camera ID icon border means that alarm recording or pre event video recording to HDD is being performed Light green color of video surveillance window border along with red color of camera ID icon border means that the camera has not been armed by the default detector zone but a video recording started by operator or a post alarm event is being performed at the moment Yellow color of video surveillance window border along with red color of camera ID icon border means that the camera has been armed by the main zone of motion detector Meanwhile the 159 camera is performing either a manually initiated recording to disk or a post alarm recording for the main or auxiliary detector zone e Light green color of video surveillance window border along with light green color of camera ID icon border means that the camera has not been armed by the main motion detector nor it is recording to disk 3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 H o LX mist 8 iia gt 24fps 82
55. aooaa aaa 79 SALA RECCIVIN THO VIGO aa E A A A N a Hanna dead tessetaeirees 80 5 4 1 5 IPacamera SetU AAS Saro nan a N E AA A A O TA a A O 81 SALSI IP UTILTES SEARCHAND SETUP aunnrnnaennnnnanoanokaa ono aaa aa 82 54T5 2 0penine the On the Web server ann a A A A dak ceaarumereads 85 5 4 1 5 3 Setting up the network parameters of an IP camera using the Web server cceeceseeeeeeees 87 5A 1 54 POssibleerrors in the P camerds SCtU Drosma aaa a a ann aa 88 sa kG Setting Ula GrabDerOUject Sissi A taceaseuantuniaet saswondnieaw eau ieaesaeueneaes 89 SA7 RECCIVING ENG VIGO 56 wie Geet A E E 90 5 4 2 Configuring the AXXON SMART video subsystem for the IP servers ccccecceecsecesceeeeeecesceeeeeeceneeeeeees 91 5 4 2 1 IP Servers installation and SOLU ves cissccsicasicoauncvadertieidatalae NANEN 91 5 4 2 1 1 SEARCHING FOR AND SETTING UP IP UTILITIES oenseseessessessesseseeseoseosesseesessessessesseseeseeseeseesee 91 5 4 2 1 2 Opening the IP server home page on the built in Web server cccecceecceecceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 94 5 4 2 1 3 Configure of the network parameters for an IP server using the Web Servel s ccssceeeeees 96 5 4 2 1 4 Possible errors in the IP Servers setup ccseccescceecceecceceeeceeceeeeasecsueesueceueceeeseeeeeeeaeeeaseeeeeees 97 S422 SETTING UP AGRABBER OBJECT citstcccetsiaeterctteton cites closers uedehoanteeions a N nen eee 98 5 42 33 RECEN TG VIDEO iinan nr AA
56. button allowing to cancel the changes made to the element groups list and restore the default list The Add and Remove buttons allowing to move the elements from the Available Buttons list to the Control Panel list and back The Control Panel list can optionally contain the list of the elements in the toolbar including the Separator element The Up and Down buttons allowing to move an element up and down the Control Panel list The element s position in the list determines its actual location in the toolbar 207 Tods Interface elements Ayvallable buttons Control panel Cameras layout rnc Separator dO DateTime Eee Used cameras Customize scene Relay 1 4 Cameras 9 16 Cameras 1 8 Figure 6 2 2 2 The Advanced tab contains the following elements Figure 6 2 2 3 1 The Tips checkbox allowing to enable disable the tool tips display 2 The Fix Position checkbox allowing to enable disable the option for dragging the elements along the toolbar 208 2 Tools Advanced Tips Figure 6 2 2 3 6 2 2 3 MOVING THE ELEMENTS ALONG THE TOOLBAR The interface elements can be moved dragged along the toolbar for user convenience using the mouse The elements can be moved in groups only For example the buttons for video image processing cannot be moved separately Only the whole group of nine or less depending on the toolbar setup buttons can be moved NOTE If the Fix Position option is enabled
57. cameras for displaying Video surveillance windows can be displayed or hidden on monitor with the help of Current Cameras panel and only for the standard Axxon Smart window The panel lists the cameras available for display or control in a given monitor To display video signals from a selected camera you have to check the checkbox to the left of the camera ID Uncheck it to forbid access to the images from the camera Figure 5 8 5 1 139 B coon Smart _ Monitor 1 an Camera 1 Camera Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 5 Camera 6 Camera 7 D n i 16 51 29 pal A 4 Figure 5 8 5 1 To save changes to the Current Cameras list click on Apply button in the left bottom of the Current A 2 ISa T IDE J i p 1651 29 y ff O Bix 24fps 7264 320x240 i O AAAA AAAA CLKOC GoAAA Cameras panel To discard changes to the Current Cameras list click on Cancel in the right bottom of the Current Cameras panel Then you should select the desired layout of the windows on the video monitor NOTE The Current Cameras button or the relevant tools panel can be programmed not to be displayed 5 8 6 Slide show of the camera monitors To start the slide show click the Slide Show button located between the Back and Forward buttons Clicking the Slide Show button again stops the slide show The period of changing the pages is set in the dwell time field in the monitor settings Use the arrow buttons
58. changes in the scene background due to physical tampering of the CCTV camera Its algorithm is based on the calculation of root mean square deviation of the overall scene intensity related to the average value 192 5 11 7 Camera blinding detector 5 11 7 1 Setup The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 7 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 The Sensitivity slider This parameter specifies the difference to be detected between the histogram medians of received and sample frames g Relay 11 owe Relay 12 ome Relay 13 EET Grabber 3 p Camera 4 ee Camera 5 en Camera 6 ET Grabber 4 pa Camera bow a Camera 8 ET Grabber 5 pe Camera 9 pe Camera 10 ET Grabber 6 Video Advanced Compression Detector Titles Detection zone Direction Me ie if 3 Sensitivity Mame
59. color for the outlining of a moving object cases a mid value is sufficient When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance The Contrast slider This setting value corresponds to the detected object contrast This setting affects the operation of the motion detection algorithm It is adjusted experimentally For most 201 6 The Size slider This setting value corresponds to the part of the total frame square occupied by the smallest detected object The detector zone triggers an alarm if it detects the movement of an object bigger than the specified size The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms g Relay 9 g Relay 10 g Relay 11 Relay 12 owls Relay 13 sa Grabber 3 3 Grabber 4 poy Camera 7 p Camera 8 3 Grabber 5 poe Camera 9 p Camera 10 ie Grabber pe Camera 11 pe Camera 12 Detection zone Direction Sensitivity 5 Contrast w Alarmed P Always armed Filtration Detector type Detection frequency Classic Frame scale Figure 5 11 12 1 5 11 12 2 Detector in operation A classical detector recognizes moving objects within the controlled scene Detected moving objects are outlined on screen Figure 5 11 12 2 The motion is detected by calculating gradients between consequent frames The classical detector is good at detecting motion quickly It uses few PC
60. converter Figure 8 2 2 1 Sound card socket DB9 M to 8 RCA F converter The D SUB 9 RCA 8 interface cable is used to connect the audio channels up to 8 audio sources at a time to the external D SUB 9 socket of the FS 6C video capture card the D SUB 25 BNC 8 has the following sockets D SUB 9 1 RCA 8 NOTE The FS 6C and FS 16 EXP cards have no audio outputs to headphones To play audio third party sound cards should be used for example standard SoundBlaster cards 236 LE second channel AR eighth channel seventh channel 4L 10 Figure 8 2 2 2 1R second channel 2R fourth channel 3R sixth channel 4R eighth channel first channel 1L third channel 2L common fifth channel 3L seventh channel 4L These cards provide sampling of up to eight audio channels Up to 4 FS 6C or FS 16 EXP cards can be installed in one video server which allows processing audio signals from up to 32 microphones The FS 6C and FS 16 EXP cards allow choosing among the 8 16 or 32 kHz sampling rates Each of the 4 mono input pairs of the FS 6C card is processed by a separate ADC 8 channels 2 2 2 2 thus each FS 6C card should be represented by four Audio objects with different values in the Board field FS 6 0 FS 6 1 FS 6 2 FS 6 3 If more than one FS 6C card is installed PCI numbering is continued sequentially FS 6 4 FS 6 5 FS 6 6 FS 6 7 and so on 8 2 3 Audio
61. driver is installed 2 5 2 Key not found Keyless nal feuind 09 Al Right R serve Figure 2 5 2 1 The startup information window shows the Key file is not found message Figure 2 5 2 1 The video sec key file is missing Copy the key file manually from the Key folder of the installation CD into the Axxon Smart program folder If there is no key file in the installation CD contact the dealer The video sec key file exists in the Axxon Smart program folder The file is probably invalid Contact the dealer 2 5 3 Key doesn t match the card lt ox0n Smart Key tie it not Valid NNS il Fights Hecer ve Figure 2 5 3 1 The startup information window shows the Key file is not valid message Figure 2 5 3 1 The key file exists but does not match the video capture card s To obtain a new key file use the Codereader exe utility for reading the card codes included in the Axxon Smart delivery kit Using this utility read the dallas codes of the card s a set of alphanumeric strings and send them to the dealer together with a description of the problem 42 3 BASIC PRINCINPLES OF THE USER INTERFACE 3 1 MAIN CONTROL PANEL To show the Axxon Smart Main control panel point the cursor to the top right corner of the screen The Main control panel is a small interface panel containing the information box the Interface Menu button and the Run button Figure 2 5 3 1 nformation box Interface menu Figu
62. for interaction with the Axis IP server 5 4 2 1 4 Possible errors in the IP servers setup The possible IP device settings errors mostly include an invalid IP address Figure 5 4 2 11 or non integrated firmware Figure 5 4 2 12 If the IP address is invalid use the Web interface or the utilities to set up the valid address In case of non integrated firmware install the integrated firmware 98 e C2 WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows KP Version 5 1 2600 LC Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C N Documents and Settings tat yana makarova gt ping 192 168 0 90 Pinging 192 168 0 90 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 0 90 Packets Sent 4 Kece1ved O Lost 4 100 loss gt Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova _ Figure 5 4 2 11 Z Live view AXIS 207 Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer Favorites Tools Help ae File Edit view pack QJ x al A re Search 5 Favorites nz 7 Ld ee rel Address jE http 192 168 0 160 view index shtml EJ Links Snag FE i AXIS AXIS 207 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Video format Trigger Snapshot man 00O O Playmg Motion JPEG AAC Decoder which enables streaming AAC audio in Microsoft Internet Explorer has not been installed or could not be registered on this computer To install or upgrade
63. http 192 168 0 90 adminjtcpip shtml basic yes amp id 176 Go Links gt amp Snagit Si AXIS 207W Network Camera Basic TCP IP Settings Network Settings Basic Configuration Instructions Users Wireless TCP IP Date amp Time Video amp Image Audio View current network settings Network Interface Mode puto wired if cable connected otherwise wireless Wired Ethernet only IPv4 Address Configuration Ethernet b Vi Yideo amp Image Status Active Audio MV Enable IPv4 P i i C i i gt Live View Config Obtain IP address via DHCP Use the following IP address gt Event Configuration IP address gt System Options Subnet mask About Default router IPv6 Address Configuration Ethernet 7 Enable IPv6 IPv4 Address Configuration Wireless Status Inactive Ethernet cable connected I Enable IPv4 Obtain IP address via DHCP Use the following IP address Live View Setup Help Q View 192 168 0 90 Test 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 xi LS aaa Figure 5 4 1 29 When entering information into the Default Router field note that 1 If the videoserver and the IP camera are located in the same subnet this parameter may be omitted 2 Ifthe videoserver and the IP camera are located in different subnets this parameter is mandatory The Default Router IP address should correspond to the same subnet as the camera IP add
64. in brackets b the number of symbols of the specified type and range in braces Example The beginning of a receipt is marked by the date time line 22 06 2004 13 55 45 The following starting marker should be specified 0 9 2 0 9 2 0 9 4 0 9 2 0 9 2 0 9 2 To use the date of receipt registration for a starting marker in dd mm yyyy format enter the following text into the Words to Begin Record field O 9 2 0 9 2 0 9 4 The dots separating day month and year digits are used as static text Example The receipt starts from the following line Receipt No 345 Specify the following starting marker mask Receipt No 0 9 3 c separators between the markers If two or more markers in one line denote the beginning or end of the receipt use the separator semicolon surrounded by spaces For example to use the line containing the words Receipt and Terminal as a marker enter Receipt Terminal in the Words to Begin Record field Example Receipts end with forty asterisks 308 K 2K K K OK OK K OK K OK K OK K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K KKK KKK Enter the following end marker mask 40 3 To distinguish upper and lower case of the symbols in the markers check the Match Case checkbox By default the upper and lower case symbols are not distinguished 4 Ifthe start or end marker repeats in the body of the receipts it is considered as
65. of the camera windows For users convenience Axxon Smart provides an option to change the color codes for the camera status indication NOTE The color codes are changed only for the camera window borders These do not cover camera ID indicators and camera indication icons in the standard IQ window Axxon Smart recognizes 4 camera statuses and the relevant color codes for the camera windows Figure 5 9 3 2 e Disarmed e Armed e Alarmed e No signal from the camera Disconnected 156 of Microphone 14 7 Microphone 15 gil Audio 2 ogee Audio 3 2 Audio 4 e Audio 5 3 Monitor 2 Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 General amera statue colors Mormal On alarm Alarm Mo connection Show in task bar Please restart to apply changes Figure 5 9 3 2 You can select the colors for the 4 camera statuses in the Color lists located in the General tab Monitor settings panel To restore the default colors select Default in the Color list Figure 5 9 3 3 To complete setting up the color codes restart Axxon Smart 157 oof Microphone 14 ig Microphone 15 ie Audio 2 zi Audio 3 iff Audio 4 off Audio 5 E Audio 6 fl Audio 7 Monitor 3 eo Monitor 4 Settings Advanced Genera Camera status colors Hormal On alarm Alarm Mo connection Show in task bar Custom Color Please restart to apply changes Figure 5 9 3 3 5 9 3 3 Colors of the borders for camera ID indic
66. of the options w YUV420 O vUV4 2 2 Slider Drag the slider in the desired position to set the value of the parameter Drop down list Select an item Normal ine Hah Full Table Data entry 1 Check the checkbox in the left column 2 Enter select the values in Day of week other columns of the selected row 3 To remove a row uncheck 52 its checkbox 4 MACROS AND SCHEDULES 4 1 CREATING AND USING THE MACROS A macro in Axxon Smart is a system object design for describing logic interactions among other system objects A macro makes an object automatically execute a user specified action upon occurrence of an event on the object selected in the Axxon Smart list To create modify or delete macros select the Macros object in the object tree of the Settings panel PTZ2 S Line 9 S Line 10 S Line 11 i Line 12 Fi amp amp amp S Line 13 S Line 14 S Line 15 S Line 16 S Telemetry panel 9 System security service EB Schedule All cameras Any event Camera 1 Alarm O All cameras Any event All cameras Figure 3 3 7 1 To create a macro do the following Figure 3 3 7 1 1 Enable macro execution To save the macro parameters and enable macro execution check the checkbox in the left column of the settings table To disable and remove the macro uncheck the checkbox NOTE A disabled unchecked macro is not saved in Axxon Smart 2 Inthe Device drop down list select which object s ev
67. on the system unit to the video capture card Figure 10 1 4 3 Connect the Watchdog cable to the video capture card Figure 10 1 4 4 271 Figure 10 1 4 4 Connect the other end of the Watchdog cable to the motherboard This completes the connection of the Watchdog to the video server with video capture cards installed 10 3 1 Watchdog setup Checking the Activate Watchdog checkbox Figure 10 3 1 1 enables automatic computer restart in case of video subsystem or computer failure This function requires the Watchdog card to be connected to the Reset button using the Watchdog cable g Relay 9 g Relay 10 g Relay 11 one Relay 12 o hog Relay 13 i mi Grabber 3 pa Camera 4 ge Camera 5 be Camera 6 Bae Grabber 4 ip Camera 7 ion ph Camera 8 Grabber 5 poh Camera 9 pa Camera 10 Be Grabber 6 pe Camera 11 i pea Camera 12 Hame Signal PCI channel Activate WatchDog Figure 10 3 1 1 10 4 WEB SERVER The Web Server functional module provides video surveillance using the Internet browser in the TCP IP communication environment The Web Server module provides limited functionality of a HTTP server a gateway for HTTP transmission of video signal and control messages as well as a mobile server for connecting PocketPCs The video server can be configured in two ways 272 1 For local network operation Any computer in the local network can access the video server The user just has to open the br
68. order e if the driver is installed 363 NOTE The problem may occur if an old driver is installed 15 1 2 Key not found Cevhiess mal fating THS A right HESSE Figure 15 1 2 1 The Key file is not found message is displayed Figure 15 1 2 1 1 The video sec key is missing Copy the key file manually from the KEY folder of the installation CD If the video sec is missing on the installation CD contact the dealer 2 The video sec exists in the root of the Axxon Smart program folder Perhaps the file is invalid Contact the dealer 15 1 3 Key does not match the card Key Res nok valid UUS ARORO FESS e Figure 15 1 3 1 The Key file is not valid message is displayed Figure 15 1 3 1 The key file exists but does not match the video capture card To obtain new keys use the Codereader exe utility included in the installation kit Read the dallas codes of the video capture cards and send them to the dealer with the detailed problem report 15 2 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN THE VIDEO CAPTURE CARD INSTALLATION AND SETUP 15 2 1 Codereader exe cannot read the card codes If the Codereader exe utility does not display the video capture card ADC codes Figure 15 2 1 1 or they are displayed as zeros Figure 15 2 1 3 the driver might be not installed or is installed incorrectly that 364 is Axxon Smart cannot be started The situation may occur when not all codes are displayed Figure 15 2 1 2 The Co
69. ph Camera 10 sai Grabber 6 hep Camera 11 name Beward IP DNS address 192 168 0 149 Port 5000 Name admin F BENE ee i Password coco Figure 3 3 3 3 19 Repeat step 4 17 to add and edit all the required IP devices 20 To close the utility processing and IP Wizard dialog window click Exit button Figure 3 3 3 2 14 Editing of objects tree is over 3 3 4 About Clicking the About program item of the Run menu in the Main control panel to open an information window which displays the software version and card codes Figure 3 3 4 1 49 Sep About program g x E ELA P WIANAL ass onsott com Product s name Axon Smart aie Product s verson 1 0 0 472 5 Awwongort All tights reserved Codes and Card s types on current server C Assongott LLC 2009 All Rights Reserved Figure 3 3 4 1 Description of the Settings panel To manage the Axxon Smart system use the Settings panel The Axxon Smart Settings panel is designed to configure the components of the video surveillance system based on the Axxon Smart software The Settings panel allows configuring the hardware and software modules setting up the user interface creating users administration of the user rights and privileges assigning passwords for accessing the system resources to users The Settings panel consists of the following components 1 Object tree This is a multi level nested list of objects The br
70. print a frame make sure that the printer is accessible from your PC To start printing select Export then Print in the surveillance window menu Figure 5 9 5 2 NOTE No message is displayed to indicate the beginning end of printing 168 3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 ao OX wits a Eo mis gt 14fps 28542 640x480 Camera Show titles Processing Save frame gt a be Zhe GG CAAA AAKCAaAA BACK C AS Figure 5 9 5 2 The still frame displayed in the surveillance window is printed automatically when you click the Print menu item 5 9 6 Keyboard shortcuts to operate the surveillance monitor The following keyboard shortcuts can be used to operate the surveillance monitor Table 5 9 1 0 9 numeric keypad Activating a camera surveillance window For example to activate the camera 12 window press 1 then quickly 2 on the keyboard F1 F8 Switching the monitor between 1 4 9 16 64 etc window layouts Shift Left click Digital zoom in In archive playback mode play stop pause 169 Ctrl go to the first recording in the archive Ctrl gt go to the last recording in the archive Ctrl R Ctrl T Camera recording start stop Enable disable contrasting 5 10 USING THE VIDEO ARCHIVE The video surveillance window tools are used for accessing the video archive Figure 5 9 6 1 The following archive operations can be performed for a particular camera 1 Simultaneo
71. processing of the signals from up to 16 rays analog digital conversion and transmission of up to 4 control signals to the relays The ray relay cards are optionally installed on the FS 5B FS 6C FS 16 EXP or FS 8 video capture cards NOTE The ray relay cards cannot be installed on the WS 7 and WS 17 boards thus the ray relay functionality cannot be implemented on video servers equipped with the WS 7 or WS 17 boards The cards have a power supply 24V and earth contacts 251 Peewee ereerpereeeceaee eee eeea eee ee a t a ay sre A uw s d gt a gt a gt p eh eeetetet jSetiee a POPP ETE T Figure 9 2 1 1 4 RAYS 4 RELAYS 12 RAYS ON CARD 9 3 1 Ray relay cards installation onto the FS cards The socket marked TO GRABBER in Figure 9 3 1 1 is used for installing the 16 4 ray relay card onto the video capture card The J6 and J7 sockets marked 4 RAYS 4 RELAYS and 12 RAYS are used to connect rays and relays Connecting I O 16 4 subcard Connector J7 16 24v 15 24 Ihia 132v 12is2av Tiza 10izav Q 24v 8i 24v Tisza 6i 24v 5 24v _ vo O DI Digital in sensor DO Digital out relay GND Ground to the computer tower CGND External ground Figure 9 3 1 1 4 RAYS 4 RELAYS 12 RAYS ON CARD 252 16 4 RAY RELAY CARD LAYOUT J7 SOCKET J6 SOCKET COLLECTOR EMITTER DI Digital in ray DO Digital o
72. resources but the chances for quality detection are not high To get better quality detection use activity or object tracking detector 202 BoxxonSmart __ Monitor 1 ao ox mu 2 e ms gt gt 14fps 28700 800x600 BACK KC CAA o y G CREA Kaee ane cil 14 30 07 4 Fe Figure 5 11 12 2 6 THE SCENE WINDOW 6 1 THE SCENE WINDOW SETUP The Scene interface object window is designed for creating and viewing the panoramic video image combined from several video surveillance windows To create such an image the following functionality is available e moving the video image across the Scene viewing area e perspective correction e rotation e cropping e zooming and changing the dimensions ratio To enable and set up the Scene window use the Scene object settings panel To display the Scene object settings panel select the Scene object in the object tree of the System Settings panel To set up the Scene object do the following Figure 5 11 12 1 1 Enable the Scene object display By default the Scene item is not included in the Interface menu of the Main control panel To include the object item in the menu check the Allow checkbox in the object settings panel 2 Specify the name for the Scene object A name can be assigned to the Scene object which will be displayed at the top of the object window Enter the name in the Name field in the object settings panel 203 3 Specify the parameters
73. server to which the camera is connected Figure 5 4 2 14 100 Board 27 Channel 1 ki Mame Retin Record alarms L Disable Friotity Brightness Contrast Normal M m M co eae z z e e Realtime 3 iri processing recording Figure 5 4 2 14 5 5 The Camera object setup Use the settings panel for the Camera object to set up the Camera object in Axxon Smart Figure 5 4 2 1 in Ray 1 oR Ray 2 Dy Ray 3 ay Ray 4 ea Camera 8 iat Grabber 3 pea Camera 9 pe Camera 10 A a Grabber 4 pe Camera 11 Pre alarm record Fost alarm record Hot record time Hot rec rate Recording rate 101 O Computer E m Grabber 1 i W Camera 2 Fy Fa oi Ray 2 iy Ray 3 oR Ray 4 Ray 5 Relay 2 Relay 3 Relay 4 g Relay 5 Relay amp ig Relay 7 Y Board Fre alarm record Hame Mi Post alarm record Hot record time Record alarme Hot rec rate Disable Recording rate r Priotity Brightness Contrast Normal ce V3 fe Real tire processing recording Figure 5 4 2 1 5 5 1 Video TAB Then do the following to set up a camera object Figure 5 5 1 1 102 Ll Computer Ba Grabber 1 Pay Hay San mane Dy Ray 3 oR Ray 4 Ry Ray ZR Ray 6 Dy Ray SS Ray 8 SS a Video Advanced Compression Detector Titles Board 1 Channel 1 Pre alarmrecord 0 fe Post alarmrecord 0 Hs Hot record time 0 Hot re
74. the Lock button the relay was in a closed state it will open when you click the button 257 O Computer Bg Grabber 1 bp Camera 2 RT Ray 1 i Ray 2 ZY Ray 3 Si Ray 4 Dy Ray 5 ZR Ray 6 SY Ray 7 Dy Ray 8 gt REENE Figure 9 5 2 1 9 6 USING THE RAYS RELAY SUBSYSTEM 9 6 1 Using the rays The ray device connects to the ray relay card socket The operator can control the ray using the buttons in the monitor toolbar in the Axxon Smart interface Figure 9 6 1 1 A response action is assigned to the Ray Closed Ray Open event using the macro which automatically executes when this event occurs 258 E oon Smart _ E Monitor 1 O ie JOUCOCrS emo a6 CD o oa a aaa a ae m e C2 ROCCO GOH OASS BHC eee ws Figure 9 6 1 1 9 6 1 1 Ray icon The camera assigned to the ray can be set up to display the ray state indication icon big dot in the top left corner of the surveillance window Figure 9 6 1 2 The color of the dot indicates the state of the ray The Ray object can be one of the following states 1 Neutral not armed not triggered The indicator is green 2 Armed armed not triggered The indicator is yellow 3 Alarmed armed triggered The indicator is red 4 Standby not armed triggered The indicator is blue To arm or disarm the ray do one of the following 1 Click the button in the toolbar corresponding to this ray in Axxon Smart interface mode 2 Click the indicatio
75. the corresponding scrolling sliders To make the image smaller click it to make it active and keep clicking the Zoom Out button in the shape of a magnifying glass with a minus sign until the image reaches the desired size NOTE There is no lower limit to the image size Be careful when zooming out if you zoom out too much the image may disappear from the viewing area EB oxxon Smart Scene 1 Ao os Figure 6 2 3 7 6 2 3 7 RESTORING IMAGE PARAMETERS CHANGING THE PROPORTIONS To restore the initial size shape location use the image restoration function An image can be restored in 1 1 or 4 3 proportions 1 1 proportion uses the actual resolution of the image For example if the video image has a standard resolution of 352x288 pixels it will be displayed in a window 352 pixels long and 288 pixels high 4 3 proportion is the standard for the Standard Definition Television SDTV When this proportion is selected the image is extended or contracted vertically or horizontally prior to display Image restoration is available in all processing modes To restore an image in 1 1 proportion make it active image border will turn red and click the 1 1 button Figure 6 2 3 8 To restore an image in 4 3 proportion make it active and click the 4 3 button Figure 6 2 3 8 216 E oxxon Smart Scene 1 a o ak O Aon AQOA aa CZE You can view the archive video recordings from all cameras used in creating a panoramic
76. the video over the network Figure 5 3 1 1 5 3 1 2 IP Servers IP video servers Figure 5 3 1 2 are designed for connecting the analog cameras digitizing compressing the analog video signal and sending it over the network The list of integrated hardware is being updated constantly It is displayed on the http www axxonsoft com site 60 Figure 5 3 1 2 5 3 2 Video capture card ES series 5 3 2 1 Video capture card resources real time and multiplexing modes The card works in real time mode when one camera is connected to one ADC Figure 5 3 2 1 When two or more cameras are connected Figure 5 3 2 2 multiplexing mode is invoked The total number of digitized frames per ADC decreases Video capture cards are designed for digitizing only Y Figure 5 3 2 1 Figure 5 3 2 2 5 3 2 2 VIDEO CAPTURE CARDS SPECIFICATIONS 5 3 2 2 1 FS 5B card Figure 5 3 2 3 shows the general view of the FS 5B card 61 Figure 5 3 2 3 Table 5 3 1 shows the technical characteristics of the FS 5B card Table 5 3 1 a Resolution pixels 352 240 Video input rate per non multiplexed channel per card fps PAL NTSC Total video input rate for all multiplexed channels fps PAL 16 704 288 352 288 standard 12 704 576 full Total video input rate for all multiplexed channels fps NTSC 20 640 240 320 240 standard 15 640 480 full Total video input rate for non multiplexed channels fps PAL 25 30 NTSC
77. to trigger sending the voice message Select an event in the Event column A particular event the choice of available events depends on the device or Any Event value may be selected In the latter case the voice message will be sent upon registration of any event on the selected device 4 Select the voice modem to send voice messages in the Modem column The choice of the modems corresponds to the modems installed in the video server 5 Inthe Phone column specify the recipient s telephone number 6 Select the dial type tone or pulse in the Dial Type column 267 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 3 Line 24 Line 25 f System security service H Schedule Macros E Camera 1 Alarm Mo modems 54756976 Camera 6 Start recording Mo modems 5476952 All cameras Any event Mo modems All cameras Any event Mo modems Figure 10 1 4 1 7 Inthe Sensitivity column specify the relative sensitivity of the telephone line This parameter describes the noise level in the telephone line The audio file will start playing when the signal in the line can be considered a recipient s answer To set this parameter find the minimum sensitivity value experimentally when the noise is already not mistaken for the recipient s answer Available values are 1 to 10 8 Inthe Delay field select the dialing delay The delay is the time interval between dialing attempts The delay is specified in seconds 9 Specify
78. with lower priority relative to the interface elements currently controlling the device In milliseconds By default 30 000 ms Speed Limits Minimum Speed Minimum speed of the PTZ device rotation Takes values from O to 10 By default O Maximum Speed Maximum speed of the PTZ device rotation Takes values from O to 10 By default 10 355 Tweaky Axxon Smart Figure 13 8 3 1 13 9 COLLECTING THE VIDEOSERVER CONFIGURATION AND STATUS INFORMATION FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT SERVICE The Support exe utility Figure 13 8 3 1 allows collecting the information about the configuration and status of the hardware the Windows operating system and the Windows software The information is saved in the support 7z file This file is used by the Axxon Smart technical support service Start the Support exe utility from the Tools folder or from the Windows taskbar Start gt Programs gt Axxon Smart gt About Click the Collect button to start the information collection process The information collection and archiving progress is indicated in the Support exe dialog box 356 4 support s stem s information gathering utility l En ioj x This program is designed for gathering of system s and software s configuration data Press Process to compile support_ date time 72 file You can send it to ITY customer service support axxonsoatt com after Figure 13 8 3 1 The resultant file is saved to the Tools folder of the Axxon
79. zone ray or the All Cameras value All Rays All Zones can be specified In the latter case the control will apply to all devices of this type registered in Axxon Smart 3 Select an event on the selected device to trigger sending the SMS message Select an event in the Event column A particular event the choice of available events depends on the device or Any Event value may be selected In the latter case the SMS will be sent upon registration of any event on the selected device In the Phone column specify the mobile telephone number to send the SMS messages to 5 Inthe Device drop down list select the GSM modem GSM adapter or the mobile phone used for sending SMS messages The list contains the devices installed in the computer 6 Inthe SMS Service Number specify the telephone number of the SMS service of the mobile operator to handle your SMS messaging 264 NOTE The SMS service number is assigned by the mobile operator Contact your mobile operator technical support to receive the number Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel System security service E Schedule Device Event Phone Message text All cameras Alarm 59152453265 All cameras Disarm 89056217823 All cameras End of alarm 59204566757 CJ All cameras Any event Device SMS service number Figure 10 1 2 1 10 1 3 Electronic Mail Message Service E MAIL The Electronic Mail Message Servi
80. 009 16 26 31 70 24 02 2009 16 26 33 106 24 02 2009 16 26 40 132 24 02 2009 16 26 43 142 24 02 2009 16 26 45 178 24 02 2009 16 26 52 204 24 02 2009 16 26 55 214 24 02 2009 16 26 57 z sai Titl Connectio Query is c 35 Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Pal fat ath Pm Titles pet te Time 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ba Titl Connectio Queryisc 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Fal T it Connectio Query is C 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 EEN Titl Connectio Query is c Visa 19 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Fal Titl Connectio Query is c Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Bal Titl Connectio Query is c Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 a mene pe SC Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Ta dha A SUENE C Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 5 Titl Connectio Query is c Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 SEN Titl Connectio Query is c Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Fal Tit Connectio Query is c Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 2
81. 09 16 26 31 Pay ment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 32 Log Out 24 02 2009 16 26 32 LogIn Devere Jhaun 24 02 2009 16 26 32 Smimotf 6 00 1 24 02 2009 16 26 32 Mase He ia bie The following report control interface elements are available Figure 12 4 9 3 Figure 12 4 9 2 740 Tee 1 Report pages navigation panel The following buttons are available left to right e goto first page e goto previous page e current page number and total number of pages e goto next page e goto last page n an a D an a a 2 The Print button printer icon and the Print Settings button printer with a key icon The Export button for exporting the report to various formats pdf CSV RPT DIV XLS HTML DHTML WKS Lotus ODBC Excel Access Visio etc rtf doc XML etc Clicking this button opens the dialog box for selecting the export format 4 Preview the scaling factor menu 331 5 The field for entering the search strings to be searched for in the report text Enter the string and click the binocular button 6 Information panel showing the total number of pages in the report and the number of pages currently added to the report as a percentage of the total and in absolute numbers lq 4 1 of 1 H Intellect Date 03 03 2009 Total 100 1 of Payment ho 1 re ai 3 i i J Camera Camera 1 Time 24 02 2009 16 26 31 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046636 20 46 15 Pa
82. 0x240 14 04 26 A 14 05 10 v Ld 0 3 01 09 ad 03 01 14 05 13 Ta 14 00 07 14 00 41 14 01 14 14 01 47 3 42 37 l 14 04 16 14 05 10 14 05 10 MUKA watta SACK KC aA 93 01 09 93 01 09 14 05 13 14 05 13 Figure 5 10 6 1 5 10 7 Video sequence export To export a sequence do the following 1 To export a video recording enter the archive mode in the corresponding surveillance window and choose the required video fragment using search by date time if needed Select Export then Save a recording in the surveillance window menu Select compression settings Select Export then Save a recording then Video settings Figure 5 10 7 1 Choose the compression program codec from the drop down list If compression settings need to be specified for the chosen codec a slider appears in the lower part of the dialog box allowing to set the compression level Extreme left position 1 of the slider corresponds to minimum compression and best quality Extreme right position 100 of the slider corresponds to maximum compression and worst quality Click OK to save the video export settings Specify the settings for the audio tracks if a syncro video and audio recording is exported Select Export then Save a recording then Audio settings Specify the compression settings for the audio tracks in the corresponding settings field for syncro recordings Click OK to save the audio export sett
83. 1 When Axxon Smart starts the files listed in the Video folder are compared to the idx db3 list If the lists don t match the files are indexed again by overwriting idx db3 at the start of Axxon Smart To renew idx db3 you need to delete this file 5 6 3 2 Video archive files Axxon Smart saves the video surveillance information to the hard drives thus building up a video archive Figure 5 6 3 2 The file system should be of NTFS type Never save video archives onto the system disk The video archive is stored in the VIDEO folder of the selected The VIDEO folder contains subfolders named in the following format DD MM YY HH that is date hour These subfolders contain the archives for a specified hour The file extensions indicate the camera number You can view and convert the files for the selected time period using the Axxon Smart software or the Converter exe utility 117 ioixl File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back x 7 wi pe Search Folders FFF Address C Video l15 01 09 16 a O Oz al awe a E E m Details 7 Uz Fw 5 O2 a wD 9 02 awe 10 _02 by ke Ih G La i Cy 10 woz 11 02 110z a 02 awe b OF b woe ts i i i ts c OF c woz d OF d woe e OF e woe f O2 iT File and Folder Tasks x ia Ll m p Ep a LEV EL m mm Ph am Po Pa co Pa ra mm Pa DI mm Pa Make a new Folder ee Publish this Folder to the Web a Share this
84. 1 If SQL Server has been installed from the Axxon Smart installation kit MS SQL 2005 Express and Windows Account authorization mode has been chosen during the SQL Server installation then select the Windows NT Account radio button in the Use for Server Authorization section Other authorization settings become disabled in this case Example 2 If SQL Server has been installed from the Axxon Smart installation kit MS SQL 2005 Express and Use the Following Username and Password authorization mode has been chosen during the SQL Server installation then do the following in the Use for Server Authorization section 313 a select the Use the Following Username and Password radio button in the User field enter the user name for SQL Server authorization c inthe Password field enter the password for SQL Server authorization If blank password was set during Axxon Smart installation check the Blank Password checkbox NOTE If the default user name and password set during Axxon Smart installation has not been changed use sapwd as the user name and AXXON SMART as the password for SQL Server authorization d check the Allow Saving the Password checkbox to allow automatic access to the titles database from Axxon Smart 3 To select the database in the SQL Server do the following a select the Select Database on the Server radio button set by default b select the name of the database in the drop down list by default titles
85. 12 32 16 13 34 16 14 37 16 15 39 16 16 43 16 17 45 16 18 45 16 19 46 16 20 49 16 25 50 F 16 26 51 7 Seren fesults 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 31 24 02 2009 16 26 33 24 02 2009 16 26 40 24 02 2009 16 26 43 24 02 2009 16 26 45 24 02 2009 16 26 52 24 02 2009 16 26 55 24 02 2009 16 26 57 f Titles State Additional Total reco itl 5 ith a Titl Connectio Query isc Bai Tit Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connecti Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c B5 Titl Connecti Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c oo Jitle Bal Titl Bal Titl Bal Titl Bay Titl Bal Titl Bal Titl Bl Titl Bra Titl Bal Titl Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio oo cc coco cco coco CoCo E oa B ma S oa BAE ma A oa S ma G n 3 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 19 26 26 Visa 18 00 Balance Due 18 00 Payment Authorization Payment Authorization Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 Payment Authorization Subtotal 18 00 Tax 0
86. 14 2 1 2 NOTE To change the connection account name enter the new name into the Name field in its object settings panel 14 2 2 Deleting connections To delete a connection do the following in the Connection object settings panel Figure 14 2 2 1 1 In Registered IP Addresses select the IP address to be deleted 2 Click the Delete button The connection account will be deleted the video server IP address will be deleted from the list and the connection object will be deleted from the Connection children 359 Figure 14 2 2 1 14 2 3 Connection setup To set up a connection do the following in the corresponding object settings panel Figure 14 2 3 1 1 Inthe Login and Password fields enter the user name and password for video server authorization NOTE The user with this user name and password should be registered on the video server Upon workstation authorization the user obtains the monitoring control and administration rights assigned to him her at the time of his her registration on the video server 2 In Video Archive Password specify the password to protect the video archive playback NOTE This password should match the archive playback password set during the video server setup 3 To save the server authorization user name and password as well as the archive access password check the Save Passwords checkbox NOTE The password saving option is enabled by default After the first successful authori
87. 16 33 09 07 2009 16 35 Figure 12 4 9 1 1 7 40 _08 1 7 41 _07 1 7 41 _08 1 7 42 07 1 7 42 _08 1 7 43 _07 17 43 _08 17 44 _07 17N44 _08 17 45 _07 1 7 45 _08 1 7 46 _07 1 7 46 _08 17 47 _07 1 7 47 _08 1 7 48 _O7 1 7 48 _08 1 7 49 _07 Pas dm IT AN T PR 17 4a _08 17 4b _07 1 7 4b _08 1 4c _07 13 2 ARCHIVE CREATION DATE CORRECTION Figure 12 4 9 1 The Convert exe utility is designed for changing the creation dates of the archive files Figure 12 4 9 1 Creation dates can become corrupted for example in the process of transferring the archive from one computer to another This might be the reason for the Converter exe utility not being able to play an archive This utility executable file is located in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder 334 To restore the creation dates copy the corrupted files into the Video folder of any drive for example D Video and run Convert exe The utility will scan Video folders on all available drives and restore the file creation dates After the dates are restored the files can be viewed with the Converter exe utility 13 3 READING THE VIDEO CAPTURE CARD CODES AND HARDWARE PROTECTION KEYS The Codereader exe utility is designed for fetching the dallas code from the video capture card cryptochip and the dallas code of the Guardant hardware protection key 2
88. 2009 16 27 a v z2000SCK dll 1 1863 KB Application Extension 12 12 2008 12 53 cv g7 dll 632 KE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 cxcorel97 dll 824KB Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 a Blink dll 44EB Application Extension O9 07 2009 16 30 a miimi atal ee ae 348 KBE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 lib 452KB Application 09 07 2009 16 33 E product contig 1 KE CONFIG File 21 07 2008 15 11 Prof UIS252m8 dll 3696 KE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 31 E simple detector dll 322 KB Application Extension 10 12 2008 4 11 FF slave exe 1 648 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 32 Gd SaliteDbUpdate exe 59 KB Application 09 07 2009 16 33 P saliteFile exe 32 K6 Application 09 07 2009 16 31 users 1KB File 15 07 2009 15 35 Video cfg 13 KB Microsoft Office Ou 15 07 2009 15 50 eet n C Li 171m mim mile Aros a are xl Figure 12 3 2 1 12 3 2 1 Using the idb exe utility The utility executable file idb exe is used for conversion update and timing of Axxon Smart database Figure 12 3 2 2 This utlity is used for different AXXON software Below one can see the description of settings used in Axxon Smart The utility executable file is started from the Axxon Smart Program folder The utility window and description of its items are in the Table 12 3 1 311 EY IDB 4 7 4 0 O x Select source database Description Titles Titles database MW Use Connection string Move database Build Provider SQ
89. 25fps 8506 320x240 AAA z 2 O CUACA KOCK AGaEs SAURA LIG gt 17 04 06 d 7 AN a 17 0406 T Camera Show titles Export gt 9 magnifier Stop recording A Sharpness el Contrast Contour i Detector mask 17 04 06 Figure 5 9 4 3 5 9 4 3 Magnifier To examine parts of the image carefully you can use the Magnifier option with a zooming factor of 2 To enable the Magnifier go to the surveillance window menu select Processing then Magnifier Figure 5 9 4 7 Once you activate this option a zoomed in part of the image is displayed in the Magnifier window You can drag the Magnifier across the window with your mouse Figure 5 9 4 4 To resize the Magnifier window point the cursor at any corner of it left click and hold drag it to the desired size To exit the Magnifier mode click the Magnifier menu item again highlighting is removed indicating that this menu item is inactive 164 on Smart Monitor 1 a Oo os Bala aae tas gt 24fps 8304 320x240 Camera s Show titles Export Stop recording p m E EE pe a Contour Detector mask Figure 5 9 4 4 5 9 4 4 Image sharpening Image sharpening mode sharpens the objects contours to provide their crisp image To enable sharpening in the surveillance window menu select Processing then Sharpness To disable sharpening select the same menu option again n Smart Monitor 1 g au m ma k el 24fps 8324 320x240
90. 28 Bal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Bal Titl Connectio Query isc 0 Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 29 10 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Lon Out 24 N INNA 16 98 79 Figure 12 4 9 1 The printed report contains the following information fields Figure 12 4 9 2 Printed report creation date Video frame with the corresponding receipt titles The name of the camera that produced the frame The time of registration of the receipt line selected to create the report The Data column containing the text data of the receipt on ae eS The Time column containing the registration times of the corresponding receipt lines The interface elements for navigating printing and exporting the report are located at the top of the preview window 330 4 1 of 1 gt bi amp frooz f Tota 100 1 of Intellect Date 03 03 2009 d Payment Authorization PSr iar ization e Se aa eh Atlara Di Eie es i F A mw L z aver 1i atization ization NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046636 24 02 2009 16 26 31 20 46 15 24 02 2009 16 26 31 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 31 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 31 Amex 54 36 24 02 2009 16 26 31 Balance Due 54 36 24 02 2009 16 26 31 Pay ment Authorization 24 02 20
91. 3 2 5 7 4 Setting up multi monitor systems Overlay is used to process the image by a video card with Direct X libraries before it is displayed Two overlay types are available in Axxon Smart Type and Type II Overlay Type is supported by the preceding generation of the video cards Overlay Type has the following restrictions e you an t size the surveillance window with a double click on the left mouse button e The 6 er layout of surveillance window is not available NOTE With overlay type all windows displayed are same size As a rule Type II overlay is recommended To activate the type II overlay check the Overlay Type II checkbox in the Parameters tab of the Monitor object settings panel Figure 5 7 4 1 This mode is activated by default 124 m Grabber 6 gp Grabber m Grabber E Grabber 9 E Grabber 10 gp Grabber 11 gi Grabber 12 E Grabber 13 i Audio 1 HE Audio 2 BE Audio 3 ool Audio 4 FA EA BB ER A BB BB Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 f Settings J Advanced Monitor 1 gt i in we 100 H 100 Overlay Type l Overlay Type Il Allow Control panel Allow moving C Don t show disabled cameras C Ratio 4 3 E Mame Figure 5 7 4 1 Note 1 You can tell that Overlay is enabled by the color of the date time symbols on the camera window If Overlay is enabled they are white Otherwise they are green Note 2 Some video
92. 3 7 4 2 13 7 5 Converting archives to AVI format To convert video and audio recordings do the following 1 Select an archive to be converted 2 Select and set the starting point of the archive fragment to be converted Find the recording to be the first in the converted fragment Use the playback scale or the Find Fragment button and the date time fields to the left To set the starting point click the Export Start button to the left from the scale Figure 13 7 5 1 3 Select and set the ending point of the fragment to be converted This process is similar to setting the starting point Use the buttons and fields in the right side of the utility window to select the recording 346 eT F e gt Archive s converter Bp 19 01 2009 15 13 08 4 27 02 2009 14 43 33 Camera lf AA gt il a S iss a Figure 13 7 5 1 4 Add the selected fragment to the list of the fragments to be converted by clicking the Add to List button on the right from the ending point button Figure 13 7 5 2 347 eT F e gt Archive s converter a z 7 i Bp fi9 01 2009 15 13 08 4 27 02 2009 14 43 33 Camera Jf AA gt i a S is a Figure 13 7 5 2 To view the list of the fragments to be converted click the Show List button The list will be displayed under the video image This list contains the camera name creation date time of the first and last recordings
93. 310 12 322 The Data Link PEODEIICS WINDOW S wisisesscvscesvneds a E E auenisamanieas 311 12 3 3 Titles display setup in the surveillance window cccecccseccsecesecencceceesceascceuceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 314 12 3 4 Text Search OD SCUSCTUD iiaa n AEE kadai fare saa ae aa deta ded aaa eas 316 12 3 5 Showing and hiding the titles in the surveillance WINGOW cccseccseccseceseeeeceesceeeceeeceeeeeeeeseeaeees 317 12 4 Using the Titles Search CDi OC Ueecisiceescivccccecceccdescccecsiasdescdenvesvcedesceeevaccccsens Ged anaa an aaea cauaaauddeseveniese 318 12 4 1 Opening the Titles Search WiINGOW cccseccseccsecceeceeccsecceecanecaueeeucceeceeeseeeseeesaeeesceeeeseeseeeeeeeaaees 319 12 4 2 Me Ties SC ANC WING OW si sc58 261s cl5t eS a E ss oaies 319 12 4 3 Creation olfa search FOGU ESE assener aio eoa NO 320 12 4 4 The indication of POS terminal connection availability and search process execution 00000 323 12 4 5 Viewing the list of receipts found in the search cceccsscccecceseceecceceesccesccaucceuecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 324 12 4 6 VIEWING the recet COMES S erneten a a a a 325 12 4 7 Viewing the video frame corresponding to the selected receipt line nssnsessensessessessessesersersersee 326 12 4 8 Viewing the real time video image from the camera linked to the terminal ccceccseeeeeeeeeeees 327 12 4 9 Printine ond exporune Ine FECEIDU FED OFS morar nosa R a a e N a
94. 4 13 Save camera position as a preset Click and hold the button to set the preset if the preset contains two digits click the first digit then immediately click and hold the second one NOTE Saving presets is an administrative function 1 To select a preset click the corresponding number if the preset contains two digits click the first digit then immediately the second one NOTE The Telemetry Panel may not be able to control a PTZ camera in the following cases 1 A higher priority user controls the same camera at the same moment The control will be granted after a certain delay the default is 30 seconds but it can be changed using the Fine Tuning utility after the higher priority user completes the control 2 A certain delay the default is 30 seconds but it can be changed using the Fine Tuning utility has not expired after the same device had been controlled from the same computer using the mouse 229 IP Camera Figure 7 5 2 2 7 5 2 1 Saving and deleting the presets To save a preset quickly dial the number and hold the last digit until the confirmation text appears Figure 7 5 2 3 To select a preset position quickly dial the number Figure 7 5 2 4 230 A oe IP Camera ia D J D a Pe reine ai STOF m FISILE IP camera E T a A e Figure 7 5 2 3 Figure 7 5 2 4 To delete a preset overwrite it with another preset 7 5 3 Joystick setup for controlling the PTZ cameras Figu
95. 4 5 3 New connection Host name Port number Password Figure 10 4 5 3 1 Open the Connection menu 2 Create anew connection 3 Set the connection parameters a Name the name for the settings profile b Host permanent IP address of the computer running the video server 286 c Port video server port open for request handling Password one of the passwords set up on the server leave blank if no passwords have been set e Video Quality the quality of the video image 4 Connect to the video server If necessary use the Help menu item during the connection setup Figure 10 4 5 4 Help Swlich between video and archive video Telemetry control Figure 10 4 5 4 The following mobile module functionality is available 1 Viewing live video image 287 SmartPhone e a E anh An ep ETETA BUA R N eS E M Gamera 1 Figure 10 4 5 5 Select Video after selecting the camera Figure 10 4 5 5 In video viewing mode the following actions can be performed by pressing the phone buttons 4 start stop the recording 7 arm disarm 2 Viewing the archive Select Archive after selecting the camera Enter the date and time of the desired recording using the phone keyboard The following buttons are active in archive viewing mode 1 back 2 play 3 forward 5 pause 8 stop 3 PTZ control The following PTZ control actions can be performed usi
96. 4 K6 Application 09 07 2009 16 35 Figure 1 5 4 1 1 5 5 Voice notification files WAV Voice notification is one of the ways to inform the operator about alarm s registration in the system Voice notification files are located in the Wav folder that is automatically installed when Axxon Smart software is being installed Figure 1 5 5 1 The user of the system with administrator rights can change voice notification files for other audio files of wav format Indispensable condition is to create the name of new file by mask cam_alarm_x wav so that x is the number of camera for which this audio file is used 32 B C Akon Smarti Way File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ack sa Bi a Search gt Folders oe kts x ie Em Address E Caxson Smartiwa Go Snagit Fa ea Album Title Year T Duration l cl cam _alarm_ 1 war amp cam_alarm_2 way cam alarm Sway cam alarm p war cam_alarm Sway cam _alarm_6 wav cam_alarm_ way cam _alarm_8 wav amp cam _alarm_ Swar amp cam_alarm_10 waw amp cam_ alarm 11 Wway amp cam_alarmn_12 Wway cam_alarm_13 weay cam_ alarm 14 way amp cam_alarn_15 Wway l cam_alarm_16 way amp cam _alarm_ 17 wav cam_alarm_16 way cam alarm 19 Wway amp cam _alarm_20 wa amp cam_alarm_21 way cam alarm 22 Way e cam_alarn 23 Way cam_alarm_24 way cam_ alarm 25 Way amp cam_alarn_ 26 Way e cam_alarm_ 27 way P Sie alauns Tt ni Wave Sound Wa
97. 41 ADC 76 Administration 275 Alarm 126 132 155 161 201 240 Analog monitor 131 Axis 80 81 83 85 89 90 91 92 94 B Brightness 102 103 104 108 C Codereader exe 44 323 350 369 Color 54 60 63 65 67 104 107 157 187 197 200 202 205 303 304 Compression 108 112 261 324 336 contrast 102 104 108 166 184 187 202 205 316 Convert exe 322 323 Converter exe 114 323 327 D dallas codes 13 44 350 Day 52 De interlacing 127 162 Detector 109 149 151 180 182 183 184 292 detector mask 147 151 183 digitizing format 55 56 Drivers 14 70 D SUB 25 BNC XX 69 E Event 51 153 178 244 248 249 250 251 Export 137 168 169 170 177 178 319 331 333 335 336 339 F Frame export 168 functions menu 136 137 144 145 146 147 148 149 151 152 162 180 181 182 187 190 191 193 194 196 197 199 201 205 G Grabber 66 77 78 86 87 95 96 221 240 241 H Hot record 105 l IFACE 37 Image sharpening 165 IP address 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 88 89 90 91 93 94 95 259 263 271 343 344 345 351 370 IP camera 58 79 83 84 85 86 87 94 211 347 IP device 58 79 80 84 85 86 89 94 95 104 106 107 221 351 IP server 83 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 208 IPUtility exe 80 89 IQ window 124 133 137 140 156 159 161 181 K Keyframe Each 108 L Licensing 13 Line 55 213 M
98. 6 SILA Detector in opera Onassis a A A A pases eaereeeeuaeres ees 187 5 11 4 FOCUSING Ce LCCLOl se aS ON 188 SILAT SED nairean A N 188 SLEA Detector IN OP CATO emra E A A R A 189 5 11 5 Video signal stability detecto scia innan a vaso ses ETATEN Pisobavandsevesdcates 189 SELESL SEUD ea a A A E ES NAA ET 189 Debi 27 Detector IN operatione A E A E E 190 5 11 6 Backeroundehance detector vari nian cits aa EEEE S 190 SIFOT SUP eA A A E E T aren sersasians 190 SELG 2 Detector IM OP Chall O Mairie enine AATE AA 191 5 11 7 Camera DInNadiNe CEteCl Ol rioan E E E an ene hee eee nee Rae 192 SARZE SQUID c icanbsmveserstnsetatetawadiasisaqenbntace die stamens neawasesdasapial dave die piapees oiamatas smenstonseaceesameaanesouamsammenneess 192 Dit 2 Detector IM OD Chall OM a stetccatascccansiwhacavnadeerteaaeues tance cconaasecatancaccanerawnied E nen ene can 192 5 11 8 Camera blinding detector ninian cass ashes cess anaes ead eee ad eee 193 ALG SOU Dic asundianatiainiaers inegsdn etna eet denseGiedtanpsah dean g tan N T TOR 193 KALSA DETCELON IMO DCTAUIOMN siexcantascrctcccsantricacetenes EO A TEE O O EI es 193 5 11 9 Face detector oian a E a ee ea 194 SES SE U a a a a a a a EE S 194 SARIZ Detector Irop peron nescera aE E E AA E OO el ncouateesuworene ys 195 SERIO EOstItems OetectO roria a A E E 196 5 11 10 1 SEU A E e A E E ener 196 5 11 10 2 Detector Opera lOM anen EN koaaeaae ate renanteeaaeaee era aeieds 197 LLII VODIECETFACKING COLO CUO
99. 6 10 58 24 02 2009 16 26 31 HP ALBIS 16 11 01 24 02 2009 16 26 33 x Gaon j 16 11 09 24 02 2009 16 26 40 i Eer Ae 16 11 27 24 02 2009 16 26 43 pE T K 16 11 29 24 02 2009 16 26 45 eA pss 24 02 2009 16 26 52 16 12 32 16 13 34 24 02 2009 16 26 55 ap 24 02 2009 16 26 57 ee zation 16 14 37 16 15 39 16 16 43 Ties sas E ce Sai Titl Connectio Query is c 35 16 18 45 16 19 48 16 20 49 16 25 50 p 16 26 51 7 B5 Titl Connectio Query is c S5 Titl Connectio Query is c B5 Titl Connectio Query is c Bai Titl Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connectio Query is c Ba Titl Connectio Query is c Mra 0 0 0 0 0 0 D l Bal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Title Bai Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Ba Tit Connectio Quem isc 0 Em Titl Connectio Queryisc 0 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Bal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Yisa 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Bra Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Ba Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Salis a one os ayment Suthorization U2 2b a T eredi m Adiust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 n Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 5 Titl Connecti Query isc 0 Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26
100. 6 28 19 29 10 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Leo Dit 94 N INNA 16 26 29 Figure 12 4 6 1 12 4 7 Viewing the video frame corresponding to the selected receipt line 327 Saar sestri famex I kJ a Period iro 23 02 2009 235959 e aaa a Bae E pia So Sparen results Titles 1 55 SO nn DST A V 34 24 02 2009 16 26 28 eal 60 24 02 2009 16 26 31 70 24 02 2009 16 26 33 106 24 02 2009 16 26 40 132 24 02 2009 16 26 43 142 24 02 2009 16 26 45 178 24 02 2009 16 26 52 204 24 02 2009 16 26 55 214 24 02 2009 16 26 57 zi C P aynen pabu tho rization Connectio Query is c subtotal 6S Connectio Query is c itl Connectio Query is c itl Connectio Query is c itl Connectio Query is c Connectio Query is c Connectio Query is c itl Connectio Query is c Connectio Query is c Connectio Query is c it Conmnectio Query is c Titles Date Time Text FS Sa HS F1S 1 a a a oe f Connectia Diane NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 E wae 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Connectio Query is c Visa 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Connectio Query is c Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 itl Connectio Query is c Pa
101. 84 320x240 a amp amp 2 MRO GaKaaEs SANRA 162840 r EBET Figure 5 9 3 5 NOTE When several detection zones are armed arming an auxiliary detector does not turn the border to a yellow color if the main detector is not armed The border remains green in this case The camera ID icon border also remains green If an auxiliary detector zone is armed and detects motion the color of video surveillance window border becomes red skipping the phase of being yellow 5 9 3 5 Camera control icons Camera control icons are displayed if Axxon Smart window is configured accordingly The color of the icon represents the camera status The following color codes for the camera icon are available Figure 5 9 3 6 1 Green The Main detector zone has been disarmed for the camera but one or some auxiliary zones may be armed 2 Yellow The main motion detection zone has been armed for the camera Red Armed zone detector sends an alarm Alarm color indication White The camera is disabled in Axxon Smart settings 160 Monitor 1 24fps 8408 320x240 16 34 02 he 162402 F _1_ study 16 34 02 m Figure 5 9 3 6 An extra red circle and the colouring of the camera ID on the camera icon stands for a recording in progress The camera symbol can be green yellow or red depending the camera status The red crossed circle over the grey camera icon means that due to malfunction such as camera failure or incorrect ca
102. 99 5 5 Ehe Camera oDJect setuD iarere a a a a aa a a aaa aaia aa aeaa 100 SSL VOEO TAB Glee naa en Ee ATO A ARE A EE N 101 e MOr TAB aaaea aa A T EE A AE E E O O ITA 108 jo Rs Ho imme C10 pal 6 epic 6 nr TAB mirasa a AE E EE OE ee eee ee 109 Dros DECO TAB a e T de eapasuaceeansnusi ganas T A OS 111 5 529 SUBUTIES TAB ia a a a alow T OE 112 5 6 STORING THE VIDEO ARCHIVE wicsssccsaveiccccavesinvsccus sen aa aa aa A aaas 113 5 61 Selecting IME CISK tO SAVE the recordi GS esnan aa a T 113 5 6 2 Saving video archive in a lOOP FIFO ccccssccseccsecceeccenecceceeeeceecesneeceuceeeceeuceeeeeeenceseeeeenceseeeeeaes 114 5 6 3 Vid o dar hive Tle StLUCCUR Cs vcin a e ee evwwiae deities E EE Gone AA E 115 OE AKO a E E ans tanewembeaniv easessuaeseianicwes 115 S62 Video arc NVETIE S raoir n aa E ERE EENE E E E OTN 116 56 33 Temp archive TCS iniiai a A a a a E A EAE E e AA 117 5 7 VIDEO SURVEILANCE MONITOR SETUP seseosessssosecsssossossosecsssoseosesoseosessssosessssoseosesossoseosssoseosssoseosee 118 Dt ModeoMontorsetup seguen E auetara a A E E ide hasta ess 118 5 7 2 Setting of video surveillance monitor size and position on the Screen sssssessessessessessessesrrserserseese 119 5 7 3 Setting up multi monitor systems rinier r AAA AAA NA AAE 121 S74 Setting up muti Monitor systeMS ernie a a ER rr mcs a 123 5 7 5 HOW TO ENABLE THE VIDEO MONITOR CONTROL PANEL c ccccesccesccseceeceeeccescceeceeseeeeeeeeeeee
103. AXXON SMARTprotection The Card Code Reader utility is used for reading the dallas codes from the video capture card cryptochip or the Guardant hardware protection key The utility displays the codes in the Code Reader window The Axxon Smart software comprises of several modules Each module is represented by an executable file The list of available functional software modules depends on the delivery configuration of the system and is included in the video sec key file When extending the system configuration for example in case of installing a new functional subsystem the key file should be replaced with a new one to activate the newly installed module IMPORTANT When a video capture card is replaced its dallas codes change accordingly Thus the key file should be replaced with a new one Ina distributed system key files on all computers should be replaced IMPORTANT If the video capture cards manufactured by AXXON are used in the video server then connecting the Guardant hardware protection key will make starting the Axxon Smart system impossible 1 2 THE AXXON SMART INSTALLATION KIT The Axxon Smart software is delivered in the form of an installation CD Figure 1 2 1 1 The installation disk contains all the software components required to install Axxon Smart on the computer 11 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help File and Folder Tasks Make a new Folder J Publish this Folder bo the Web Share this Folder
104. Application 09 07 2009 16 41 D sag E g hu Gal Boards exe OS codereader exe P Convert exe E Converter exe Po dbview exe A Fos exe E ordapisz dll a guardant api32ru dll Eal Signcheck exe Support exe 23 Tweakiexe 1504KE Application 476KB pplication 256KB Application 2 336 KE Application 1 112 K6 Application 16l6 KE Application c C VideolQ 7 T ools Convert exe Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting Converting D Uideo 1 7 03 08 DEANIE T CIAS 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D U ideo 17 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 DEANIE T CIAS 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 17 03 08 D U ideo 17 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 DEANIE T CIAS 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D U ideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 D Uideo 1 7 03 08 arz KB 36 KE Application Extension Application Extension 1192 KE Application 1180KB Application 244KB Application 09 07 2009 16 37 09 07 2009 16 34 09 07 2009 16 32 09 07 2009 16 34 09 07 2009 16 53 09 07 2009 16 36 09 06 2008 17 32 09 06 2008 17 32 09 07 2009 16 33 09 07 2009
105. Axxon Soft Inc Axxon Smart Software Package The User s Guide Version 1 0 5 Moscow 2009 Contents 1 AXXON SMART INSTALLATION UPDATING AND REMOVAL ccccssessseeeeeeessseeeeeees 11 1 1 LICENSINGMETHOD iscstede saek ccceesce te lacieuis base n aa eA EEN 11 1 2 THE AXXON SMART INSTALLATION KET isicccteciscacccceis ievecidovecessessactesnsisane suersideusshossaveckestcostupascoseveteeess 11 MF O ese etasse A E nas ata retateeata casas ave A atten aint made eua E sok pear ou 12 Taz TROY Meoris e a us edlatanednstu veut a Sencanns ade 13 L2 Additonal COMO IAG TAU S cesar ceaec ected casa tatrsc an E dead bance cesasmniad un aaasaeweece ee 13 1 3 AXXON SMART INSTALLATION onein aa a EEA laa neste 14 1 4 AXXON SMART REMOVAL ornitina a a a a a 24 1 5 THE CONTENTS OF THE AXXON SMART PROGRAM FOLDER ssessessessecsecsscsscsessecsecsecsecsecsecsecsecesoe 29 TS E DtIpd es Cl Ait hea tester T AAEE EAA E E E 29 152 Usermanual manudl riia O E AA 30 t53 Mod les MOdUWES hene a E ETEA ANES AAA O EEA 31 TSA Unites tool aa E a a A E E ions teuaiacnu cance 31 L55 Voice NOUMCALION THES 7 WAV erme r E E cltaiwecsincteansees 32 M536 SMa PNON Eoen A a a e a A RAE A A EEA 33 LIZ SMPC ira E N E A N a E E EE N ENE ASA 34 Ae MACS a A E N A A A E O O EA 35 2 STARTING AND CLOSING THE AXXON SMART SOFTWARE sssssssnsssnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnan 35 2 1 GENERALINFORMATION ainaki scutes sud beseueaass ween wes wes sack wacsseteue cavecaecevetsvec
106. CAM 8 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 24 977 gt CAM 8 ARCH_NEWtime1 lt 24 06 08 15 06 56 gt time2 lt 24 06 08 15 07 24 CAM 1 MD_START slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 26 118 CAM 1 MD_STOP slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 27 321 gt CAM 4 REC slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt CAM 4 MD_START slave_id lt O KISELEVA gt tss lt 24 06 08 15 07 30 977 Figure 12 3 1 7 12 3 1 4 POS terminal model selection Camera 1 7 Teminal Cash FIT r Connection settings _ r Fel Marketer ISM 3000 Type Pott Cd Cash ML based protocol TER gt Bas Posmaster Speed 300 z Parity Odd z C DTR C ATS Casio QT2100 SHARP UP 700 C Disable C Clear screen if the Siemens 2 HRK_ printer TB 003 05 D SHARP UP 700b Micros Subway INTEC TP SOL IBM Spanish SP1O1FR K Wincor Nixdorf BEE TLE Spanish Samsung SAM4S 7000 Series Wincor Nixdorf BEETLE MM Spanish Wincor Nixdorf BEETLE BD Spanish E System security service Schedule Macros 2 E Mail Call lt 4 SMS Web POS Text search Receipt s processing Words to recording s beginning separator Words for recording s ending separator C Match case Repeats processing Ignore repeats Z Apply Cancel Close Figure 12 3 1 8 The POS terminal model defines the data exchange protocol b
107. DTR and RTS fields can be left blank 4 Inthe Parity drop down list select the parity control mode for the COM port connection NOTE The values in the Port Speed and Parity fields should match the COM port settings in Windows 5 Enable the POS terminal power supply via the DTR or RTS outputs of the COM port by checking the DTR or RTS checkbox NOTE The DTR or RTS power supply is used in case of passive POS terminals with no independent power source 302 12 3 1 3 Testing POS terminal connection Start the TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility Open the Video tab and select one of the debug modes Debug 1 Debug 2 or Debug 3 Figure 12 3 1 4 Fine tuning AxxonSmart Figure 12 3 1 4 Open the POS tab and check the Save Data to Folder checkbox The system is now operating in debug mode Click the Browse button to open the folder in Windows Explorer Figure 12 3 1 5 Tweaki ideolQ 7 gt Tenemerpua hee D O nporpamme Figure 12 3 1 5 All data sent to the POS terminal port will be saved as is in the pos_n log files where n is the POS terminal number in the settings tree The files will be saved in the Axxon Smart Modules PosCapture folder the maximum size of each file is 500K 303 IMPORTANT The data is saved as is in the files irrespective of the POS terminal type in the list of the supported terminals This allows receiving data from POS terminals without any external software Click the POS Serve
108. E CARD INSTALLATION AND SETUP sscssccssscssecnseees 363 15 2 1 Codereader exe cannot read the card codes ic icccAciincccwstewasavsacwswerterncanteauiar adenine 363 15 2 2 Windows 2000 cannot recognize NEW hardware cccsecceeccseccseceeececcecceeeeaeceesceeucceceeceseeeeeeaaees 365 15 2 3 Corrupted video Ima E Enner a a A A A E a E EN 366 15 2 4 Two cameras send the same image Or some cameras send NO IMage ccseccesccsecceecceceeseeesceeeeees 366 15 3 Possible problems in IP devices SCtUP ccssccsccsccssccsccecceccesccscceccesccscceccesccscceccesccscceccsconccescesconccecees 366 15 4 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN AUDIO SUBSYSTEM SETUP cssscssscccssccsssccsscssscnssccssscnscccssscessesessenssesenss 367 15 4 1 AUTIO Wizara WET eaa a a a A E N 367 TO INDEX viciis aaa i 368 10 1 AXXON SMART INSTALLATION UPDATING AND REMOVAL 1 1 LICENSING METHOD Licensing is used to set the conditions for and regulate the usage of AXXON SMARTsoftware modules The Axxon Smart software is licensed using the video sec key file which links the AXXON SMARThardware protection to the software modules The key file is included in the software installation package and regulates the functionality configuration of the system The dallas codes of the video capture card cryptochips FS 5B FS 6C FS 8 FS 16 Exp WS 7 WS 17 and or the dallas code of the Guardant electronic hardware protection key form the hardware side of the
109. E oxxon Smart Scene 1 0 Ex 9 SPAN aula CoD Cropping mode is used for fine fitting video images to each other An image can be cropped by a specified number of pixels from the image edge The resultant image is then enlarged to its original size To enable cropping mode select the image to crop and click the Crop button in the toolbar Figure 6 2 3 6 The panel for setting the cropping parameters will open The fields in the panel specify the width of the cropping band in pixels The fields correspond to the image sides top right left and bottom After setting the values click the Accept button in the bottom of the panel To cancel cropping click the Cancel button E oxxon Smart Scene 1 a o aK o BAO AmA a CZELE TE om ue TE NOTE 1 After you have set the cropping widths and clicked Accept you cannot restore the original image by clicking Cancel To restore the uncropped image set the values in the fields to zero and click Accept NOTE 2 The image can be cropped by up to 15 pixels from each side only Image scaling is available in all processing modes 215 To enlarge an image make it active and keep clicking the Zoom In button in the shape of a magnifying glass with a plus sign until the image reaches the desired size Figure 6 2 3 7 If an enlarged image doesn t fit into the Scene window horizontal vertical or both scrolling bars will appear To view the hidden area of the image move
110. EL EL EL EL EL EL o hm m o g cL o i aa o ha im o hm im o ma mm re TEL Faw Figure 5 6 3 3 5 7 VIDEO SURVEILANCE MONITOR SETUP 5 7 1 Video Monitor setup sequence The Monitor settings panel allows to set the Monitor system object Figure 5 7 1 1 119 Grabber 6 i Grabber 7 Grabber 8 a Grabber 9 Grabber 10 gp Grabber 11 Big Grabber 12 Bg Grabber 13 Bef Audio 1 seers i Audio 2 iff Audio 3 oe Audio 4 E Audio 5 ffl Audio E Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 Monitor 1 gt a 100 H 100 Overlay Type l Overlay Type ll Control panel Allow moving Don t show disabled cameras Ratio 4 3 Figure 5 7 1 1 By default Axxon Smart displays only Monitor 1 object whereas Monitor 2 3 etc are not displayed on the user s screen To display the Monitor object check the Allow box in the Settings tab The name of the monitor is set up in the Name field of the Settings tab The name will be displayed in the upper part of the object s screen If the field is blank the monitor s name will be auto generated Monitor 1 For detailed instructions on the Monitor object settings see the relevant sections of this chapter 5 7 2 Setting of video surveillance monitor size and position on the screen Monitor screen positioning has the following settings vertical and horizontal coordinates of the top left orner of the monitor window its width a
111. ETE PEPE EP PE EOE Figure 5 5 2 1 The model and firmware fields are automatically filled out with the values of the relevant IP device Axxon Smart allows to choose digitization compression formats for an IP device P devices generally process and compress video signals in MJPEG and or MPEG You can select the processing and compression formats that are listed in Feed The input video signals format PAL or NTSC is selected from the Signal list This option is available only for IR servers You can select the frame rate for the video signals from an P device with the help of the Rate slider IP devices feed video signals to the video server with the maximum rate by default You will have this value with the Rate slider in the rightmost position max position in the settings panel Color depth adjustment By default the checkbox in the Color group is unchecked To receive the image in color check the Color checkbox in the Camera object settings panel Drag the slider next to the checkbox to adjust the saturation of the image The extreme left position minimum of the slider corresponds to black and white image The extreme right maximum position corresponds to fully saturated color image By default the checkbox in the Brightness and Contrast group is unchecked This means that the system automatically adjusts brightness and contrast To set the values of these parameters manually check the checkbox and move the sliders t
112. Hide Disabled Cameras checkbox in the Parameters tab of the Monitor object settings panel to hide the disabled cameras Figure 5 7 6 1 NOTE 1 While working with the IQ window of the surveillance monitor with the Hide Disabled Cameras on the indicator buttons for the disabled cameras will be white NOTE 2 To disable cameras during Axxon Smart management check the Disable checkbox in the Video tab of the Camera object settings panel 126 caf Grabber 6 Grabber 7 h a Grabber 8 2 Grabber 9 E Grabber 10 Grabber 11 ge Grabber 12 E Grabber 13 pe Audio 1 Audio 2 Audio 3 of Audio 4 a 7 Audio 5 Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 Monitor Fee a O v we 100 H 100 Overlay Type l Overlay Type ll Allow Control panel Allow moving lv Ratio 4 3 Mame Figure 5 7 6 1 While working with the surveillance monitor with the Hide Disabled Cameras on you should bear in mind the following point as you enable a camera the corresponding video monitor will not display the video signals from that camera To display the video signals you have to change the layout of the monitor windows or the number of the windows simultaneously displayed 5 7 7 Enabling the option for keeping the standard 4 3 w h window size By default the monitor window width and height ratio is the Standard Definition Television SDTV standard 4 3 As you set up the monitor window elements of the control panel t
113. LOLEDB 1i Integrated Security 55F1 Persist Security Info False 1 l Select dbi file Select ddi file oo m Select action Convert MS Access to MS Sol database Create backup copy MS SQL Restore from backup MS SQL Additional tools Update database Create dbi File Protocal Figure 12 3 2 2 Table 12 3 1 eS aaa aaa Select source database Items of select source database panel used as a data source about Axxon Smart titles Description Use Build database Connection string Create backup copy MS SQL Button of starting backup copy creation of the selected database Restore from backup MS SQL Button of starting recovery process of the selected database Update database Button of starting updating process of the selected database structure Create dbi file It is used for creating table structure file of the selected database with dbi format eee Fields where data messages concerning the process of conversion database update rotoco and other processes are shown 12 3 2 2 The Data Link Properties windows The Data Link Properties application is used to select the database to be used by Axxon Smart for storing the receipts and to set up the connection parameters To open this window click the Build button in the Videodb exe utility To select and set up the database do the following 312 In the Provider tab Figure 12 3 2 3 select the RDBMS to control the titles database
114. O SUBSYSTEM 8 3 1 Synchronous video and audio recording on alarm The Axxon Smart software can be set up to record video and audio synchronously in case of alarm registration for a Camera object When an alarm is registered for a camera the audio signal from the microphone assigned at setup will be recorded simultaneously with the video signal When the video is played the corresponding audio will also be played Figure 8 3 1 1 Synchronous audio recording can be played only by playing the corresponding video recording NOTE The existence of an audio recording supplement to the video recording is not indicated visually in the current version of the Axxon Smart software Monitor 1 HO EX 4 3fps 11392 320x240 CLS SALKAEKS a y n g a E an 16 46 29 ie Ci Gi Oh Oh Gi Oh Oh OE Sa OG SEK Figure 8 3 1 1 8 3 2 Synchronous video and audio recording on operator control Audio and video can be recorded synchronously upon operator control forced recording To do this select the Start Recording time in the surveillance window context menu Figure 8 3 2 1 244 EB exon Smart Monitor 1 O Clix CRECE amp wis gt 4 6fps 11362 320x240 Camera Show titles Processing Export 4rm all zones Disarm all zones Main Go Zone 1 1 12502 SRA CTE BCC KEE Figure 8 3 2 1 8 3 3 Playing an audio recording from the archive If a microphone is assigned to a camera the audio signal from this mi
115. O Stop recording Disarm e i i 7 NOTE If all the available cameras are displayed on the monitor then the functional menu in the Camera 9 Camera 10 Camera 11 Camera 12 Camera 13 Camera 14 Camera 15 Camera 16 Camera 17 Camera 18 Camera 19 Camera 20 Camera 21 Camera 22 Camera 23 Camera 24 Camera 25 Monitor 1 17 52 10 Figure 5 8 11 1 surveillance monitor window doesn t show Cameras 5 8 12 Camera control icons In Axxon Smart you use camera control icons to control the camera windows Figure 5 8 12 1 fC Bix 1ifps 5672 320x240 17 525 0a ETC LLL GES TTT 145 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a o a CIDE rs 19fps 7629 320x240 18 02 21 2 E GAANA KORA AAC oaaas wazi m Figure 5 8 12 1 NOTE The camera control icons are not displayed when the monitor window is set up accordingly or you do not have the rights to access them The icons correspond the respective cameras Numbers of the icons are the IDs of the relevant cameras The icons are as many as the number of cameras available for display on the monitor The camera control icons can be grouped together to ease up the monitor window set up This is the situation when you have over 8 cameras for display They are grouped as follows group 1 includes the icons for the cameras 1 to 8 group 2 for the cameras 9 to 19 etc NOTE You can move tools across the monitor only if they are not docked 5 8 13
116. Processing menu to select processing options for the video and enter the mask editing mode d The nested Export menu is used to export images recordings into the common formats as well as to print images e Use Start recording and Stop recording to manually initiate stop recording from a camera and signals from a syncro microphone if it is available If a recording is not currently on the Start recording is displayed If you go to the functional menu while a video sequence is recording Stop Recording is displayed instead of the Start Recording f Arm All Zones and Disarm All Zones as well as Basic are used to arm disarm the detectors zones An individual range of detectors can be set for each camera 18 Microphone indicator The microphone indicator is displayed in the monitor window only if you set up the Microphone object accordingly The indicator colours render the microphone status 19 Current time 5 8 2 Toolbars layout on the video monitor You can add remove and select the toolbars displayed on the video monitor with the Monitor Window Options button for the standard Axxon Smart window To add the current layout for the toolbars under any name use Add from the Monitor Window Options menu Figure 5 8 2 1 You shape the toolbar layout by dragging and dropping the tool groups with your mouse Monitor 1 eels A Figure 5 8 2 1 NOTE The Monitor Window Options can be programmed not to be displayed in the video
117. Rap 11 Ray 12 oS Ray 13 je Relay 11 Hg Flelay 12 Quality N Compressed frame size ee kepframe oO byte Delta 9500 byte i max 4892 Mb s4244 Mb 146760 Mb SaaS Frarnes 6 1 fhe Data 0453 Mbits Figure 5 5 3 1 5 5 4 Detector TAB The Detectors tab in the settings panel of the Camera object allows to add set up and remove detectors for any camera Figure 5 5 4 1 These are set up for each camera individually Axxon Smart provides monitoring of several detection zone masks and parameters for each camera Please find a detailed review how to set up and work with the detectors and detection zones further 112 Lal Computer zi Ei B Gra a i mane Dy Ray 3 Ri Ray 4 Dy Ray 5 oD Ray E Dy Ray Sy Ray 8 ides Advanced Compression Cbetector J Tiles Detection zone Direction No o A G Sensitivity Name Main Contrast Alarmed Always armed Filtration Add Size Detection frequency Frame scale Figure 5 5 4 1 5 5 5 Subtitles TAB Titles are used where you work with POS points of sale Go to the Titles tab of the settings panel for the Camera object to pin titles on top of the video image Figure 5 5 5 1 113 Lal Computer zi Ei B Gra a i mane Dy Ray 3 oT Ray 4 Dy Raps oD Ray 6 Dy Ray By Ray 8 Highlight words Title window E SE nee JKC lt Hy fresh bananas 4kvador word P Green fresh oranges Word J Tan the end of the document String E Yellow Fort
118. S PANEL iuaineach 44 B38 GeneraliNr ornato eona e sac viseonwcen augansu de wala cee A AA A A A AE 44 3 3 2 Opening and closing the Settings panel onnosnsensensensensesersrrseesersessessessesrrssrserseeseeserseosessesseseeserseesees 44 5 3 9 IPdevicescreadton Wiza donai A E A S 45 Jo ADOUAT O T me Str eae Eee ne 49 3 3 5 Description Of the Settings pane lieucissssctivacac wisi E E AAN 50 5 3 0 TheApply Canceland Close DUTON S snieni EAE E E A A 51 3 gt DICCE celts SPANNE Eana E a a aaa 51 A MACROSANDSCHEDULES teisienctscsteveteectecctcentestadschiatbisiabete tansevetvuntesdahebatets baiebabebsiniccbuauaasines 53 4 1 CREATING AND USING THE MACROS vases ctsccosicssccecendsecsceacsbsacncsaneaeecapeawassieuagenssawaghossbennecuneaeas ciovaeenenseaaees 53 4 2 CREATING A SCHEDULE sas csvascascbceasaucgssgsseaicaasicassaa a a tus snasequwes a aa aa 54 Be VIDEO SUB SYS My a ese Nese ceca eed seca becd be cdbecdbacdbacdbaadbaaneeanseanseaees 55 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION 3 sicaccnssncsacescccavcsaexeasns consaennaudcencoanscavceseneceussans aN a E NaN 55 5 2 VIDEO FORMATS ccs sccees erara aaa a a iday snes notes lay pasmaged gatwalen Seam a N NaN 55 5 3 THEVIDEO SYSTEM OBJECTS scersscsstesssdedeasacacasseuasscsstcastessseedeatsstens waconsseusanaeswonseaoueocswauenceaueusmacenaeiboaseauaes 60 Sok IPAE Ce A A A A RN oad 60 So pe a PPG AS oa ac E AE E OE E EA N 60 5 3 1 2 PP ESOT CUS ase AA atari se ers a ins Sx again Ws aid clas ogee ns Vs deus E NA
119. SE Oaea a E ANA O aueasiee meumene med acetic anette 352 13 8 3 The PTZ Sectera a a a T AAN a aaa 354 13 9 COLLECTING THE VIDEOSERVER CONFIGURATION AND STATUS INFORMATION FOR TECHNICAL SUPPORT SERVICE zessen neron aan A A O A ete 355 14 REMOTE WORKSTATION SE UP sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 356 14 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ON REMOTE WORKSTATIONS ssessessessecsecsscessecsecsecesoessecsecsecsecsecsecsscssoee 356 14 2 VIDEOSERVER CONNECTION SETUP wiccsccccscccassscececevscasecacsiccnesesesceuseauoes vac taservouresceesesescouseeuveddostuscveoreseees 356 14 2 1 COMMECHOMN ChEALIOMN troia a A E TTT 357 14 2 2 pDeletNe Connec UON aenn a a Ae 358 14 2 3 CONDECTIOM SC TUD Seire aer e e E N A O 359 14 3 USING THE REMOTE WORKSTATION ceirean aaae AAA A A AAA 361 14 3 1 CONMECUNE TO SEV Elal SEI VEIS ga aE E E a a aa 361 15 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN USING AXXON SMART ee 362 15 1 POSSIBLE AXXON SMART STARTUP PROBLEMG ssccsssccsssccsssccsscnssccsssccssscnssccssscscccssscessssessenssesenss 362 15 1 1 Card or guardant driver not loaded 0c ssciiscessccenewsssosuies cedaswedddaveveccdasssudedacvddassveecedtessnctesiasscadseaas cots 362 15 1 2 REV AMOL TOU Ot E E E T esha en adc gue E E EEEE tase ni nase mine dace EN EEN FE E EN E 363 15 1 3 KEY GOES TOL MialCh TNE Cal diern a AE a aiatadotundsanoinswacteniowsria acd piteaiete ade ieanivanmederu 363 15 2 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN THE VIDEO CAPTUR
120. Setup x Completed the Asxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 Setup Wizard Click Finish bukkon to exit the Setup Wizard Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 14 1 4 AXXON SMART REMOVAL To uninstall Axxon Smart follow the procedure below Step 1 To start uninstallation select Start Programs Axxon Smart gt Axxon Smart de installaztion Figure 1 2 3 1 Set Program 4ccess and Defaults Windows Catalog Windows Update Winzip if Accessories H Programs Intellect ss Documents Ai Axon Smart i y 5 About un Settings A ea Asccon Smart Search ie Uninstall a F User Manual p Help and Support uh Run oo E Shut Gown Figure 1 2 3 1 24 Step 2 Specify Axxon Smart v 1 0 0 106 program de installation type choosing the Remove all option Figure 1 2 3 2 iq Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Program de installation Specify Axxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 de installation type Let cancel _ Figure 1 2 3 2 Step 3 Press Remove button to begin Axxon Smart v 1 0 0 106 uninstallation process Figure 1 2 3 3 25 ia AxxOn Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Uninstallation procedure is about to start Press Remove button bo begin amp Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 software uninstallation process Press Back button to check or change uninstallation process parameters Press Cancel button to end the procedure Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 3 Step 4 Axxon Smart uninstal
121. TZ control button PTZ devices if exist can be controlled in the video display mode To switch to PTZ control mode press the PocketPC joystick then use the joystick to move the camera up down left or right the buttons on the right of the joystick allow zooming in and out 10 6 SMARTPHONE Axxon Smart allows remote viewing and controlling the cameras using a mobile phone satisfying the following requirements e Java MIDP 2 0 284 e GPRS e 65K color screen e 100x100 pixels screen resolution The number of telephone connections to the server is limited by the server capacity and the network bandwidth The SmartPhone module can be installed on the mobile phone after the Axxon Smart software is installed on the video server To install the SmartPhone module Figure 10 4 5 1 load the jar application into the mobile phone from the Axxon Smart program folder using the software included with the mobile phone 7 Software QBsader Alarm Expense Figure 10 4 5 1 NOTE The mobile phone can be connected to your computer using USB cable included with the mobile phone Bluetooth connection IR port After installing the mobile module on the phone open the installed programs where the following shortcuts will be available Figure 10 4 5 2 285 SmartPhone Help Phone Info Exit Figure 10 4 5 2 e Connections e Help e Phone Info e Exit To start the SmartPhone software set up the connection Figure 10
122. Term 7 a me WINRAR te n intellect exe fm TRADOS 7 Freelance b Asccon Smart mm VMWare if Uninstall rr A xon Smart User Manual All Programs Microsoft ActiveSync Wsat G oO amp a Figure 1 5 8 1 2 3 AUTOMATIC START 2 3 1 AXXON SMART in the Startup menu To start Axxon Smart automatically manually create a shortcut of the video exe file in the Axxon Smart program folder and move it to the Startup item of the Start gt Programs menu Figure 2 3 1 1 Internet SUSHI d E mail mm Tortoisesyty ai fee Ascxon Smart Microsoft Office winzip t Adobe Reader 6 RUA ACDSee 6 0 Dr Web Ro Scanner c Internet Explorer fl GIF 2005 Si MsN a Outlook Express Microsoft Office Ec 2007F O Remote Assistance Windows Media Player a eegen aie ai p LizardTec ES Microsoft Office TRADOS MultiTerm 7 T WinRAR a intellect exe mm TRADOS 7 Freelance d as T VMware d TA Axxon Smart d All Programs Microsoft ActiveSync Log OFF Shut Down Psat B loe e Figure 2 3 1 1 2 3 2 Automatic start of AXXON SMART on computer power on instead of the standard Windows shell To restrict the use of normal functionality of the computer i e starting of other applications copying and deleting files etc set up the Axxon Smart software to start on computer power on instead of the standard Windows shell 36 Axxon Smart will start immediately after
123. The menu ofthe camera control icons Use the menu of the camera control icons to control the modes for surveillance processing export service options The options available are subject to the cameras settings detectors zones and user rights Call up the functional menu by clicking the icon of the relevant camera The functional menu of the control icons for the camera currently not displayed are shorter They do not show camera selection video processing export and detector zones control They only provide the functions to arm disarm and start stop recording Figure 5 8 13 1 Note 1 The functional menu configuration for cameras is subject to user rights You will not see the functions that are not permitted to the current user Note 2 The functional menu of the camera control icons is not displayed for the cameras disabled by the administrator These icons have a white camera sign in them Neither are the disconnected for service cameras Those grey icons have a red crossed circle 146 E oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a g a wa ol 7 6fps 13027 320x240 e Camera Show titles Processing Export w Stop recording Disarm a S 8 ls 8 8 8 a be e PS 8 lz 8 8 8 15 02 01 8 Figure 5 8 13 1 5 9 USING THE MONITOR WINDOW 5 9 1 Camera arming and disarming To arm disarm cameras you follow the same routine as for main motion detectors When you arma camera the main detector is armed If movement i
124. URRENT_USER H A HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE E HARDWARE H A sam SECURITY SOFTWARE H Classes H Clients 9 Program Groups Pulsar RAdmin Realtek Schlumberger C Secure TechSmith J Tortoisesvn Triple Play 3 Voice Windows 3 1 Migrati 4 yDP H Young Digital Poland 9 SYSTEM a b Inbox Micros F ABBYY Lingvo 12 iw 2 Microsoft 2 windows E B Kontakte 2 Snagit 8 4g SmartOEM v 1 IE Registry Edit Figure 1 2 3 7 1 5 THE CONTENTS OF THE AXXON SMART PROGRAM FOLDER This section describes the contents of the Axxon Smart program folder The video exe module is the core of the Axxon Smart software Other modules ex audio or PTZ subsystems connect to this module Figure 1 2 3 1 E C Axxon Smart File Edit View Favorites Tools Help sack k gt a Search gt Folders ope ot x ie m Address E asccon Smart Go Snagit er Date Modified Activesync File Folder 15 07 2009 17 28 Backup File Folder 15 07 2009 17 29 drivers File Folder 15 07 2009 17 27 jiface File Folder 15 07 2009 17 27 Languages File Folder 15 07 2009 17 30 Manual File Folder 15 07 2009 17 27 Modules File Folder 15 07 2009 17 26 3 smartphone File Folder 15 07 2009 17 28 2 smartppe File Folder 15 07 2009 17 28 5 Tools File Folder 15 07 2009 17 26 Way File Folder 15 07 2009 17 30 a 4ppSettings dll B KB Application E
125. Z cameras of various manufacturers and PTZ cameras with integrated telemetry controllers fit this condition To connect simple PTZ devices with no RS XXX control an external telemetry controller should be used The Telemetry subsystem is designed for controlling the PTZ cameras NOTE IP servers can be controlled via the built in device Web server 7 2 THESUPPORTED PROTOCOLS The cameras supporting the following protocols can be used Videotec Dynacolor Samsung Panasonic Pelco Vortex Raymatic AD Kalatel GANZ MINTRON TKY3 JVC YOKO YAAN DONGYANG Lilin CBC VCL KOCOM LTC Fastrax TRC C amp B Technology Sony Nevis SunKwang EverFocus Sanyo OKO ITS GMBH 7 3 CONNECTING THE PTZ DEVICES Figure 6 2 4 1 shows the general appearance of the RS 485 to RS 232 converters Figure 6 2 4 1 The PTZ device connects to an available COM port of the computer An interface converter is almost always used The video signal from a PTZ camera connects to the video capture card Almost all PTZ devices use the RS 422 or RS 485 interface which comprises of 4 wires 2 inputs and 2 outputs A converter from RS 422 485 to RS 232 is needed to connect the PTZ device to the computer For our purposes only 2 wires are required for data transfer from the computer to the PTZ device 223 7 3 1 PTZ devices setup Figure 7 3 1 1 The RS 422 485 protocol is address based thus before connecting a camera assign it a physical addr
126. a check Disarm option in the functional menu of video surveillance window 3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a 0o ax OCE EE E 6 6fps 12912 320x240 SS Camera Show titles Processing Export Stop recording CRACK KK Aaa SHOCKS Figure 5 9 1 3 When it is disarmed they become light green This confirms that the camera is disarmed The border of camera ID indicator may still be red when the camera is disarmed if it was manually initiated to start recording prior to that If this is the case the color turns green when operator stops the recording 5 9 1 3 Masking Motion detection in the view field and recording of evidence footage to the disk is one of the main functions of the video surveillance system The view field for each camera is the zone of independent motion detection so any motion within the scene observed by the armed camera will be recognized This event will be registered and processed automatically Other motion detectors operate in a similar way Masking the image is used to set up detailed motion detection The mask defines the image areas which will not be covered by the motion detector When you have only main detector the Masking function is activated by choosing the Processing and Detector mask menu item When you have auxiliary detectors the Masking function is activated by choosing the Processing and Detector mask menu item Figure 5 9 1 4 On entering the mask display editing mode the cross shaped cu
127. a detection zone ray or the All Cameras value All Rays All Zones can be specified In the latter case the control will apply to all devices of this type registered in Axxon Smart Select an event on the selected device to trigger sending the e mail message Select an event in the Event column A particular event the choice of available events depends on the device or Any Event value may be selected In the latter case the e mail will be sent upon registration of any event on the selected device Attach the frame image file to the e mail Select Yes in the Frame column to attach the frame that triggered an event on the device In the Connection drop down list select the Internet connection type for sending e mails In the E mail To field specify the e mail recipient s address In the E mail From field specify the e mail sender s address Specify the address of the SMTP server to be used for sending e mails The address can be specified in symbolic or numeric notation 266 9 Specify the user name and password for SMTP server authorization Usually the user name is identical to the mailbox name on the mail server The mailbox name is the string before in the e mail address 10 1 4 Voice Message Service call The Voice Message Service is designed for sending voice messages over telephone lines This service automatically dials the specified telephone numbers and plays the specified audio files To send voice messages a v
128. abase setup using the idb exe utility Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 Line 24 Line 25 Telemetry panel System security service E Schedule Receipt processing Words to recording s beginning separator Words for recording s ending separator Match case Repeats processing The receipts received from the POS terminals are saved in the so called titles database of Axxon Smart The titles database stores the receipt texts and allows to search and fetch the receipts for subsequent analysis To use the titles database Axxon Smart should be set up using the idb exe utility The utility is included in the Axxon Smart installation kit Figure 12 3 2 1 310 E C Aron Smart File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back gt 5 pi a Search Folders l tr x id EE Address E Ciaxson Smart Go i Snagit K e Date Modified o hl O ActiveSync File Folder 15 07 2009 10 48 Backup File Folder 15 07 2009 10 49 3 backupaxxsmart File Folder 15 07 2009 12 2 drivers File Folder 15 07 2009 10 45 _Jiface File Folder 15 07 2009 10 46 Languages File Folder 15 07 2009 10 50 5 Manual File Folder 15 07 2009 10 46 Modules File Folder 15 07 2009 15 36 C smartphone File Folder 15 07 2009 10 48 5 smartppe File Falder 15 07 2009 10 46 3 Tools File Folder 15 07 2009 10 48 Way File Folder 15 07 2009 10 50 E 4ppSettings dll 84 KE Application Extension O9 07
129. able is located in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder The utility allows adjusting the sound card parameters otherwise available in the Windows Control Panel 13 5 PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT The Fps exe utility displays textual information about video server and workstation resources used for video signal compression during the recording and network transmission and for decompressing the video signals recorded to archive or received from the network during playback The performance of such operations is defined as the number of frames of a certain resolution and color depth compressed or decompressed by the video server or workstation in one second To start the utility run the executable in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder After the utility has started select the video recording file to be used for testing purposes NOTE Resolution and color depth of the recorded signal affect the testing result We recommend choosing a typical average recording with regards to its resolution and color depth To view the information about the number of frames compressed per second check the Check Compression checkbox Click Start to start the test the total number of frames compressed in one second is displayed in the title bar of the utility window Figure 12 4 9 1 336 comp 586 24 decomp 0 00 ratio 18 32 yer 110 w352 h 284 Source Video File Civideow 19 01 09 1512 07 cr i Check Compression St
130. ackground change detector 5 11 6 1 Setup The detector is set up using the settings panel 191 The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 6 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 The Armed Always checkbox If checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 The Sensitivity parameter specifies the detected deviation of the overall frame intensity from the average alarm value 4 The Filtration slider This parameter specifies the upper limit of object speeds that do not trigger the alarm one Relay 11 one Relay 12 oat Relay 13 Grabber 3 pe Camera 4 pe Camera 5 ie DE Camera 6 a Grabber 4 ph Camera 7 i pa Camera 8 B Grabber 5 ph Camera 9 pe Camera 10 5 a Grabber 6 3 Sensitivity Contrast Filtration View Size Show Detection frequency Detector type olor Background change Frame scale Figure 5 11 6 1 5 11 6 2 Detector in operation This detector is capable of discovering
131. ade the AAC Decoder AAC Decoder which enables streaming AAC audio in Microsoft Internet Explorer has not been installed or could not be registered on this computer To install or upgrade the AAC Decoder you must have Administration rights on this computer and you must answer Yes when asked if you wish to allow the installation Mo f E T ee Figure 15 2 4 2 15 4 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN AUDIO SUBSYSTEM SETUP Two main problems may occur in audio subsystem setup 1 Axxon Smart recognizes no sound cards in the system 2 Audio setup problems in Windows To solve the first problem check if at least one sound card is installed in the computer Then make sure the drivers are installed correctly If yes run the Boards exe utility from the Modules folder of the Axxon Smart program folder If the installed sound cards are listed in the Board Name drop down list then contact technical support If the list is empty check the correctness of the sound card installation and setup in Windows again Read the sound card documentation for details 15 4 1 Audio Wizard Utility In case of sound setup problems in Windows use the Audio Wizard utility Figure 15 4 1 1 368 I audio Wizard x Audio Subsystem Helper Welcome to Audio Wizard It helps you to tune the audio subsystem 44 Back Next gt gt Cancel Figure 15 4 1 1 16 INDEX Drivers 14 70 A Action 52 153 154 244 245 Active surveillance window 1
132. ae a After user authorization the monitor will open in the Web browser window with the set of cameras defined in the Web Server setup Figure 10 4 4 2 The Web Server surveillance monitor functionality is the same as that of the Monitor object of the corresponding video server except for active surveillance functions active mode cannot be enabled layout selection and the slide show option the Layout and Slide Show buttons are not displayed The user can control the PTZ devices using the surveillance monitor in the Web browser To open the PTZ control panel double click the square icon in the bottom right corner of the video image Double clicking the video image area displays semi transparent PTZ control elements To move the camera use the mouse When the fs fps and fs size applet parameters are set the frame rate and frame size are displayed in the bottom right corner of the image Figure 10 4 5 1 This data allows estimating the network traffic 280 2 WebServer Client Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help d Q sxx x B A pe Search STY Favorites al E Lal xs rel http 10 0 1 133 Eco Links Snagit FE sy as Ej a A P Eaperanto oanret Z Axxon Smart allows using a PocketPC to view and control the cameras To use this option you need a PocketPC with any available technology for network access and the specialized soft
133. age The Motion WaveLet algorithm transfers the whole frame into frequency form not individual blocks Thus it gives no blocking effect at all Server load optimization The server usually processes requests one by one and compresses the video for each request increasing the load on the system If the requests for different transfer rates are received the resources are wasted The unique feature of the Motion WaveLet algorithm is that it allows compressing the video flow once and sends it to clients at the required rates with no additional load on the resources Thus an unlimited number of clients can receive the video flow at the required rates which does not overload the videoserver 59 Client load optimization The video compressed using the Motion WaveLet algorithm can be decompressed to a resolution which is smaller than the original if necessary Usually the algorithms fully decompress the image to its original size regardless of the resolution to be displayed on screen If several eg 4x4 video channels are displayed on the 1280x960 monitor then each channel needs to be decompressed to its original size 720x576 and then displayed at 320x240 to fit its part of the screen In this case the hardware resources are subject to excessive load 5 3 THE VIDEO SYSTEM OBJECTS 5 3 1 IP devices 5 3 1 1 P cameras An P camera Figure 5 3 1 1 includes e Analog camera e Digitizing and compression device e Device for sending
134. ages 3 Modules ee Publish this Folder to the preci Web Redist E Share this Folder Gwav Y Product cab setup exe setup ini Other Places x Installer My Documents ig My Computer My Network Places Details Figure 1 2 3 1 This section contains the step by step procedure for installing the Axxon Smart software Axxon Smart is installed in two stages first the basic Axxon Smart version is installed then the Axxon Smart v 1 0 0 SP3 update pack which is included in the installation disk starts after a couple of seconds Step 1 Insert the Axxon Smart installation disk in the CD ROM drive and open it in a separate window of your computer To start the installation process run the setup exe file Figure 1 2 3 1 It is located in the root folder of the installation disk Figure 1 2 3 2 15 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back z 73 Search gt Folders C Drivers File and Folder Tasks key Make a new folder languages 3 Modules 9 Publish this Folder to the Redi Web Redist Ka Share this Folder way Y Product cab setup exe Other Places A setup ini Installer My Documents of My Computer My Network Places 4 Details Figure 1 2 3 2 Step 2 Choose installation language dialog window will open Select the language and click Ok button Figure 1 2 3 3 Choose installation language x Select the installation program s language fram the li
135. ailable parameters Table 10 4 2 Version Html file version should match the client version cam count number Number of cameras If the parameter is not specified the cameras are counted automatically port from html url url Html receives the port number from the port parameter in the index htm file Url receives the port number from the url from where the applet has been 277 received Port number If the port from parameter is not set the applet receives video from this port archive available true false false The parameter determines if the archive is available The parameter determines if true false false control available control buttons are available layout available true false false Determines if the layout selection buttons are visible top visible true false true Determines if the top control panel is visible T m O 2 layout default 0 1 2 3 Default layout of the applet at startup 0 1 frame 1 4 frames 2 6 frames 3 9 frames Html URL Path is taken from html url URL Path is taken from URL This is used when the applet operates via url path from url html ReverseProxy url path URL path If the url path from parameter is set to html this parameter defines the URL path True FPS rate is displayed fs fps true false false next to the camera name in the bottom left corner fs size true false false True Cu
136. aining information about all system objects e log files containing the information about operation of Axxon Smart modules e backup copies of these files 27 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O P pO search f Foes fy DX 1D FE Address cy J co amp Snaglt 2 Ly Date Modified pf 9 4UDTO File Folder 08 06 2009 13 36 9 AxisUtility File Folder 09 07 2009 16 40 15 07 2009 17 30 15 07 2009 17 28 29 06 2009 9 23 Open BACK Explore Doce Browse with ACOSee Docu EE 08 05 2009 11 54 Gecen 13 07 2009 10 05 O Englis Sharing and Security 08 06 2009 10 03 es Snagit 13 07 2009 16 33 ye SYN Checkout Films 14 07 2009 10 13 intel 08 05 2009 11 40 pkey 12 05 2009 16 40 12 05 2009 16 40 15 04 2009 17 51 12 05 2009 16 43 12 05 2009 16 50 Pica faa 08 05 2009 12 47 Pictur Hi Check by Dr Web 12 05 2009 16 51 C Progr Send To 14 07 2009 11 07 Bar 04 05 2009 10 57 miea 15 04 2009 18 24 Farol ORY 12 05 2009 16 52 Ga Shor d Paste 15 07 2009 17 24 G2 spain ee 14 07 2009 15 05 C Syste EPT 15 04 2009 14 26 Gro er 29 05 2009 15 14 im Ae 15 07 2009 17 14 E id Properties Arar AAAA nA Figure 1 2 3 6 Step 7 Finally delete the registry branch related to Axxon Smart HKEY _LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE AXXON SMART Figure 1 2 3 7 g Registry Editor File Edit view Favorites Help E gB My Computer HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT ab Default REG_SZ value not set 59 HKEY_C
137. alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 If Show is checked the border of the detection zone is displayed in the surveillance window The Color drop down list Specifies the color of the outlining 197 5 The Sensitivity slider is used to register when the object appears in the scene Sensitivity defines the minimum movement intensity of the moving object to be distinguished from the noise snow rain etc 6 The Filtration slider This parameter specifies the time interval after which the item is to be considered lost maximum position corresponds to 3 minutes minimum 3 seconds 7 The Size slider This parameter specifies the minimum size of the lost item relative to the frame size The detector triggers an alarm for lost items which are bigger than the specified value The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms wont Relay 11 oat Relay 12 o hug Relay 13 3 Grabber 3 poh Camera 4
138. anches of the tree can be expanded to view their contents or contracted to hide the objects that are irrelevant at the moment To go down one level from a node and view the list of its child nodes click the plus icon next to the node To hide all child nodes click the minus sign NOTE The objects configuration is determined by the delivery specification of the Axxon Smart software set in the key file included in the delivery set The object settings panel for the object that is selected in the tree Video display panel if a Camera object is selected The Apply Cancel and Close buttons for confirming or canceling the changes and closing the Settings panel respectively Figure 3 3 5 1 50 a LJ Computer S a Grabber 1 pe Camera 1 Camera 2 ia fal Camera 3 pay Camera 4 ba Ray 1 SY Ray 2 AY Ray 3 SY Ray 4 ough Relay 1 g Relay 2 g Relay 3 owe Relay 4 Bogs Grabber 2 ph Camera 5 ej Camera 6 pea Camera 7 ideo V Compression Detector Board om Chon Ee Pre alarm record 0 3 s Name Resolution Normal ss Post alarm record O s Hot record time 0 A s Record alarms Hot recate O 3 fps _ Disable Recording rate 0 B fps _ Brightness Contrast ii pme E SS SAE Color T Realtime l YUV4 2 0 3 z processing recording O YUV4 2 2 Figure 3 3 5 1 NOTE When the Settings panel initially opens the Computer object settings are displayed though the Computer ob
139. and to set the data format To select the SQL server click Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server in the list and then click Next NOTE Axxon Smart supports only SQL Server databases E5 Data Link Properties x Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data wou want to connect to MediaCatalogDB OLE DB Provider MedialataloghMengeddb OLE OB Provider MediaCatalogy ebDB OLE DB Provider Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE OB Provider Microsol Office 12 0 Access Database Engine OLE DE Pro Microsoft OLE DE Provider For Data Mining Services Microsoft OLE DE Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DE Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DE Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DE Provider for OLAF Services 6 0 Microsoft ae DE Provider for Oracle MSDataShane OLE DE Provider for Microsoft Directory Services Cancel Help Figure 12 3 2 3 The Connection tab will open automatically To set up the connection to the titles database server do the following Figure 12 3 2 4 1 Select the network name for the SQL Server to control the databases in the Select or Enter Server Name list The local option relates to the SQL Server installed on the computer used to set up the titles database To refresh the list of connected servers click Refresh 2 Select the authorization parameters user name and password for SQL Server connection These parameters are set during the SQL Server software installation Example
140. anel Use other control panel buttons to navigate the video recording To play back the recordings non stop click and hold the Start button To terminate the non stop playback click the Stop button Otherwise the playback will stop at the end of the last recording In pause mode the Fragment Forward and Fragment Back buttons display the next or previous frame In playback mode these buttons speed up or slow down the playback by 2 4 or 6 times If you click these sequentially you will fast forward at 2 4 6 x speed Or fast rewind respectively 5 10 3 Archive navigation Archive navigation is performed using the time stamp list and the timeline Scrollbar and arrow keys are used for time stamp list navigation Figure 5 10 3 1 173 E oxxon Smart Monitor 1 0 HK 0 3fps 12985 6 5 16 16 06 51 16 07 11 16 07 14 i 16 07 17 a i6072 il a 16 07 36 v E atte 29 01 09 16 06 37 f7 Figure 5 10 3 1 The default timeline scale displayed on entering archive playback mode is 24 hour The recorded time intervals are marked in blue on the timeline Clicking the numbers on the scale zooms the scale in and the minutes become visible Thus several clicks on the timeline result in it being displayed in the maximum magnification so that the interval of 5 minutes takes the whole length of the scale To zoom out on the timeline keep right clicking it To move the magnified timeline section drag the scal
141. arcing and adding IP devices to the objects tree on the tab Hardware with the help of IP Wizard utility 1 To edit objects tree do the following Select the required object Computer on the tab hardware of Sysytem settings dialog window Figure 3 3 3 1 45 About program 6 System settings it IP Devices Wizard Y Shutdown Figure 3 3 3 1 2 Click with the right mouse button upon the selected Computer object and select IP Devices creation Wizard in the contextual window Figure 3 3 3 1 3 In result dialog window of IP Wizard utility will open Figure 3 3 3 2 Note When started IP Wizard utility searces for IP devices registered in the PC Intellect Parameters of the found devices will be accessible for editing in the table IP devices utility Figure 3 3 3 2 6 12 The utility also automatically indicates connected hardware The list of the devices supporting the given function is shown in the Table 3 3 1 All integrated IP cameras support manual adding of objects to the tree http www axxonsoft com products axxon_professional integration cameras php a Add device manually Available hardware f oO Video channels 4294967280 Audio channels D Contacts 4294967292 Executable devices 4294967292 Telemetry lines 4294967280 Arecont Vision Figure 3 3 3 2 Table 3 3 1 The list of IP devices supporting auto determination 46 Table 3 3 1 Brand of IP device Model of IP device Beward
142. art D Gheck Decompression Codec Motionwavelet stop Count i Compression Level Medium Destination Jpeg Folder ae Figure 12 4 9 1 To view the information about the number of frames decompressed per second by the video server or workstation check the Check Decompression checkbox Click Start to start the test the total number of frames decompressed in one second is displayed in the title bar of the utility window Figure 12 4 9 2 comp 0 00 decomp 666 67 ratio 0 00 ver 110 wis52 hizo Source Video File C Wideot19 01 09 1514 01 ne D check Compression Check Decompression Codec Motionwavelet stop Count E Compression Level Medium Destination Jpeg Folder m Figure 12 4 9 2 To view the information about the number of frames compressed and decompressed simultaneously per second check both checkboxes Click Start to start the test the total number of frames compressed and decompressed in one second is displayed in the title bar of the utility window Figure 12 4 9 3 337 comp 3127 50 decomp 714 29 ratio 14 66 Yer 110 3527 h Source Video File C ivideo 19 01 09 1512 05 Ai i Check Compression Start Check Decompression Codec Motionwavelet Count i Compression Level Medium Destination Jpeg Folder ae Figure 12 4 9 3 13 6 DIGITAL SIGNATURE VERIFICATION The Signcheck exe utility is used for verification of the authenticity of a BMP o
143. ated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered NOTE If Alarm Recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 When Show is checked a moving object is outlined in the surveillance window The Color drop down list It specifies the color for the outlining of a moving object 5 The Sensitivity slider Sensitivity defines the minimum movement intensity of the moving object to be distinguished from the noise snow rain etc 6 The Contrast slider This setting value corresponds to the detected object contrast This setting affects the operation of the motion detection algorithm It is adjusted experimentally For most cases a mid value is sufficient 199 7 The Filtration slider This setting corresponds to the object s upper speed threshold at which Frame scale Detector type PT Trace Figure 5 11 11 1 g Relay 9 ow Relay 10 g Relay 11 one Relay 12 Log Relay 13 E Grabber 3 pei Camera 4 esi Camera 5 ow SC Camera 6 mi Grabber 4 W Camera 7 i pe Camera 8 mE Grabber 5 ee Camera 9 i p Camera 10 mi Grabber 6 pe Camera 11 ip Camera 12 Sensitivity Contrast Filtration mi ax max
144. ators The color of camera ID icon border indicates the current status of programmable video recorder There are following options for border colors Figure 5 9 3 4 e Light green No video recording is being performed The camera has not been armed by the Main detector main detection zone However one or several auxiliary zones for the camera may be armed e Yellow No video recording is being performed The camera has been armed by the Main detector main detection zone e Red Recording is being performed activated by alarm or manually by operator 158 3 oxxon Smart a Monitor 1 a g ax aiaz iw 6 2fps 13077 320x240 161755 GD study Ol OF OF OF OF OF ti tits 08 08 amp 06 5 OF OF BACK LK ALCS 16 17 55 i B Ne 16 17 55 Z Figure 5 9 3 4 A crossed camera above a camera ID indicator in Axxon Smart stands for no signals are coming from this camera If this due to malfunction such as camera failure or incorrect camera settings then the standard monitor window crossed shows a proper cross with the orange background The standard IQ window shows then a camera in a circle If signals from a camera are not coming as the camera is disabled in Axxon Smart settings then the standard monitor window shows a proper cross with the orange background In this case the standard IQ window shows a cross on the camera indicator as well 5 9 3 4 Color codes for borders of surveillance windows
145. ber of the COM port to connect the PTZ device to 225 NOTE If the Axxon Smart key file configuration includes the POS subsystem consider the following The COM 1 port is used by the POS subsystem by default This is the case even if no POS terminals are connected to the port Thus to connect PTZ devices to COM1 the POS subsystem objects should be disabled or set up for using another COM port 3 Inthe Rate list select the data exchange rate for the COM port 4 Inthe Parity list select the parity verification mode for PTZ device data exchange with this COM port NOTE The values of the Rate and Parity parameters should match the corresponding Windows settings for the port 5 Enable the power supply of the PTZ device from the COM port outputs by checking the DTR or RTS checkboxes NOTE The PTZ device power supply via DTR or RTS is used for passive devices i e e the ones that do not have independent power supply ols Audio 7 oe Audio 8 Monitor 1 s Monitor 2 H Monitor 3 E Monitor 4 Protocol Port Fate Parity C BTR Figure 7 3 2 1 7 4 1 Line object setup PTZ devices are configured using the Line objects To set up a Line object use its object settings panel Do the following Figure 7 4 1 1 1 To enable PTZ camera control and moving objects tracking using the surveillance window select the camera number in the Camera list 226 2 In the Address field specify the address of the PTZ de
146. ble contact your AXXON dealer 1 2 3 Additional components The Redist folder of the installation package contains the required additional programs and components Figure 1 2 3 1 Net2 0 Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 the required system component SQLExpress Microsoft SQL Server Express 2005 the database management system for managing the Axxon Smart databases MSDE Microsoft Data Engine the program for database creation and maintenance Java the J2SE 5 0 Update 6 installation package Active Sync Microsoft ActiveSync is a software release for Windows Mobile based devices ActiveSync provides a great synchronization experience with Windows based PCs and Microsoft Outlook right out of the box ActiveSync acts as the gateway between your Windows based PC and Windows Mobile based device enabling the transfer of Outlook information Office documents pictures music videos and applications to and from your device In addition to synchronizing with a desktop PC ActiveSync can 13 synchronize directly with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 so that you can keep your e mail calendar data tasks and contact information updated wirelessly when you re away from your PC IPP Intel Integrated Performance Primitives Intel IPP library has the majority of optimised functions compatible with systems on the multi core processor base and targeted for multimedia data processing and communication application s VC2005_SP1 T
147. broadcasting in Europe Australia New Zeeland and most Asian countries The majority of cable TV channels in Russia use PAL format This format uses similar amplitude modulation of color difference signals EU 0 877U and EV 0 493V with a 90 degree phase shift However the EU amplitude sign inverses every second line On decoding the color components are strictly separated by adding subtracting the color signals of subsequent lines and the parasite lightness modulation leads to only a small saturation shift Averaging the signal from two lines increases the signal noise ratio but decreases the vertical sharpness by a factor of 2 This is partially compensated for by increasing the number of TV lines Technical characteristics of PAL Resolution 625 lines Frames per second 25 Number of fields 50 Interlacing The number of colors and color resolution of the video signal is defined by color models A color model consists of color coordinates and their implementation method Human perception of color can be described in terms of three components red R green G and blue B This digitizing format is called RGB The YUV format also exists The TV signal consists of the brightness Y and two color difference U and V signals which are obtained by subtracting the blue B and red R components from the brightness component 57 Y R 0 299 G 0 587 B 0 114 U R 0 169 G 0 332 B 0 500 128 V
148. c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 S 7 a 16 09 08 16 09 13 P l 16 09 24 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046610 16 09 39 16 09 42 16 09 45 15 16 09 51 Hori 16 10 13 roe 16 10 35 aar 1048610 18 00 16 10 55 re 16 10 58 j d g 16 11 01 l 16 11 09 16 11 27 a 16 11 29 16 11 32 16 12 32 16 13 34 16 14 37 16 15 39 16 16 43 16 17 45 16 18 45 16 19 48 16 20 49 16 25 50 F 16 26 51 7 il Show titles gt 4 wed anli ee fell ll adan Processing gt Q Zoom Export an Contrast Titles ae Sharpness Text ag NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Visa 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 29 10 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Amex 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28
149. c rate 0 H fps _ Disable Recording rate 0 fps Record alarms Real time processing recording Figure 5 5 1 1 1 Assign a name to the Camera 2 Select the frame size of the digitized video Specify one of the following values in the Resolution field Normal High Full See the frame sizes for these three values in Table 5 5 1 Table 5 5 1 NOTE When an ADC video capture card operates in multiplexed mode i e digitizes video from more than one camera the total maximum frame rate decreases from 16 to 12 fps if the resolution is set to Full The image in the surveillance window of the settings panel for the Camera object is sized to fit the surveillance window To facilitate setting up cameras Axxon Smart has the option to display video images in the surveillance window with the true size i e as per resolution settings for the given camera To display video images in the surveillance window with the true size open the surveillance window menu and select True Size Figure 5 5 1 2 The True Size image is generally larger than the absolute size 103 of the camera image For that reason the True Size image is only partially displayed in the surveillance window The magnified image can be dragged by mouse in any direction Ll Computer Bae Grabber 1 DT Ray i Ray 2 Dy Ray 3 ST Ray 4 Ray 5 ST Ray 6 Rap ST Ray B Relay 1 Brightness histogram C video Board 1 7 Channel 1 Pre alarm r
150. card onto the video capture card The J6 socket marked 4 RAYS 4 RELAYS is used to connect rays and relays 249 Connecting I O 4 4 subcard frays relays n Connector J6 DI ig DI 1 24v DI 25 DI 2ezay DI 3A DI 3 24vyy DI 44 DI goza DO 1 A ERT a 3 D024 DO2 ge eg 2DO34 DOSE pied S DO44 Do4 MU eal je i a 24 v9 GND eA ETLEIKTKILIK CONDA GND oe sy cosmo cosmo pees cosmo 4 3S54NT 354NT ARH 354NT E21 E21 E36 E36 36 E36 DI Digital in sensor 1jAO HOR HA OE j DO Digital out relay Ai ola Ala ia a GND Ground to the computer tower CGND External ground Figure 9 2 1 1 4 RAYS 4 RELAYS ON CARD 4 4 RAYS RELAY CARD LAYOUT J6 SOCKET COLLECTOR EMITTER DI Digital in ray DO Digital out relay GND Ground computer casing CGND External ground Install the 4 4 ray relay card onto the video capture card using the special connecting sockets Figure 9 2 1 2 Secure the card by screws 250 Figure 9 2 1 2 Then connect the interface cable to the 4 4 ray relay card This completes the connection of the 4 4 ray relay card Figure 9 2 1 3 Figure 9 2 1 3 9 3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 16 4 RAY RELAY CARDS The 16 4 ray relay cards Figure 9 2 1 1 are multi channel cards for receiving and digitizing the signals from the rays used together with the FS 5B FS 6C FS 8 or FS 16 EXP video capture cards The 16 4 ray relay cards allow simultaneous
151. cards don t support any of the overlay types available in Axxon Smart and some support only one The integrated video cards mostly don t support any of the overlay types available in Axxon Smart If that is the case disable overlay to save your resources 5 7 5 HOW TO ENABLE THE VIDEO MONITOR CONTROL PANEL The video monitor control panel features 1 control panel that features options to e select the number of camera windows displayed on the monitor at a time e manage the cameras layout e control the slide show and number of alarmed cameras to be displayed e display current date and time 2 configuration panel with buttons e Window Options e Window setup e Minimize e Quit the Program By default the control panel is displayed on the video monitor To hide the video monitor control panel uncheck the Control Panel Figure 5 7 5 1 The standard window of the monitor doesn t display the Control Panel then Whilst the default IQ monitor window doesn t display the configuration panel 125 Hat Grabber 6 ase Grabber 7 Hs Grabber 8 Hee Grabber 9 H Grabber 10 ei Grabber 11 Hs Grabber 12 HEEE Grabber 13 H Audio 1 oft Audio 2 iff Audio 3 E Audio 4 Monitor 3 oY Monitor 4 Monitor fe ba n C Y m C Overlay Type Overlay Type Il Allow i Control panel Allow moving N E i ame Don t show disabled cameras Ratio 4 3 Figure 5 7 5 1 5 7 6 Hide Disabled Cameras Check the
152. cation check the Turn Off Sound checkbox in the Computer object settings panel Figure 10 1 1 1 By default voice notification is enabled for all Axxon Smart cameras To disable voice notification for specific cameras uncheck the corresponding checkboxes in the Sound From Cameras list To enable voice notification from all other cameras the Turn Off Sound checkbox should be checked 263 Line 19 Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 Line 24 gs Line 25 Telemetry panel E System security service H E Schedule Settings Storage drives Voice notification Si cere O Sound from cameras Camera 1 L Camera 4 I Protect archive with password Figure 10 1 1 1 10 1 2 Short Message Service SMS The Short Message Service is designed for sending SMS messages to mobile phones NOTE To send SMS messages a GSM modem a GSM adapter or a mobile phone supporting the ETSI GSM 07 07 or ETSI GSM 07 05 standards should be installed in the computer To set up the SMS service use the SMS object settings panel To add the controls for sending SMS messages do the following Figure 10 1 2 1 1 Check the checkbox in the left column of the SMS message controls table NOTE This checkbox is checked automatically if you select any value in the Device or Event columns 2 Select on which device an event should occur to trigger sending the SMS message Select a device in the Device column A particular camera detection
153. ce E mail is designed for sending e mails to remote users of the system To send e mails the computer should be connected to the Internet using the local network or the TCP IP protocol NOTE A The Axxon Smart E mail service does not support logging in to the SMTP servers with Secured Password Authorization SPA NOTE B The Axxon Smart E mail service supports only the following SMTP server authorization algorithms LOGIN CRAM MDS5 PLAIN To set up the E mail service use the E mail object settings panel To add the controls for sending an E mail do the following Figure 10 1 3 1 265 1 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel fo System security service E Schedule eve vent Frame Message text Camera 1 Alarm ES QO all cameras Any event Connection LAN gt SMTP server mskitygroup ru E mail to olgakiseleva ity n User olga kiseleva E mail fram infotsdity ry Password ooee Figure 10 1 3 1 Enable disable the E mail sending control To send an E mail message upon registering an event check the checkbox in the left column in the corresponding row To disable sending the E mails uncheck the checkbox NOTE If any value is selected in the Device or Event columns this checkbox is checked automatically 2 Select on which device an event should occur to trigger sending of the e mail message Select a device in the Device column A particular camer
154. correction rotation cropping zooming restoring 2 The Layout button allows adding and selecting the layout of the displayed video images from the cameras in the Scene window Clicking this button opens the menu The Layout menu allows e selecting a previously added layout e adding an existing layout using the Add item e removing the selected layouts if at least one layout is added using the Remove item 3 The Cameras button allows selecting the cameras to be displayed in the Scene window Clicking this button opens the list of the cameras available in the system The name of the Scene window 5 Current date time box The Interface Modes button allows adding and selecting the layout of the toolbar elements in the Scene window Clicking this button opens the Interface Modes menu The menu allows e selecting previously added toolbar layouts e adding an existing toolbar layout using the Add item e removing the selected toolbar layouts if at least one layout added using the Remove item 7 The Interface Setup button opens the Interface Setup panel allowing to change the window settings The Scene window setup is similar to the setup of the video surveillance monitor window 8 The Hide button allowing to hide the Scene window from the screen NOTE The Scene window can be hidden using the Interface Menu button as well 9 The Close button for closing the Axxon Smart system 10 Video surveillance panel This panel displays
155. crophone will be recorded simultaneously with the video recording for this camera To play these recordings use the video archive Figure 8 3 3 1 245 Monitor 1 H O LIX 0 3fps 11388 320x240 1 500 GAA SACK CHRA a O SGGataas wae Figure 8 3 3 1 8 3 4 The microphone indicator If the microphones and cameras are set up for synchronous recording a microphone icon is displayed in the top right corner of the surveillance monitor window The icon is a yellow speaker red at the time of playback Figure 8 3 4 1 If the indicator is displayed the system is ready to synchronously record audio and video To play the audio signal click the indicator NOTE The system can be set up not to display the microphone indicator at the time of the synchronous audio and video recording 246 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 O aK JIDE a aca e a 7 7fps 48152 800x600 amp ABACK KC CAA _ c b O Att G AAG GA a 4 TE SCS Ay gt E Berie 2 SN O RR Figure 8 3 4 1 8 3 5 Real time audio playback To listen to incoming audio click the microphone icon The indicator will turn red which means that the signal from the microphone is fed to the corresponding sound card input To stop listening to audio click the icon once more The icon will turn yellow 8 4 Possible audio setup problems and solutions The following problems may occur during audio subsystem setup 1 Axxon Smart can r
156. ctricity on your hands which can damage the card or entire computer To prevent damage use special anti static protection measures for example an anti static wrist strap Put the computer case cover on 5 Connect the interface cable with numbered BNC sockets to the video capture card Figure 5 4 1 3 6 Connect the cameras to the interface cable Figure 5 4 1 4 7 Plug the power cable into the mains outlet and turn the computer on 72 Figure 5 4 1 4 5 4 1 1 1 Drivers installation Windows will recognize new hardware upon startup i Found New Hardware x ITY F55 6 Figure 5 4 1 5 The New Hardware Wizard window will open Figure 5 4 1 5 If Axxon Smart needs to be installed to the given PC click Cancel In this case the driver of the video input card will be installed along with Axxon Smart If Axxon Smart is already installed and you need to either install a new card or re install a driver do the following Select the No Not This Time radio button when asked if you want to connect to the Windows Update site Click the Next button Figure 5 4 1 6 73 Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for current and updated software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with pour permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this t
157. d by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 When Show is checked the face is outlined in the surveillance window The Color drop down list Specifies the color of the outlining 5 The Size slider This parameter specifies the minimum size of a human face relative to the frame size The detector triggers an alarm if it detects a face bigger than the specified size The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms 195 wont Relay 11 Relay 12 ew Relay 13 Bae Grabber 3 ee Camera 4 ope Camera 5 iS Camera 6 E m Grabber 4 wa Camera 7 o hep Camera 8 Grabber 5 ea Camera 9 ow poy Camera 10 Bit Grabber 6 Video Advanced Compression Detector Tiles Detection zone Direction Sensitivity Contrast Filtration Detector type Detection frequency Face Frame scale Figure 5 11 9 1 5 11 9 2 Detector in operation Face detector recognizes every human face within the observed scene A recognized face is outlined Figure 5 11 9 2 196 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 H o a 24fps 11778 320x240 C2 CRORCECECEOECEDE CECER MORASS SOCK KCRS k a A The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are available Figure 5 11 10 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is
158. deo recording while viewing the archive footage Though the incoming signal is not displayed it is processed by the system and all the required alarm triggered actions are performed automatically NOTE The archive depth storage time is limited by the HDD capacity of video server When the free space on the disk runs out the earliest recordings are erased to record the new video loop recording or FIFO If several logical disks are used the system records the archive to the disks one by one Having reached the end of the last disk the recording cycle restarts from the first one Therefore the video archive consists of as many sequential parts as many logical volumes are used for video storage Field 1 on the figure shows the 1st hour prior to the timeline starting point If the timeline is detailed to minutes you can only tell the current hour 172 5 10 2 Archive footage playback The playback control panel is used to play back archives The playback control panel includes the standard set of functions Start Pause Stop and Fragment Forward and Fragment Back buttons Figure 5 10 2 1 EB oxxon Smart _ Monitor 1 a OO a mu 2 Iii O 1fps 7809 320x240 14 10 00 14 10 26 14 10 52 14 11 19 14 11 45 14 12 12 14 16 54 14 17 20 O wadna CHEER ORO BOC ee CHS 30 01 09 14 17 20 Figure 5 10 2 1 To play back a fragment click its time stamp in the list then click the Start button on the control p
159. dereader exe utility might not be able to read the codes for the following reasons No video capture card installed in the computer Defective video capture card Video capture card driver not installed The driver does not match the card The driver operates incorrectly oF gee S Check if the video capture card is installed in the computer and re install the drivers for all ADCs on the card If the utility still cannot read the codes contact your dealer to test if the card is in good order 365 u Code Reader Eg County code Figure 15 2 1 1 u3 Code Reader Country code Figure 15 2 1 2 u Code Reader Count code Figure 15 2 1 3 15 2 2 Windows 2000 cannot recognize new hardware The IRQs of different PCI cards may be in conflict Try the following 1 Do not insert the video capture card next to the AGP slot or the network card 2 Donot choose the IRQ used by the network card 3 Insert the video capture card into another slot or exchange places with another card 366 15 2 3 Corrupted video image The cameras might support different video formats PAL and NTSC All cameras connected to the same video capture card should support the same format PAL or NTSC for Axxon Smart to work properly Besides the actual signal format may differ from the format specified in the Axxon Smart settings For example NTSC may be specified in the settings for actual PAL video signal 15 2 4 Two came
160. determining the object location on the screen The window location is set by two coordinates of the upper left corner and by window width and height Enter the coordinates into the X and Y fields Enter the object dimensions into the W and H fields All coordinates are set as a percentage of the size of the screen If the Enable Moving checkbox is checked the user can move the window over the screen 4 Ifthe multi monitor video server is used the Monitor and Scene objects can be distributed over different screens In the Monitor list select the physical monitor to display the Scene window on The monitors in the list are represented by the numbers of their connections to the multi monitor video card of the video server The number list depends on the number of connected monitors NOTE The monitor numbers have no relation to the Monitor objects in the object tree and the corresponding Monitor surveillance windows Here the Monitor list contains the hardware devices physical monitors connected to the video card outputs of the video server 5 Enable disable the control panel The Scene control panel includes the scene name and the following buttons Interface Modes Interface Setup Hide Close By default the Scene control panel is enabled To disable it uncheck the Control Panel checkbox 6 Change the background color of the Scene window The Scene window background color can be changed to make working with the window more comfortable
161. diai covecsaseeusetes edaeniunsans 232 8 1 1 The file structure used for storing audio FIICS cc ceecceeccsecceeccecceecceecceceeecasceeeeceueceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeees 232 8 2 AUDIO OBJECT SETUP aicscestensesteccgicsacoaecensuneaviacvaneevstouayaes aeaueeasundeus snag oaan sax pansies beau ses puan suas oven sean sean seen ices 233 S 2ck AUClOsetuip TOF IP deVi Ces ain cou cess Aenea E tiara etiian a a a a a na a 234 8 2 2 Audio subsystem setup in case of using the FS 6c and FS 16 exp video capture Cards cceeceeeeeee 235 8 2 3 Audio subsystem setup in case of using the FS 5B video Capture Cards cceccseccseceecencesceeeceeceseeeess 236 8 2 4 Audio subsystem setup in case of using the FS 8 video Capture Cars ccccsecceecceeceeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 237 8 2 5 Audio subsystem setup in case of using standard soundblaster Cards ccceecseccseeeeceecesceeeceneeseeeess 238 S22 6 Microphone Obet SO LUD sti siart senucscacwaionseccnmiwebcwsueuae eoaueenoaeauovecsuncenicnprean asec aalaarcnaa nn anlaraeiaeneee 240 S2 7 IWiIChOPNONEG object setupen a A A saae cine A hewn ears 241 8 3 USING THE AUDIO SUBSYSTEM vo iisccicnsisicsswassecensnaveseoesevevsveasvasesneeseceesessiiensetevseeieveosionatacsaneasevconteterneees 243 8 3 1 Synchronous video and audio recording ON alarm sccceeccsecceecceeceuccseceeceaucceuceeucceceeecseeeeeeseeeaeeees 243 8 3 2 Synchronous video and audio recording ON operator CONTFO
162. dialog box If a name folder was entered in the folder field erase it to enable drive selection 341 2 Archive s converter 10O x Folders disks processing Password A sag Local Disk C OO DWD RW Drive D g a Ds oO lt P public on Moscow Office Server Msky 2 Figure 13 7 1 1 13 7 2 Recordings playback To play video and audio recordings do the following 1 Select an archive 2 Select a recording in the archive 3 Click the Play button in the playback control panel To play all recordings in the archive continuously click the Play button and hold it for two seconds Keep clicking the Forward button to increase the playback speed by a factor of two four or six during playback Keep clicking the Back button to decrease playback speed Click the Forward or Back buttons in Pause mode to move to the next or previous frame Figure 13 7 2 1 342 er 2 n gt Archive s converter Figure 13 7 2 1 In the Stop mode the Forward and Back buttons move to the next and previous recordings respectively 13 7 3 Searching the archive There are two methods of searching the archive for a recording Figure 13 7 3 1 343 7 gt Archive s converter HE EN ET eSB alln al alela Figure 13 7 3 1 Using the playback scale Move the scale while the first frames of the corresponding recordings and their creation dates are displayed Using the Find Fragment button Enter the approxi
163. ding frame rate must not exceed the frame rate of the video signals processed through the ADC grabber of a given camera Where the Hot Recording frame rate exceeds this threshold value the actual frame rate of the recorded video signals will match the one of the video processed through the ADC grabber 7 The frame rate of the recorded signals is set up in the Recording Rate in frames per second fps Figure 5 5 1 5 This setting allows to decrease the archive size by decreasing the rate of the saved video compared to the video flow received from the video capture card To disable the video feed check the Disable checkbox 108 Board Name os 5 Record alarms f Disable 8 A Color max i a 5 Real time min processing recording Figure 5 5 1 5 5 5 2 More TAB a mE Grabber 1 Fost alarm record Hot record time GA YUV4 2 0 O YUvee2 The settings panel of the Camera object shows the More tab only when you are setting up an IP device Figure 5 5 2 1 109 5 5 3 H a Grabber 2 Grabber 3 pa Camera 5 i p Camera 6 3 Grabber 4 Jea Grabber 5 po Camera 9 ope Camera 10 EET Grabber 6 pea Camera 11 n p Camera 12 3a Grabber 7 ipa Camera 13 ion ph Camera 14 ii Grabber ope Camera 15 Video Advanced Pcompression Detector Titles Model Avis 207 1 Firmware version Unknown Fa m an Brightness Contrast ee MJPEG z max z Signal wpe PAL Aate ENTETRT
164. displayed representing the card ADC which processes the audio signal from the selected microphone 2 Inthe Channel field specify the number of the channel according to the RCA F socket number of the FS WS interface cable 3 Inthe Camera drop down list select the camera number for audio and video synchronous recording 4 Check the Show checkbox to display the microphone icon in the video surveillance monitor window of the selected camera The icon allows controlling audio playback 5 Uncheck the Show checkbox or check the Disable checkbox to hide the microphone icon in the monitor window 6 Adjust audio volume using the Volume slider This control is used to adjust the output audio signal to a convenient level in case the source signal is too low or too high The volume indicator next to the slider allows monitoring the actual signal amplification The indicator operates if the microphone receives sound of sufficient volume 7 Use the volume indicator to monitor the microphone operability and the correctness of the volume settings If the microphone works properly and the volume is set correctly and an audio signal is applied to the microphone above the microphone sensitivity the indicator will display a number of blue markers corresponding to the signal level After the microphone operability check up the Axxon Smart software should be restarted Otherwise the microphone will not record the audio signal 243 8 3 USING THE AUDI
165. e The Motion WaveLet algorithm processes the changes occurring in the next frame compared to the base frame This results in a frame size which is 5 10 times smaller than the JPEG frame of the same quality depending on the background moving objects and other factors Adjustment to the channel bandwidth If frames are being skipped in the video flow due to the channel s low bandwidth the video sequence can still be restored since the next frame in Motion WaveLet algorithm does not depend solely on the previous frame but on the base frame Constant quality The MPEG algorithm is not sufficient for security television since it maintains the constant value of data flow of the video being compressed This means that the quality of the video decreases when many changes occur between the frames Motion WaveLet maintains constant quality If movement occurs in the frame the video flow increases to maintain the same image quality No blocking effect The algorithms using discrete cosine conversion such as JPEG or MPEG divide an image into blocks of 8 by 8 pixels Each block is converted into the frequency form larger details being represented by lower frequencies and smaller details by higher frequencies High frequencies are deleted during the compression The larger the deleted frequency band the more small details are omitted in the image Large compression ratio results in a blocking effect i e solid color squares appear in the im
166. e objects across different PCs screens Select from the Monitor list where to display the Monitor object Figure 5 7 3 1 You must select the ID of a physical monitor screen according to its connector number on the video card of the respective video server The list of the monitor numbers depends on the number of connected physical monitors screens 122 gi Grabber 6 a Grabber 7 Grabber amp 2 Grabber 9 2 Grabber 10 2 Grabber 11 4H Grabber 12 Ja Grabber 13 ee Audio 1 gee Audio 2 oo Audio 3 iE Audio 4 Panno evened Gener Monitor ie C Overlay Type Overlay Type Il Allow Control panel Allow moving Nme NNN Don t show disabled cameras Ratio 4 3 Figure 5 7 3 1 NOTE The IDs of the physical monitors screens in the Monitor list DO NOT relate to the Monitor objects in the Axxon Smart object tree The Monitor list displays hardware the monitors screens connected to video cards on the video server With these screens you control the software installed on the respective PCs When setting up the Monitor objects position on the screen you should bear in mind the following point The X axis is plotted against the cross point of 100 on the screen 2 200 on the screen 3 300 on the screen 4 E g set the following coordinates X and Y to place the Monitor object across the full screen 3 X 200 Y 0 W 100 Figure 5 7 3 2 123 Figure 5 7
167. e 5 4 1 33 Pre alarm record Post alarm record Hot record time Hot rec rate Recording rate Color YUV4 2 0 O YUV4 2 2 Oo ms 0 Hs 0 s 0 EH fps 0 fps 5 4 2 Configuring the AXXON SMART video subsystem for the IP servers 5 4 2 1 IP servers installation and setup The following software is used to set up the P servers Figure 5 4 2 1 1 The utilities and other software included in the installation kit allowing to search for IP servers connected to the local area network and to assign IP addresses to them If the IP address is not specified for a device the device home page on the built in Web server is not accessible 2 The home page of an P server connected to the network you can find in the built in Web server module It allows to set up an P server It enables you to view the video image received from IP servers in a standard Web browser Figure 5 4 2 1 5 4 2 1 1 SEARCHING FOR AND SETTING UP IP UTILITIES The specific utilities for network devices setup are usually included in their installation kit These utilities can be used to search for devices of the same type connected to the network 92 For example the IPUtility exe is used to set up the IP server Axis 241Q This utility is located in the program folder of the Axis IP servers software To find the Axis devices connected to the local network click the Refresh button in the IPUtility exe window The list of all Axis IP devices availab
168. e cameras selected in the table under the drop down Video Out list to an analog video output These are displayed in slide show with pages changing as fast as you set up the Dwell Time in seconds 133 of Audio 2 ffl Audio 3 i Audio 4 Audio 5 E Audio B a g Monitor 2 Monitor 3 Show on alarm oom To analog output Software OOO O y Hardware Mone O OOOO O O Achyve camera Sequence sec an Alarm camera Selected cameras Ei Enable deinterlacing by default Figure 5 7 13 1 5 8 Video monitor windows Video surveillance monitors are displayed in Axxon Smart window Figure 5 7 13 1 Video monitor and surveillance windows provide access to surveillance modes control functional command menus video archive image processing tools and frame sequence export 134 joxxon Smart Monitor 1 o aw aia O Wid o 5 4fps 13010 320x240 1 nE i 7 Vt Ge 3 ra lt lt lt ti a Ch CEO CEE OE CEO e 16 0822 P Figure 5 7 13 1 5 8 1 Displaying the control panel tools on the video surveilance monitor oxxon Smart Pa l A UTE F as fonitor TY a Cm GAMS Figure 5 8 1 1 Setup of the control panel display on the video monitor is illustrated in Figure 5 8 2 1 and Figure 5 8 3 1 135 The buttons for selecting the number of the surveillance windows displayed on the screen ata time 1 4 6 9 16 all cameras The Layout button Screen button in the standard
169. e created in Axxon Smart 4 2 CREATING A SCHEDULE Schedules are used for automatic execution of a specified action by a specified object when a specified date and time are reached To create modify or delete schedules use the Schedule object in the object tree of the Settings panel To add commands to a schedule do the following Figure 3 3 7 1 1 Enable execution of an action To enable execution of an action check the checkbox in the left column of its row in the settings table To disable an action uncheck the checkbox Specify the action execution date To specify the date enter the values in the Month Day and Day of the Week columns An action can be set up for any month any day or any day of the week Enter specific values in the columns If an action should execute each month each day or each day of the week enter Any in the corresponding columns NOTE 1 To set up an action to be executed every day at a specified time enter Any in the Month Day and Day of the Week fields NOTE 2 Specific Day and Day of the Week values cannot be set simultaneously because these parameters are interdependent If one of them is specified the other is automatically set to Any 3 Specify the action execution time To specify the execution time enter the value in the Time column Use the following format HH MM SS where HH hours MM minutes SS seconds By default the parameter is set to 00 00 00 which means t
170. e object s upper speed threshold at which the detector must trigger With the minimum value of this setting the detector is triggered by an object moving at any speed This setting allows eliminating detector triggering on the noise snow rain etc NOTE To setup a motion detector properly assign minimum initial values to the Sensitivity Contrast and Filtration parameters The Sensitivity is selected so that the detector does not trigger on the static image 187 L Computer 5 Grabber 1 3 ome Relay 6 Relay 7 ideo V Compression Detector Titles Detection zone Direction _ r Settings No 4 i Sensitivity Name Aami Alarmed Contrast 1 Filtration Petteeeeeeeeeeel lt 1 J ee Detector type Activity J Figure 5 11 3 1 8 The Size slider This setting value corresponds to the part of the total frame square occupied by the smallest detected object The detector zone triggers an alarm if it detects the movement of an object bigger than the specified size The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms 9 The Detection Frequency slider This setting relates to how often a detector retrieves signals from a video image It should be set to the lowest level sufficient for correct recognition of a moving object Max stands for 8 frames per second
171. e object tracker recognizes moving objects determines the direction of the movement and tracks the route of the objects in the field of view When a moving object is detected it is dynamically outlined with a border its direction is indicated by an arrow and its trajectory curve is drawn Figure 5 11 11 2 The motion is detected by calculating gradients between consequent frames 200 NOTE If set up accordingly an object tracker may not follow up on object motion in certain directions EB axon Smart Monitor 1 a oO a min a Ii gt 9 0fps 28999 800x600 _ c gt Oi AAAaGAAAaS AAC LC GAL Figure 5 11 11 2 5 11 12 Classical detector 5 11 12 1 Setup The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are available amp BAaOCKL LAS 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video check Alarmed recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 window When Show is checked a moving object is outlined in the surveillance window The Color drop down list It specifies the
172. e with a mouse Clicking the timeline section marked blue highlights the timestamp of the recording that started in the corresponding time interval 5 10 4 Date and time indication during recording playback In the archive playback mode the panel in the lower right corner of the surveillance window displays the date and time of the recording that is currently being displayed Figure 5 10 4 1 This information is given to facilitate archive navigation The current system date and time are displayed in the info panel on the right side of the video monitor toolbar The same window can be set to display current frame rate during playback 174 E3 oxxon Smart ame B Monitor 1 o OX 30 01 09 14 55 50 gt 14 40 18 14 40 40 14 41 02 Qa Kase Kass CKO eK Cae 30 01 09 wet meet Figure 5 10 4 1 5 10 5 Searching recordings in the archive by time stamp The time date panel can also be used for entering the date and time to search for Enter the date and time of a frame to find it in the archive To enter a value into the date field double click it Select the date in the calendar window that will open Figure 5 10 5 1 The days covered by video recordings are highlighted in bold in the calendar To enter a value into the time field do the following 1 Double click the time line of the panel The first digit becomes highlighted in green indicating that it is available for editing 2 Enter the desired time 3 En
173. eceeceeceeceeceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeneenees 210 62 3 VIDEO IMAGE PROCESSING irtiri a E teeta olan ckiagus a etgar nection teens srdaaveameneiienneuraeias trader ciaianins 211 6 2 3 1 NAVIGATION MO DE srra A wha ctcearecer cit atae ete os ate pas wave olan dN att beaten E AAE 211 6 2 3 2 IMAGEMOVING MOD iis snavastes ceatettes acouten a a a orchetanseca snes mba enemaeion pecans 212 6 2 3 3 IMAGE PERSPECTIVE CORRECTION MODE ii cc ncitacoieieasanetshivcseiwaaniasvakensaesehenteesubarentsaianiadeakanueesss 212 0234 IMAGE ROTATION MODE aiaci ccs osc A EA E E E a 213 6 2 3 5 IMAGE CROPPING MODE eira a R AT a a a a a 214 6 27356 SCALING THE IMAG Eese a AE a A T E eseorona sy aiundee sakuuenvansemiana sea aasel 214 6 2 3 7 RESTORING IMAGE PARAMETERS CHANGING THE PROPORTIONG scceeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeecs 215 62 4 USING TRE VIDEQARCHIVE Sarra A A a A a a r ean aed aoetlcmmeedss 216 6 2 4 1 ENABLING THE ARCHIVE VIDEO RECORDING PLAYBACK MODE ccccscsscseceeceeceeeeeeeeeseeeenees 216 62742 ARCHIVE RECORDING PLAYBACK ncriraienriinareeaun aaa a a a a S 217 6243 MWIDEO ARCHIVE NAVIGATION aisin E mead pinaneacyianseeaeeee 218 6 2 4 4 DATE AND TIME OF THE DISPLAYED RECORDINGS oiriin corna rann EEEE AE AEN E 219 6 2 4 5 SEARCHING THE RECORDINGS IN THE ARCHIVE BY TIMESTAMP ccccescccsseeeseecesceeseeeesceeeeees 219 7 TELEMEEFRY SUBSYSTEM icicscdisccicucedscadicadedsdedivccadedevivachsudiducudedsvedindecdiniicdddddedececcetic
174. eckbox When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 The Sensitivity slider This parameter specifies the minimum detected loss of sharpness calculated as the difference between the average number of contours and the number of contours in the received frame 189 sone Relay 11 one Relay 12 one Relay 13 S Grabber 3 pe Camera 4 ideo Advanced Compression Detector Detection zone Direction Bes min Pevceeeereeereetl MAR 2 3 Sensitivity l Name ECZ m Poeteeeeeteneggl Contrast 1 Ne lin m berarar Filtration Show Detector type Color E m Activity Frame scale Detection frequency Figure 5 11 4 1 5 11 4 2 Detector in operation The focus detector notifies an operator about camera tampering resulting in focus loss or camera sensitivity degrading The high frequency component of the video signal is analyzed to check for presence of distinct contours 5 11 5 Video signal stability detector 5 11 5 1 Setup The detector is set up using its settings panel The following detector settings are 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed 190 Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector z
175. ecognize no sound cards in the computer 2 Sound setup problems in Windows To solve the first problem check if any sound cards are installed in the computer at all Then check if the drivers are installed correctly If the drivers are installed correctly use the Boards exe utility located in the Modules subfolder of the Axxon Smart program folder If the Board drop down list displays the installed sound cards contact technical support If the list is empty repeat Windows sound card installation and the check up procedure See the sound card documentation for help 8 4 1 The Audio Wizard utility In case of sound setup in Windows use the Audio Wizard utility Figure 8 4 1 1 247 Ad Audio Wizard l x Welcome to Audio Wizard It helps you to tune the audio subsystem Figure 8 4 1 1 9 THE RAY RELAY SUBSYSTEM 9 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The Axxon Smart system operates using the ray and relay devices A ray is a dry contact sensing device which can be in one of two states Closed or Open Any ray can be such a device For example a touch contact ray smoke ray glass breakage ray button etc A ray changes its state closes or opens when an alarm event occurs In Axxon Smart the ray functionality is implemented on the video server The 4 4 or 16 4 ray relay cards installed in the video capture cards are used to connect rays to the system A relay is an executive device which commutates the electric circuits A r
176. ecord Mame Resolution Full ii Fost alarm record Hot record time Record alarms Hot rec rate Disable Recording rate Brightness Contrast mas Real time processing recording Figure 5 5 1 2 To return to the Standard video surveillance window right click and open the context menu click on the True Size again 3 Priority video processing setup By default the ADC resources are equally shared among all cameras connected to that ADC Priority video processing allows to increase the frame rate for one camera at the expense of other cameras rates Priority resource sharing is much less efficient than automatic sharing Thus it should be used if automatic sharing is impossible or does not give the required result Priority video processing is set up by assigning additional ADC resources to one camera These resources are taken from other cameras To allocate additional resources to a camera assign it higher priority in the video signal processing list Two priority values are available 1 2 and 1 3 If the camera has 1 2 priority its signal is processed every second frame in the ADC sequence Thus the frame rate for this camera will be half of the total frame rate of the ADC If the camera has 1 3 priority its signal is processed every third frame in the ADC sequence Thus the frame rate for this camera will be one third of the total frame rate of the ADC 104 Example 1 The ADC is set to digitize v
177. ed to Axxon Smart If a module is working and available in Windows its state is marked as Started If a module is not available in Windows its state is marked as Not Started Its cell in the list is highlighted in red color for better visibility NOTE The state of the Not Started module is highlighted in red 3 The Response Time column determines the time interval during which the System Security Service waits for the response from the module If the module does not respond in a specified time interval the service restarts the module The response time can be set individually for each module By default the response time is set to 60 seconds To change the response time double click the corresponding cell enter the desired value and press Enter on the keyboard 269 4 The Number of Restarts column determines how many times the module can be restarted in the time interval specified in the At Time column The values in the At Time column are specified in the units selected in the Period Type drop down list Available units are hours or days By default The Number of Restarts and At Time columns are populated with 1 The Period Type column is set to hours by default 5 The Restart column determines the action to be performed by the service when the module is in the Not Started state The value can be selected from the drop down list Available values are None do nothing Module restart this module only Kernel restart Axxon Sma
178. ed to highlight the symbol sequence word or the line To copy the words and lines list use the Copy and Paste buttons The Copy button copies the Highlight Words list to the clipboard The Paste button pastes the list to the Titles settings panel The repeated copying overwrites the clipboard contents the clipboard is cleared on Axxon Smart shutdown To remove all lines in the Highlight Words list click the Clear button To set the location of the titles in the surveillance window enter the coordinates of the top left corner of the titles area in the X and Y fields and the width and height of the titles area in the W and H fields Titles area coordinates and dimensions are set as a percentage of the window size maximum value 100 Set the titles font in the Font field To change the font parameters use the standard font settings dialog box which opens by clicking the lt button next to the Font field Select the titles color in the Color drop down list To enable the titles display in the surveillance window check the Show Title checkbox By default the titles display is enabled 316 12 3 4 Text Search object setup The Text Search object relates to the POS object and is used for searching the receipts in the database by their contents To set up the Text Search object do the following Figure 12 3 4 1 1 To define the location of the POS window in the screen enter the top left corner coordinates in the X and Y fields
179. eipt i Camera q1 Terminal FIT ECEIpt E Pe ou 7 Words to recording s beginning Connection settings Record modes separator Type Pott Continuous record RS232 cOkIi l l Words for recording s ending separator Match case Speed Parity _ DTR Repeats processing Disable Clear screen if there is no data received within oO ZEC Default Figure 12 3 1 9 12 3 1 6 Receipt start and end markers setup The start and end markers are used to extract the receipt contents from the information received from POS terminals These markers allow to extract the POS operation s information from the data flow coming from the POS terminal to display and save this information in the database and to display it as titles in the video surveillance monitor for each POS operation individually NOTE A The start marker must be specified to enable automatic saving of the receipt data to the database NOTE B To set the markers correctly examine the text contents of the receipt in normal operating mode of the POS terminal prior to POS subsystem setup Specify the start and end markers and detection parameters in the Receipt Processing section Figure 12 3 1 10 Do the following 1 In the Words to Begin Record field enter the text marker of the beginning of the receipt which determines the symbol sequence in the incoming text data to activate receipt processing 2 In the Words to End Record
180. elay can be in one of two states Closed or Open A relay changes its state upon receiving a controlling command from the control system In Axxon Smart the relay functionality is implemented on the video server The 4 4 or 16 4 ray relay cards installed in the video capture cards are used to connect relays to the system 9 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE 4 4 RAY RELAY CARDS The 4 4 ray relay cards Figure 8 4 1 1 are multi channel cards for receiving and digitizing signals from the rays used together with the FS 5B FS 6C FS 8 or FS 16 EXP video capture cards The 4 4 ray relay cards allow simultaneous processing of the signals from up to 4 rays analog digital conversion and transmission of up to 4 control signals to the relays 248 The ray relay cards are optionally installed on the FS 5B FS 6C FS 16 EXP or FS 8 video capture cards NOTE The ray relay cards cannot be installed on the WS 7 and WS 17 boards thus the ray relay functionality cannot be implemented on video servers equipped with the WS 7 or WS 17 boards The cards have a power supply 24V and earth contacts 7 deaye d rshays ddi L fim fide k i ae I n tee FEeeveeeete des aes vat cosmo cosmo cosmo cosmo SS4NT 354NT S54NT 354NT E36 E36 E36 E36 Tr a 2 2 5 1 pE Figure 8 4 1 1 4 rays 4 relays 9 2 1 Ray relay cards installation on FS cards The socket marked TO GRABBER in Picture 12 2 2 is used for installing the 4 4 ray relay
181. em rights are set up to forbid the user from closing the interface windows the Hide All item is disabled 3 3 THE AXXON SMART SETTINGS PANEL 3 3 1 General information To manage the Axxon Smart system use the Settings panel The Axxon Smart Settings panel is designed to configure the components of the video surveillance system based on the Axxon Smart software The Settings panel allows d S fe configuring the hardware and software modules setting up the user interface creating users administration of the user rights and privileges assigning passwords for accessing the system resources by users IP devices creation wizard Opening and closing the Settings panel To open the Settings panel click the Run button in the Main control panel Figure 3 3 2 1 o ees lv About program D System settings IP Devices Wizard Shutdown Figure 3 3 2 1 And select System Settings in the drop down menu Figure 3 3 2 2 44 e A Computer Bal Grabber 1 pa Camera 1 po Camera 2 By Ray ee Rena oi Ray 3 By Ray 4 TS Ray 5 Dy Ray 6 SY Ray oD Ray 8 Settings Storage drives Voice notification Ee ee ee ee eee ea O tum oft sound Le cs Sound from cameras Protect archive with password Figure 3 3 2 2 To close the Settings panel click the Close button in the bottom right corner of the panel 3 3 3 IP devices creation wizard IP devices creation Wizard function is used for se
182. ent should trigger macro execution It can be a specific camera detection zone ray or All Cameras All Rays All Zones value In the latter case the macro will execute upon event registration on any object of the specified type 53 In the Event drop down list select which event should trigger macro execution Different sets of events are available for different object types In the Device drop down list select the object to receive the action upon registration of the specified event It can be a specific camera detection zone ray relay or Application or All Cameras All Rays All Zones All Relays value In the latter case the action will apply to all objects of the specified type The Application value indicates that a specific application should be launched upon registering the specified event If the Application option is selected the full path and file name of the application should be specified in the Action column J In the Action drop down list select an action to be applied to the specified object Different sets of actions are available for different object types In the Delay column set the delay time in seconds between the event registration and macro execution By default if no value is set in the Delay column the delay is O that is the action executes immediately Macros are executed in pairs where the first command starts the process and the second command completes it NOTE A sequence of macros cannot b
183. eo Selecine Cameras 1 OMOISDIA VINE consan E a geen needs R a a a einsxtales 138 58 6 SITIOS SNOW OF TNE Cala MONTO S eaa A E A T A T cia taeanay ss 139 5 8 7 Active surveillance window camera esssssssssssseseserssrserrersrrsrrsresesrrrsrssrsrrsrrsersersreserserstsrsrrsreserserseese 140 Deco Scaling EME sorveilance WINGOWS seiceanna a oa an a Ta a dinssadales 141 5 8 9 image scan In the WINDOW eoar T E T T A a ed gede sahanheymasedents 142 5 8 10 Functional menu of video surveillance WINGOW s sssssessessessessessrsessessrssrsersersrrseeseesessesseseesersersee 143 5 8 11 Selecting a camera from the functional menu of video surveillance WINGOW cccceeceeceeeeeeeeees 143 5 8 12 Camera COR Ol ICONS cs ote EE aaa eaten ch eects Sar sac Oe aeons ee E N AEA 144 5 8 13 The menu of the camera control ICONS ccccsecceseceeccecceceecceccecceeeeeeeaseceuceeueseeesseeseeeseeeseeeeees 145 5 9 USING THE MONITOR WINDOW sod tect ccedccciecacezccecessccseicseredccnivedvedeuseaevsossasoseicevseccseaussaeseiasesesaqusoenscorseees 146 3 9 1 lt CamMeraarininme an G2GtSar ile s gerrira a E A N 146 5 9 1 1 Camera ar E eanan a R R E a O A 147 Sie Camer CISA MINE sarar E 148 SLL IMASKING canna a a EEA AE EEE EE 148 T2 NIGEOFECONOING oria A A 150 5 9 2 1 Recording initiated by operator command ssessessessessessessrsessessessrsresersrrserseesersessessrserserseese 150 59 2 2 Stopping the FECONGING ariin a a AE A A 151 5
184. eo capture card use the settings panel of the Grabber object With the FS 6C video capture cards you will have 4 Grabber objects corresponding to a single card To set up the Grabber object do the following Figure 5 4 1 18 1 4 NOTE Select the video digitizing device local or network Specify the Type for video cards Local Select the type of video capture card Specify the name FS 6 Select the PCl channel number of the video capture card AD converter By default Axxon Smart assigns numbers to the channels of the analog digital converter automatically Select the format for video input signals The Signal is set up as PAL or NTSC PAL or NTSC cameras are required for different ADCs on the same FS 6C FS 16 EXP card For the same ADC Grabber you need cameras of the same type only a Select the Rate frames per second in the digitized video Specify the rate relative to maximum and minimum limits The maximum value corresponds to the 100 digitizing speed all resources in use the mean value matches the 50 speed and the minimum value 25 Activate Watchdog activates the computer auto reboot in situations where the video subsystem doesn t respond 80 O Computer h m Grabber 1 Grabber 2 poy Camera 1 pai Camera 3 pj Camera 4 Ray 9 Ray 10 i Ray 11 Ray 12 i Ray 13 oa Relay 10 g Relay 11 oa Relay 12 home Relay 13 Sf Grabber 3 ope Camera 5 PCI cha
185. eo image to be moved 3 Click and hold the mouse while dragging the cursor to the desired location 4 Release the mouse button TOAD ANA RZ aad CoE In the perspective correction mode you can arbitrarily change the shape of the video image To enable the perspective correction mode click the Perspective Correction button in the toolbar When the mode is enabled the button turns blue 213 To correct the perspective of the video image point the cursor to one of the corners of the active image frame The cursor will take the shape of a hand with a stretched forefinger Click and hold the corner while dragging it to the desired location Figure 6 2 3 4 The adjacent sides of the image will stretch or contract accordingly Drag other corners to obtain the desired shape of the image frame 3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 AO Es TAO APAA RS Come Figure 6 2 3 4 6 2 3 4 IMAGE ROTATION MODE The video image can be rotated around the axis located in the center of the image perpendicular to the screen plane The image can be rotated to any angle To enable rotation mode click the Rotation button in the toolbar When the mode is enabled the button turns blue Figure 6 2 3 5 To rotate an image point the cursor anywhere inside the active image frame The cursor will take the shape of a circular arrow Click hold and drag the mouse to the desired angle The whole image will rotate to this angle retaining its shape 214
186. es Seerigtnumber ___ AXIS 192 168 0 122 00408C7C53F5 AXIS 213 00408C82BE S6 192 1 Set iP adores OOOO O 192 1 AXIS 207 004080 70C222E AXIS 215 PTZ 004080829110 192 1 Set the IP address of AXIS 241Q 00408C832BE6 AXIS 2410 0040808326 AXIS 207MW 00408C803 Serial Number 00408C832BE6 IP Address 192 168 O 121 Server Home Page Set IP Address Test IP Address Properties Set IP Close Workstation interface 1 10 0 1 35 Figure 5 4 2 5 3 Check the IP address assigned to the Axis IP server The IP address is checked with the use of the command line following the steps outlined in point 1 of the given section If the IP address is assigned correctly the ping the IP address assigned by an administrator e g 192 168 0 95 command will generate the response shown in Figure 5 4 2 6 After the IP address has been successfully assigned to the network device use the built in Web server to set up the device network parameters e Cr WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows KP Version 5 1 2600 LC Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings tatyana makarova gt ping 192 168 0 121 Pinging 1972 168 0 90 with 32 bytes of data Reply from Destination host unreachable Reply from Destination host unreachable Reply from Destination host unreachable Reply From Destination host unreachable Ping statistics for 192 168 0 90
187. ess and set the required operation mode settings The addresses in one line should be unique These settings are usually specified using the Dip Switches Figure 7 3 1 1 located on the PTZ device controller see the PTZ technical description 7 3 2 PTZ connection diagrams 7 3 2 1 Analog cameras of the same protocol Figure 7 3 2 1 shows the connection diagram for analog cameras using the same protocol Pelco analog cameras RS 485 line P ome anar 5 RS 485 gt RS 232 RS 232 line Intellect Videoserver Figure 7 3 2 1 RS 485 line 224 RS 485 gt RS 232 converter Axxon Smart videoserver NOTE The name of the camera has no relation to the integrated protocol 7 3 2 2 I P cameras Figure 7 3 2 2 shows the connection diagram for IP cameras E gt ee E Intellect videoserver Figure 7 3 2 2 IP camera Axxon Smart video server 7 4 PTZ object setup To set up a PTZ object use the object settings panel Do the following Figure 7 3 2 1 1 In the Protocol drop down list select the PTZ device type This parameter is used by the Axxon Smart software to select the data exchange protocol for the PTZ devices to connect Only PTZ devices of the same type can be connected to each COM port and registered in one PTZ object NOTE When connecting IP cameras select the IP Camera item in the list Other PTZ object settings are ignored in this case 2 Inthe Port drop down list select the num
188. etween the POS terminal and Axxon Smart select the model in the Terminal drop down list This setting determines how the receipt text is to be processed for example deletion of service symbols sequences and lines 305 NOTE A If the list does not contain the model of the POS terminal to be connected select Default in the list NOTE B If the POS terminal sends the text in DOS encoding select the DOS gt WIN item The information received from this terminal will be automatically converted from DOS encoding into Windows encoding 12 3 1 5 Recording Mode setup The POS subsystem provides video monitoring of the POS operations by automatic recording of the video image between the moments when the first and the last lines of the receipt are registered i e e the first and last line markers Several recording modes are available Use the Recording Mode section to select and set up the mode parameters The Recording Mode section contains the following options Figure 12 3 1 9 1 The recording mode selection drop down list a Inthe Continuous Recording mode the video is recorded continuously irrespective of the POS operations receipts registration The system links certain frames of the recording to when the receipt is registered b Inthe Recording on Receipt Start End mode video recording starts upon registration of the receipt starting marker and ends upon registration of the receipt ending marker if no ending marker
189. f PTZ 1 gt Line 1 H Line 2 S Line 3 S Line 4 S Line 5 S Line 6 S Line 7 S Line 8 S Line 9 S Line 10 Users d CEE le Se Sie Cit Administrate Default user Figure 10 4 5 1 11 2 1 Access rights The following values are available in the Rights column Figure 11 2 1 1 e Administrate e Control e Monitoring The users can be classified into the following groups Table 11 2 1 Table 11 2 1 Administrator Administration of all system objects Operator with control and monitoring rights Monitoring and controlling all system interface objects Operator with monitoring rights only Monitoring all interface objects 291 Monitor 3 g Monitor 4 PTZ a Line 1 Line 2 S Line 3 S Line 4 S Line 5 S Line 6 S Line 7 S Line 8 S Line 9 S Line 10 Users Name O Default user Figure 11 2 1 1 NOTE An administrator account is required to create an operator account 11 2 2 Creating a user account To create a user account add rows to the table in the Users tab Do the following Figure 11 2 2 1 1 Check the checkbox in the left column of the blank row in the table NOTE If you do not check the checkbox the created account will not be saved and the information will be deleted after closing the settings panel 2 Pn n e e In the Name column enter a name for the account for example the last and first name of the user In the Rights column select the desired user group acco
190. field enter the text marker of the receipt end which determines the symbol sequence in the incoming text data to stop receipt processing NOTE If the end marker is not set all data will be processed until the next start marker is received The markers can contain 307 1 Static text text lines symbol sequences or symbols identical for each receipt registered by the POS terminal The text in the Words to Begin Record and or Words to End Record fields must match the text in the receipt including the separators For example to recognize the beginning of the receipt upon registering the word Receipt enter Receipt in the Words to Begin Record field If the marker consists of a certain number of identical symbols use the backslash to denote the symbol and the number in braces to indicate the number of repetitions For example if the receipt ends with a enter 5 into the Words to End Record field 2 Dynamic text text lines symbol sequences or symbols received from the POS terminal matching a certain format mask number range and type of characters but different in contents for different receipts for example the date 27 11 2007 The dynamic text mask defines the number type and range of the characters in the mask The masks in the Words to Begin Record or Words to End Record fields consist of the following elements a the first and last symbols of the range delimited by a dash
191. folder E EL 4s z EL m Ph wn EL o E a F Cm i E mm E p i Other Places F wi Figure 5 6 3 2 5 6 3 3 Temp archive files Axxon Smart saves the video surveillance information to the hard drives thus building up a video archive Figure 5 6 3 3 The file system should be of NTFS type Never save video archives onto the system disk The video archive is stored in the VIDEO folder of the selected The VIDEO folder contains subfolders named in the following format DD MM YY HH that is date hour These subfolders contain the archives for a specified hour The file extensions indicate the camera number You can view and convert the files for the selected time period using the Axxon Smart software or the Converter exe utility 118 fm 15 01 09 16 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qa E pO search gt Folders EF File and Folder Tasks x co a Ph a Pa m a Ph rh a md Ph a Ph Di a Pa i Make a new Folder l _ _ 2 Publish this Folder to the Web E Share this Folder E E E E E Ep owe 4 02 42 a 02 a 6 02 6 2 Other Places A n a a A amp amp AM Details Ph co Pa oo co Ph oo co Pa wo am Pa wo co Pa co mm Ph EL EL E EL E EL EL co co lie Cc F J co lie jal co in jal cy lion co im m oT co line EL
192. for a given camera under non stop recording to the relevant disk you can go to the Archive Size panel in the Compression tab of the Camera object settings panel The rows in the Archive Size panel show the size of the archive under non stop recording during a day week and month 5 6 2 Saving video archive in a loop FIFO Axxon Smart saves recordings in a loop first in first out That is when the space on all disks runs out the earliest recordings are overwritten with new fragments Figure 5 6 2 1 During recordings in a loop to several disks free space on the disk is not equal to the value of the loop in the Tweaki exe utility 115 Figure 5 6 2 1 5 6 3 Video archive file structure 5 6 3 1 Indexes To enhance the archive search Axxon Smart indexes the archive files Index files DB idx db3 is stored in the INDEX folder Figure 5 6 3 1 116 ioixi File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q Back y gt i wi pe Search gt Folders HAL File and Folder Tasks x 15 01 09 16 CJ 15 01 09 17 2 Make a new Folder 2 Publish this Folder to the Web vm 15 01 09 16 ol 16 01 09 15 E Share this folder A 16 01 09 14 16 01 09 15 Other Places x See Local Disk C O My Documents me 16 01 09 16 ol 16 01 09 17 ig My Computer My Network Places om 16 01 09 18 ol 19 01 09 17 Details Ga 20 01 09 14 as 20 01 09 15 Ga 20 01 09 16 GI 20 01 09 17 CJ 20 01 09 16 Sy idx sqg 503 File 1 KE Figure 5 6 3
193. g Figure 5 9 4 7 Now the moving objects within the scene become outlined by the green line Figure 5 9 4 8 To switch off dynamic outlining choose the same menu item again highlighting of the option is removed 166 Montor 1 BO Obs 17tpe 8355 320x240 F axxon Smart saanee wg Figure 5 9 4 7 2B axon Smart Monitor 1 Boos ania mime ag o Figure 5 9 4 8 5 9 5 Export and print out 5 9 5 1 Frame export To export the currently displayed frame into file open the surveillance window menu and select Export then Save Frame Choose frame size percentage in relation to the original 100 30 or 10 Figure 5 9 5 1 By default the images will be saved in the EXPORT folder of the Axxon Smart program folder NOTE No message is displayed to indicate the beginning end of exporting 167 3 oxxon Smart _ Monitor 1 0 oK CEDE 2 mm gt gt 15fps 28553 640x480 GAA MACnKCAS a GF AAAAAAA Gigg Camera Show titles Processing ee r S 100 bmp Q Start recording 30 jpg Arm 1 10 po Figure 5 9 5 1 Image file name includes the camera ID current time and date e g filename 06 11 04 08 10 14 20 bmp means that the picture was taken by camera 6 on the 11th of April 2008 at 10 14 20 NOTE 100 frames are exported in BMP format while 30 and 10 size images are saved in JPEG format 5 9 5 2 Printing a still image Before attempting to
194. g box The system tray menu will display Your new hardware is installed and ready to use Figure 5 4 1 11 i Found New Hardware x Your new hardware is installed and ready to use Figure 5 4 1 11 Driver installation at this stage is completed if only one driver is required for only one FS 5 video input card Where a driver should be installed for a few FS 5 or any other type of video input cards with a few AD converters FS 16 and WS17 cards WS 7 4 AD converters FS 8 8 AD converters the monitor will show Found New Hardware Wizard again Repeat the steps described in p p 1 5 Driver installation procedures for each board should be repeated as many times as the number of AD converters it has i e once for FS 5 4 times for FS17 FS 16 WS 7 WS 6 and 8 times for FS 8 The driver installation procedure for a few video input boards should be repeated for each AD converter installed in all video input boards for instance for two FS 5 boards the driver installation procedure should be repeated 2 times for three FS 7 FS 16 boards or 12 times for WS 6 WS17 76 5 4 1 1 2 Testing the video capture card installation After the video capture card drivers have been installed check if they appear in Windows Do the following 1 Start the Device Manager by right clicking the My Computer icon on the Desktop and selecting the Manage item In the dialog box that opens select the Device Manager 2 Alternatively you can s
195. gt Snagit ea AXIS a AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Basic Configuration Basic TCP IP Settings 2 Instructions Network Settings Users TCP IP 3 Date amp Time IPv4 Address Configuration 4 Video amp Image Focus View current network settings Vv Enable IPv4 Obtain IP address via DHCP Video amp Image Use the following IP address Live View Config IP address 168 192 0 160 Test Event Configuration Subnet mask 255 255 254 0 Default router 10 0 0 1 IPv6 Address Configuration Language Enable IPv About Services System Options MV Enable ARP Ping setting of IP Address Options for notification of IP address change Settings AXIS Internet Dynamic DNS Service Settings Save Reset See also the advanced TCP IP settings Sf l ee Figure 5 4 2 10 While entering data in the Default router field the following should be taken into consideration 1 Ifthe video server and the IP device are located in the same subnet this parameter may be omitted 2 Ifthe video server and the IP camera are located in different subnets you must specify the Default Router The IP address of the default router should match the sub network which the IP device address belongs to Note In case of an invalid or absent default router IP address the camera will fail After the network settings for the Axis IP server have been set up start setting up Axxon Smart
196. gure 12 4 3 1 2 Specify the date and time limits of the search in the A Period From and To fields The date can be selected using the calendar that opens by clicking the arrow in the right corner of the field Figure 12 4 3 2 322 3 45 6 amp 6 7 8 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 13 n z 23 a 5 5 A Oe Figure 12 4 3 2 Jasper S ISiire Pange tone 16 01 2009 Y 235959 skind g 17 01 2009 9235959 Seren feces Titles State Additional Total reco 3 Titl Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Titl Connectio Cone ci Ba Titl Connec eT A Bai Tit Connector Bai Tit Connectio s Titl Connectio Titl Connectio Ba Tit Connectio Ba Titl Connectio Sai Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Bri Titl Connectio Ba Titl Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio s Titl Connectio Titl Connectio Ba Tit Connectio Bai Tit Connectio Figure 12 4 3 3 3 Select from which POS terminals Titles N objects the titles to be searched for are received 323 NOTE By default the receipts from all terminals are scanned To disable scanning the titles from a certain terminal uncheck the corresponding checkbox To disable scanning all terminals right click any terminal object in the list and selec
197. he Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 installs runtime components of Visual C Libraries required to run applications developed with Visual C ona computer that does not have Visual C 2005 installed Windows Installer The Microsoft Windows Installer is an application installation and configuration service Windowslnstaller KB893803 v2 x86 exe is the redistributable package for installing or upgrading Windows Installer This revised package replaces the previously released redistributable package named WindowslInstaller KB893803 x86 exe and addresses the issue discussed in KB Article 898628 Windows Installer fails silently after you upgrade to Windows Installer 3 1 loxi File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help O Back amp aD a Search Folders m Acrobat File and Folder Tasks a Make a new Folder E Publish this Folder to the Web EJ Share this folder Activesync IPP Other Places x B WIx GB My Documents 4 My Computer i3 My Network Places Java Nete O 4 VUVUVUVUVUUY Details SOL WLl2005_SP 1 Windows Installer Figure 1 2 3 1 1 3 AXXON SMART INSTALLATION You must have Windows administrator rights to install the Axxon Smart software Figure 1 2 3 1 14 5x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back a a Search gt Folders BAL Address De Vaxexo0n Smart 0 C Drivers File and Folder Tasks f Gey Make a new Folder langu
198. he X and Y fields specify the location of the window on the screen X and Y coordinates define the horizontal and vertical position of the top right corner of the Telemetry Panel As a percentage of the screen size 2 To enable disable moving the Telemetry Panel over the screen check uncheck the Allow Window Moving checkbox The option is enabled by default 3 To enable disable the transparency of the Telemetry Panel check uncheck the Transparent Window checkbox This option allows the user to see the interface objects located under the Telemetry Panel This option is enabled by default 4 To enable disable saving the presets check uncheck the Allow Set Presets checkbox This option is enabled by default Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 S Line 24 Line 25 Telemetry panel fo System security service n E Schedule Window position x 10 e 10 Allow window moving Transparent Allow set presets Figure 7 5 2 1 To open the Telemetry Panel use the Monitor menu of the Axxon Smart Main control panel Select the required camera in the drop down list at the top of the Telemetry Panel Table 7 5 1 describes the controls in the Telemetry Panel Figure 7 5 2 2 Table 7 5 1 Control description Camera movement speed The bigger the value the faster the camera moves ae Zoom in or out Make the focus closer or farther 228 S eC a As os oe i Stop camera movement
199. he action executes at midnight Specify the object to apply the action to Enter the value in the Device column It can be a specific camera detection zone ray relay or All Cameras All Rays All Zones All Relays value In the latter case the action will apply to all object of the specified type 54 5 Specify the action to execute Enter the value in the Action column The available actions depend on the device type specified in the Device column amp Line 9 S Line 10 S Line 11 S Line 12 S Line 13 S Line 14 HS Line 15 oo Line 16 Telemetry panel System security service 0 00 00 All cameras Figure 3 3 7 1 5 VIDEO SUBSYSTEM 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The video surveillance subsystem of the Axxon Smart system includes all video surveillance functions Video image processing Video image display Video image storing i a E Video image transmission 55 5 2 VIDEO FORMATS Digitizing Video flow management Compression of digitized video Figure 3 3 7 1 shows the analog to digital conversion and transmission of the signal Digitizing Video transmission TCP IP Video flow management Compression of digitized video Figure 3 3 7 1 Two basic TV formats exist today NTSC and PAL The NTSC National Television System Color analog format was developed in the USA
200. he camera linked to the terminal The Titles Search window provides the following video surveillance functionality Figure 12 4 8 1 1 Viewing the real time video image from the camera linked to the selected POS terminal To view the image double click the terminal icon in the Titles column of the terminal list 2 Camera control titles display video image processing zooming contrast sharpness frame export saving and printing 3 Playing the archive recordings 328 Searcn substring Amex Period fror 23 02 2009 gt 23 59 59 to 24 02 2009 gt 23 59 59 Titles 1 55 Transaction Date Time Jal 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 31 24 02 2009 16 26 33 24 02 2009 16 26 40 24 02 2009 16 26 43 24 02 2009 16 26 45 24 02 2009 16 26 52 24 02 2009 16 26 55 24 02 2009 16 26 57 Titles State Additional Total reco itles Titl Ba Titl Ba Titl Fa Titl Ba Titl Ba Titl Ba Titl Fa Titl Bal Titl Bal Titl Ba Titl Ba Titl Sa Titl Ba Titl B Titl Sa Titl Ba Titl Baa Titl B Titl Sa Titl Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Samt regulis Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is c Query is
201. heck the Show checkbox 256 a amp LJ Computer S S Grabber 1 i m pa Camera 2 oe Ray 2 Sy Rays i ra Ray 4 i z Rap 5 Ray 6 oS Ray j Ray 8 Hg Relay 1 g Relay 2 Hoge Relay 3 cone Relay 4 1 study Board 1 7 Channel 1 Camera Name Type On closing On opening Show Figure 9 5 1 1 Relay object setup To set up the Relay object do the following Figure 9 5 2 1 1 In the Board drop down list specify the Grabber object number corresponding to the ADC of the video capture card where the ray relay card is installed In the Channel drop down list specify the channel number according to the output number DO of the socket s to which the relay is physically connected In the State radio button group select the normal state of the relay Normal Locked normally closed or Normal Unlocked normally open In the Working Time field specify the time interval after which the relay returns to its normal state The time interval is counted from the moment when the relay switches to the abnormal state To set the normal state use the State radio buttons Specify the time interval in seconds To manually close or open the relay use the Lock Unlock button By default the Lock button is displayed When you click this button the relay switches to the opposite state If before clicking the Lock button the relay was in an open state it will be closed when you click the button If before clicking
202. his ratio might change This can skew the image To prevent skewing and keep the 4 3 size check 4 3 w h Figure 5 7 7 1 127 Ea Grabber 6 Hg Grabber 7 Hg Grabber 8 H Grabber 9 He Grabber 10 H Grabber 11 He Grabber 12 H S Grabber 13 a Audio 1 ogee Audio 2 fl Audio 3 iE Audio 4 ofl Audio 5 gf Audio E Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 7 Settings Advanced General Monitor 1 x o r o w 100 H 100 Overlay Type l Overlay Type ll Allow Control panel Allow moving Mame Dont show disabled cameras Figure 5 7 7 1 5 7 8 Selecting the monitor alarm operation mode Whenever cameras register an Alarm event Axxon Smart provides the following functionality for the video surveillance monitor 1 show 1 alarm camera 2 show all alarm cameras 3 show all cameras triggered by the rays Select the mode for a video surveillance monitor from the drop down list Show on alarm which you will find in the Advanced tab of the Monitor object Figure 5 7 8 1 The default None option in this list corresponds to the standard alarm mode of the video monitor i e the pre set layout for the monitors defines the number of monitors simultaneously displayed and is not subject to the registered alarms IF you check Alarm Camera then the video monitor displays video signals only from the camera which is currently registering an alarm When alarmed the next camera is queued to be displayed All Alarm Cameras displays al
203. ices 0 Realtek High Definition Audio lf Video Codecs eZ System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers dena Disk Management Sa Services and Applications Figure 5 4 1 14 5 4 1 2 Possible installation problems and remedies If the ADC codes are not displayed in the CodeReader exe window Figure 5 4 1 15 or are displayed as zeros 0000 Figure 5 4 1 16 the driver is either not installed or its installation is invalid The Axxon Smart system will not be able to start in this case It may also happen that not all ADC codes are displayed Figure 5 4 1 17 78 DS Code Reader x Figure 5 4 1 15 Code Reader Figure 5 4 1 16 Code Reader q Figure 5 4 1 17 The CodeReader exe may not be able to read the codes of the video capture cards for the following reasons The video capture card has not been physically installed The video capture card is inoperable The video capture card driver is not installed The installed driver does not match the video capture card The installed driver works incorrectly m oe pe a 79 Check if the video capture card is present in the computer and re install the drivers for all ADCs If after driver re installation the ADC codes are not displayed by the CodeReader exe contact your vendor to check 5 4 1 the video capture card operability 3 Setting up Grabber objects To set up the Grabber object which corresponds to the ADC on the vid
204. ideo signal from 4 cameras If all the cameras are in a common queue ADC digitizes video signals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Let us suppose that Camera 1 has a 1 2 queue and the rest of the cameras are in the common queue Then the ADC digitizes video signals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 1 Camera 3 Camera 1 Camera 4 Camera 1 So the frame rate of Camera 1 is increased by 3 times and becomes a half of the total frame rate of the considered ADC The frame rate of each of the remaining cameras decreases 1 5 times and makes up 1 6 of the total frame rate of the considered ADC Example 2 The ADC is set to digitize the video signal from 3 cameras If all the cameras are in a common queue ADC digitizes video signals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Let us suppose that Camera 1 has a 1 2 queue and the rest of the cameras are in the common queue Then the ADC digitizes video signals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 1 Camera 3 Camera 1 Camera 2 So the frame rate of Camera 1 is increased by 2 times and becomes a half of the total frame rate of the considered ADC The frame rate of each of the remaining cameras will make up 1 4 of the total frame rate of the considered ADC Example 3 The ADC is set to digitize video signal from 4 cameras If all the cameras have a common queue ADC digitizes video s
205. if you check the Yes Want to Install the Mobile Modules checkbox during the Axxon Smart setup The following buttons are available when using Axxon Smart via the PocketPC 1 Menu Figure 10 4 5 1 The Menu button allows selecting the cameras to be viewed setting up the host port and user name and password if necessary arming and disarming the camera quitting the system 282 Camera 1 Camera 1 2 Camera 2 Settings 3 Camera 3 Stop recording 4 Camera 4 Disarm Exit Camera 1 16 01 09 18 32 20 421 om ES Figure 10 4 5 2 Connection Click the Connection button two arrows to make connection after installing the mobile module and select the camera to view Figure 10 4 5 2 Full screen view Clicking this button stretches the video image to full screen Figure 10 4 5 3 To exit full screen mode tap anywhere on the screen 283 Figure 10 4 5 3 4 Switching between the Live and Archive modes This button allows playing archive video from the selected camera The standard playback panel opens including the following buttons Rewind Play Stop Pause Forward Figure 10 4 5 4 The up and down arrows next to the date time of the current recording allow changing the selected part of the date or time The right arrow allows moving to the next recording To return to live video mode click the switching button again Camera 1 23 11 05 18 36 10 390 23 11 05 18 19 12 oo f gt Figure 10 4 5 4 5 P
206. ignals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 4 Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Let us suppose that Camera 1 has a 1 3 queue and the rest of the cameras are in the common queue Then the ADC digitizes video signals in the sequence Camera 1 Camera 2 Camera 3 Camera 1 Camera 4 Camera 2 Camera 1 So the frame rate of Camera 1 is increased by 1 3 times and becomes a third of the total frame rate of the considered ADC The frame rate of each of the remaining cameras will make up 2 9 of the total frame rate of the considered ADC Example 1 It has no sense to enqueue 2 cameras at once with 1 2 or 1 3 priority if their signals are digitized and processed by the same ADC because all camera signals would be processed as if they were in the common queue Example 2 It has no sense to enqueue one of two cameras with 1 2 priority allocated to the same ADC because this camera s video signal would be processed as if it were in the common queue Example 3 It has no sense enqueue one of two or three cameras with 1 3 priority allocated to the same ADC because this camera s video signal would be processed as if it were in the common queue 4 Setting up the brightness contrast and color saturation of the video image 105 Brightness and contrast settings By default the checkbox in the Brightness and Contrast group is unchecked This means that the system automatically adjusts brightness and contrast Figure 5 5 1 3
207. iioectics 221 7 1 LIN PRODUCTION neea E EEE 221 7 2 THE SUPPORTED PROTOCOLS wiinsconvcassiccscceeseseneesdonabayevensstuorscskataievendyeseyiwdscassineelicansetesneseescodsecodeeastineeiaes 222 7 3 CONNECTING THE PTZ DEVICES crios ionerne aan a AEEA NEEE A AAO AE 222 7 31 PIZ devices setU a E NA a eee eas beatae eed A NR 223 Teak PTZ CONMECHOM ador ANN T buaxe Glas banwees euanseqeseacsecuseanss ta tuoawtcxesesrcananieans 223 T3224 Analog Cameras Ol TNE Sale Wl OLOCO 4 atctiid ca secs ccsans vas oad cadet acca neous eau cdenienwirsd ohinanucd onieosaeewnooncaen 223 7 3 2 2 Pca MEI S ia faire sacs tsar sted sae call ease nas saa T nmin het cig adam aie han abana ncaa as 224 7 4 PTZ ODJET SetU sirrinin a tease sees ccesecoweniwsacuctannencesvanaeonewenenieesteeseea eens 224 FAA Line opec SOUND ee e avek onc evioqua net asea ipa aca esaatocenbasieieks 225 7 5 Usime the PTZ COVICES seisena ien eR EE ANAE E N E N 226 7 5 1 Using the monitor interface to control PTZ CAMELAS cceccceeccseccsecceeeeccseceecceueceucesuceeceseeeeeeseeeaaees 226 79 2 The Telemetry Panel objets a a e A E a E 226 Fa 2t Savine ana delenne TNE preses ania a a a tanseubsaniseastetuanesinniccess 229 7 5 3 Joystick setup Tor controllins the PIZ Camer dS rereana a E A EEN 230 BS AUDIO SUBSYSTEM iisciccisastecsioauiacedadsiaiwauctsivcstaadsenaanuedntedatieneai ae ee 232 8 1 GENERAL INFORIVIATION eieo ascecesecttcre A dees saascees anita re eoaseee sane eduuceuh ecewntensdas
208. ility Blind Close Face Lost items PTZ Trace Classic Figure 5 10 7 1 When an event is recognized by a detector it triggers the corresponding camera is alarmed The settings may also provide the on trigger automatic start of audio or video recording or other pre programmed actions Motion detectors are set up by Administrator 5 11 1 Adding and removing detectors The list of detectors for each camera video surveillance field is created with the settings panel of the respective Camera Object These are set up for each camera individually You can add or remove detectors in the Detector tab of the settings panel for the Camera object The settings are customized for each detector The icons for different detector settings are found in the Detector tab With different types of detectors the same icon may correspond to different settings When you add or select a new detector the relevant settings icons become activated The Add a new detector Figure 5 11 1 2 179 1 Click the Add button 2 Select the detector type To view and edit the settings for a detector select it from the registered detectors list of the camera You can select the detector by clicking on its ID in the ID field Figure 5 11 1 1 To remove a detector from the list do the following 1 Click its ID in the ID field 2 Click Remove 180 E Relay 6 g Relay 7 one Relay 8 Grabber 2 Grabber 3 i wai Camera 4 p Camera 5
209. ime only Yes now and every time connect a device f No not this time Click Next to continue Back Cancel Figure 5 4 1 6 Select manual driver installation Figure 5 4 1 7 Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for ITY F556 If your hardware came with an installation CD lt 4 o floppy disk insert it now Wi hat do vou want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended Install from a list or specific location Advanced Click Next to continue Figure 5 4 1 7 Select the installation search parameters Do not search will choose the driver myself At this stage the Browse for folders dialog box will be displayed Select the folder on the installation disk that 74 contains drivers for video capture cards Now confirm the selected folder by pressing OK in the Browse for folders window Select Next in the Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box Figure 5 4 1 8 Found New Hardware Wizard Browse For Folder x Please choose your search and installation options Select the Folder that contains drivers For your hardware inst E G installation Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driwer found will be installed E Installer E G wI T Search removable media floppy COD AOM El
210. in the fragment and the fragment size Figure 13 7 5 3 348 SE archive s converter Lo LS 20 01 09 15 09 29 B 20 01 2009 15 09 29 a 27 02 2009 14 43 33 Camera fi JA i gt al amp a g Figure 13 7 5 3 To remove a fragment from the list select the corresponding row and press the Delete key 6 Click the Export to AVI File button in the bottom right corner of the window to start the export 7 The creation date time of the recording currently being converted is displayed in the title bar while the first frame of the recording is displayed in the window The conversion progress percentage is displayed in the title bar as well 8 The exported files will be saved in the folder specified in the utility settings by default the Backup folder on the same drive as Axxon Smart is installed The utility can be set up to save each recording in a separate file or to save all recordings in the same file 13 7 6 The utility setup Click the Settings button to open the settings panel The settings are described inTable 13 7 1 349 G Export settings x Folder selection Folder Volume size MB 650 FPS RealTime Archive s export f Export to AY file M Divide by alarms Frame export snes Quality 80 Jpeg Compression viden Ful Frames Uncor Sound PCM 6 000 kHz Titles Point OF Sale Name Date Time xfs vfs wfio0 Hfi Font Screen e
211. ings Select Export then Save a recording then Video settings then Start Saving to start the export process The exported files are stored in the EXPORT folder of the Axxon Smart program folder The system administrator may specify another folder for saving the exported file 177 NOTE No message is displayed to indicate the beginning end of exporting Still frame exporting and printing can also be performed in archive playback mode E3 oxxon Smart a Monitor 1 oO OX 0 3fps 64840 400x300 Pa OL A aay NNR eR NA 1 500 it I 1 1O I i gt a P Ge ow f OEF ES 5 33 18 il y 30 01 09 15 33 16 Camera bo Show titles Processing F Export Dave frame p SP stop recording Save recordto AVI gt Video format n x A i T Start saving i OANA GAK CABAL AUA Figure 5 10 7 1 5 11 DETECTORS Intelligent software motion detectors perform automatic video image analysis to recognize events occurring within the observed scene Figure 5 10 7 1 Event recognition capabilities depend on the detector type 178 g Relay 6 oe Relay 7 song Relay 8 Batt Grabber 2 J A ie Grabber 3 pea Camera 4 1 study rai H bp Camera 5 Detector Tes Direction Lhe EAE A E AA A a SN 8 max Sensitivity Pecteteeereeeeect Contrast a Petctuetereeeeeecect Filtration f Pertereeeeneeenl Add ae __Detectortype Disteston trequenisp Activity Frame scale Focus Stab
212. ional menu of video surveillance window Figure 5 9 2 2 152 EB axxon Smart Monitor 1 a g Sx UOCE E 25fps 7103 320x240 Camera Show titles Processing Export stop recording Disarm O AAACN BAK K AKG SACK Kars A y Ww ey N 15 45 50 m Figure 5 9 2 2 5 9 2 3 Recording using a macro A macro is a Axxon Smart object that launches an action if triggered by an event It works like this if event A then step B To set up a recording triggered by macro do as follows Figure 5 9 2 3 e Select the Unit Hardware that will trigger a recording if an event comes up e Select the Event for this unit that will trigger the macro e Select the camera from the drop down Unit Hardware menu for recording e Select Start Recoding from the Action drop down list 153 tt Line 19 S Line 20 oo Line 21 vee System security service E Schedule O owe Event o Dewe Con Ray 1 Alarm Camera 2 Start recording Ray 1 End of alarm Camera 2 Stop recording CT All cameras Any event All cameras Arm Figure 5 9 2 3 5 9 2 4 Scheduled recording The Schedule object is used to schedule a command for certain days and times Figure 5 9 2 4 e Setthe day and time for running a command J Select the camera from the drop down Unit Hardware menu for recording J Select Start Recoding from the Action Command drop down list 154 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24
213. is specified the recording stops in a certain time interval after the completion of receipt text transmission specified in the Recording Interval field c Inthe Per frame Recording mode a frame is recorded for each receipt line The frames are not recorded if no receipt lines are registered by Axxon Smart 2 The Recording Interval parameter is required for the Recording on Receipt Start End mode in case the receipt ending marker is not set The value in the field sets the time interval after the end of receipt text transmission when the video recording should stop 3 The Motion Detector parameter is used in the Recording on Receipt Start End mode and in the Per frame Recording mode If the Motion Detector checkbox is checked the recording starts upon main motion detector activation for this camera as well as upon registering the first last or other lines of the receipt 4 Ifthe Receipts Only checkbox is checked only the information which is recognized by Axxon Smart as the receipt contents will be saved to the titles database i e e the text strings symbol sequences and symbols between the receipt start and end markers and the markers themselves If this checkbox is not checked all text data from the POS terminal will be saved to the titles database 306 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel o System security service E Schedule Text search Pos 1 E 4 cl Rec
214. ject is not selecte 3 3 6 The Apply Cancel and Close buttons The Apply Cancel and Close buttons at the bottom of the object settings panel are used to apply or cancel the object settings changes and to close the Settings panel Figure 3 3 6 1 Figure 3 3 6 1 Clicking the Apply button saves and immediately applies the specified object settings If you have not clicked the Apply button after changing the settings your changes will be applied only after you close the Settings panel by clicking the Close button in case you have not canceled the changes by clicking the Cancel button Clicking the Cancel button restores the previous values of the settings set before the Apply or Close buttons were last clicked Clicking the Close button closes the Settings panel All changes will be applied to the settings values 3 3 7 Object Settings panel The object settings panel is designed to set up the parameters of objects It contains various functional groups of fields designed to specify the certain values to parameters 51 The object panel may contain tabs The tab titles are located at the top left corner of the panel Table 3 3 3 describes the interface elements used in the object settings panels Table 3 3 3 Element image Element name Element description Numerical parameter Enter the numerical value entry field Enter the string value 100 String parameter entry field Checkbox Check uncheck Radio button Select one
215. l currently alarmed cameras All Alarm Cameras displays all cameras triggered by the currently alarmed respective rays 128 i Audio 2 of Audio 3 Audio 4 E Audio 5 ogi Audio 6 oom To analog output GA Software Hardware None Alarm camera All alarm cameras Alam rays cameras Enable deinterlacing by default Figure 5 7 8 1 5 7 9 Enabling de interlacing De interlacing is a software procedure for removing image fluttering step effect This is a step like pattern image fluttering at the borders of the moving objects in the full resolution video frames By default de interlacing in Axxon Smart is disabled Enable De Interlacing in the surveillance window menu provided video is displayed at full resolution If you restart the program you should enable de interlacing again To keep the enabled de interlacing upon Axxon Smart restart check the Default De Interlacing On checkbox in the More tab of the Monitor object settings panel Figure 5 7 9 1 129 ill Audio 2 lg Audio 3 oi Audio 4 2 Audio 5 M F n Line 1 E Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 S Line 6 S Line 7 B PTZ 1 Show on alarm oom To analog output Software O Hardware Wola m camera Sequence sec a i Enable deinterlacing by default 2 Figure 5 7 9 1 5 7 10 Zooming options Operator can access the zoom and magnifier options while working with the surveillance monitor By default Axxon Smart
216. lable port Check if all POS terminals are set up to send receipt data to the network Connect the server to the router 12 3 POS SUBSYSTEM SETUP The Axxon Smart video security system and POS operations control subsystem can be used with the POS terminals only that have the option for connection to video servers using the RS 232 COM port connection TCP IP or UDP local network connection protocols To set up the POS subsystem the POS objects representing the POS terminals the user interface for titles display and the Titles Search object should be set up 12 3 1 POS object setup Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel E System security service E Schedule SEH ES Text search Pos Receipt i Camera 1 Terminal Cash ae ee 7 Words to recording s beginning Connection settings Record modes separator TCR 32215 Words for recording s ending i Recording time Z separator Speed 300 Moton Detector End of the document Parity Odd Receipts only C Match case DTA J ATS Repeats processing Disable Clear screen if there is no data received within 0 sec Ignore repeats Figure 12 3 1 1 The POS object is used for POS terminal connection creation and setup The POS object settings panel is used to specify the parameters Figure 12 3 1 1 A POS N tab corresponds to each POS terminal Axxon Smart creates these tabs aut
217. lance window open the context Bar Chart for Brightness Figure 5 5 1 3 To hide the bar chart click again on the Bar Chart for Brightness Color depth adjustment 106 The check box in the Color group of the Camera object settings panel is unchecked by default To receive the image in color check the Color checkbox Figure 5 5 1 3 Drag the slider next to the checkbox to adjust the saturation of the image The extreme left position minimum of the slider corresponds to a black and white image The extreme right maximum position corresponds to a fully saturated color image Selection of the video image color format By default the video capture card digitizes the video using the YUV 4 2 0 format which allows to increase compression while decreasing the color depth To receive video in standard TV format YUV 4 2 2 check the YUV 4 2 2 checkbox in the Video tab Figure 5 5 1 3 Note while setting up the Camera object for an IP device you cannot adjust Color Brightness and Contras you can do it in the Advanced tab whereas Color Rendition can t be changed 5 Video recording to disk s setup Check the Record Alarms checkbox in the Video tab to enable automatic recording from this camera to disk in case the main detector triggers The video recording file created by Axxon Smart includes a video signal segment from the beginning to the end of the recording The beginning and end of the saved fragment match the moments whe
218. lation process is running Figure 1 2 3 4 Press Cancel button to end the procedure ia AHON Smart 1 0 1 4 70 Setup Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 software de installation Please wait until amp Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 will be removed From your computer This action will take some time and depends on vour computer s configuration and software that already installed Status Validating install Cancel Figure 1 2 3 4 Step 5 To confirm the uninstallation and quit the wizard click Finish Figure 1 2 3 5 26 ie AHON Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Completed the Asxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 Setup Wizard A ccon Smart v 1 0 1 470 components have been successfully removed From your computer Axson Smart W41 0 1 470 software can be installed recovered Fromm Axson Smart 1 0 1 470 Install CD Press Finish button to end 4xxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 de installation procedure Figure 1 2 3 5 Step 6 To completely delete the Axxon Smart software from your computer manually delete the Axxon Smart program folder and all Video folders created for video archive storage Figure 1 2 3 6 The Axxon Smart folder contains e current version of the titles database e license key file e folders with the video recordings and frames exported in the course of using Axxon Smart e Axxon Smart configuration file and its backup copy e After the first launch of the Axxon Smart system the video cfg file is created cont
219. lbar To show hide the video image from the cameras in the Scene window use the Displayed Cameras panel which opens upon clicking the corresponding button This panel contains the list of cameras available for video viewing and processing in the Scene window 210 To enable the display and processing of the video image from a camera check the checkbox next to the camera name in the list Figure 6 2 2 6 To disable video display uncheck the checkbox of the corresponding camera To confirm the changes made to the list of displayed cameras click the Accept button in the bottom left corner of the Displayed Cameras panel To cancel the changes click the Cancel button in the bottom right corner of the panel After changing the list of displayed cameras refresh the Scene window layout NOTE The Scene window can be set up not to display the Displayed Cameras button or the toolbar that contains it E3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 W o a 200 Quug osoen 16 14 55 KIKI ii Camera 1 olol oOlojo Figure 6 2 2 6 6 2 2 6 VIDEO IMAGE LAYOUT IN THE SCENE WINDOW The layout of video images is defined by the following parameters 1 the number and location of the video images in the Scene window 2 rotation 3 perspective correction 4 cropping 5 scaling 6 restoring the set proportions of the images 211 E3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 HO oK 9 790 Runa ag CoE To add or selec
220. le on the network will be displayed in the IPUtility exe dialog window Figure 5 4 2 2 aa AXIS IP Utility O x Serer View Help ip a a IP address rived 192 169 0 122 00408C7C53F5 AIS 213 OO408C82BE 96 192 169 0 191 O0408C82R E96 Ax S 207 OO408C7C222E 192 169 0 95 004080702225 ASS 207M Ww OOA0SC9034FC 192 169 0 120 OO409C9034FC AS 215 PTZ 004080829110 192 168 0 252 00408c829110 AKIS 2410 00408LE32BE6 192 165 0 121 OO408Ce32BE 6 Workstation interace 1 10 0 1 35 Figure 5 4 2 2 Make sure that the required device is in the list The Name field displays the model name and serial number of the device To operate the IP devices in the local network of the surveillance system valid IP addresses should be assigned Before assigning the IP address to a network device do the following 1 Check that the Axis IP device is connected to the mains and correctly connected to the local network Receive a unique IP address from the network administrator 3 Ensure that the device displays its own MAC address correctly MAC address is identical to the serial number for Axis IP devices Before assigning the IP address to the Axis IP server do the following 1 Check if this address does not belong to other devices This is done using the Windows command line To display the command line click Run in the Windows Start menu Enter cmd in the Open field of the Run dialog box then click OK Figure 5 4 2 3 93 R
221. lp Olea S al 2 lelo amp lt html gt lt head gt lt title gt WebServer Client lt title gt lt link rel SHORTCUT ICON href favicon ico gt meta http equiv Content Type content text html charset windows 1251 gt lt head gt lt hody gt lt table Bborder 0 width 400 height 1005 valign center align center cellspacing 0 cellpadding o lt tr gt lt td valign center align center gt lt applet name amera lient code cec Monitor archives gg jar width 7go height Whoa hspace PT Vspace mge align middle gt lt param name wersion values g4 7 0 0 gt lt param name carm default id vyalue 1 gt lt param name control panel available values true lt param name top visible value true gt lt param name layout available vyalue true gt lt param name layout dertault yalue O gt lt param name Cs ftps vyalue true gt lt param name Cs size vyalue true gt lt param name port yalue G1 gt lt param name messaqes value name WebServer client detach cable detached disable camera detached lt tr gt lt td height 322 align center gt lt a href http www java com gt lt img sre get Java _blue button gif horde lt tr gt lt f applet gt lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt body gt lt html gt x 4 For Help press Fl Figure 10 4 3 1 Table 10 4 2 describes av
222. m all zones Disarm all zones Figure 5 11 1 3 the IQ window shows it as a green point To arm all the detectors use Arm All Zones in the functional menu of the surveillance monitor window Once armed a detector starts motion recognition routine and if set up accordingly to record alarm events to disk Video recording can be performed only if Record alarms function has been enabled for the corresponding Camera object To disarm a detection zone check the corresponding item in the functional menu of video surveillance window NOTE The list of detectors for a given camera may not be displayed in the functional menu of the relevant surveillance monitor window The detection zones thereof are armed by default and you can not disarm them The standard window shows the relevant menu item of an armed detection zone in yellow and the IQ window shows it as yellow point Whereas the standard window shows the relevant menu item of a disarmed detection zone in green the IQ window shows it as a green point When you operate auxiliary detection zones to disarm all the detection zones use Disarm All Zones in the functional menu of the surveillance monitor window 5 11 1 2 Masking Masking the image is used to fine tune motion detection zones A mask defines the image areas which will not be covered by the motion detector To enable Masking go to the surveillance window functional menu select Processing then Detector
223. mate date and time of the recording in the appropriate fields Click the button to find the recording with the creation date and time closest to the specified values 13 7 4 Exporting frames to BMP or JPG files To export the recording frames to BMP or JPG files do the following E a Select the video archive to fetch the frame from Select the desired recording In the Playback mode find the desired frame and click the Pause button Click the Frame Export button The Save As dialog box will open Select the folder to save the frame to and click the Save button Figure 13 7 4 1 344 Save ini oS export Fi c E lM p H egent Documents Deskto m My Documents vn Fr My Computer K File name Cam 1 20 01 09 15 09 32 ipg Mu Network Dave as type Jpeg Files ipa peg Cancel Places Figure 13 7 4 1 To print frames do the following Select the video archive to print a frame from Select the desired recording In the Playback mode find the desired frame and click Pause Click the Print Frame button The Print dialog box will open Select the printing parameters and click OK Figure 13 7 4 2 a ee 345 Prin ee Printer Hame Amak secretariate Properties S hats Type HF Lagenet 1100 M5 Where reseption Comment second floor Print range Copies All Pages fom wf M Selection Humber of copies poi pE FF Collate Figure 1
224. may choose Full or Custom installation If you select Full all Axxon Smart components will be installed If you select Custom a dialog window will open at the next step allowing to select the components to install Confirm your choice by clicking Next Figure 1 2 3 9 i AHON Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Choose the installation type Choose additional options of the installation Choose Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 software configuration Eyll installation all Axon Smart Press Wext button to proceed 1 0 1 470 components will be installed more Free disk space is Axson Smart v 1 0 1 470 Full installation required Asecon Smart 1 0 1 470 custom installation Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 9 Step 9 If you have chosen Custom installation in the previous step select the components to be installed To include exclude a component check uncheck the checkbox next to it in the list Check the required components and click Next Figure 1 2 3 10 20 i AHON Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Select the Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 components Choose Ascxcon Smart v 1 0 1 470 required components Choose amp xxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 required components Press Next button to proceed peste Basic Files serene Capture boards drivers menn guardant drivers senes watchdog service men Alarm message modules senses E Voice messages mod sananen E Post messages modul H E Shor
225. mera settings the signals are not coming 5 9 4 Image processing AXXON SMART incorporates image processing tools maximizing both user convenience and efficiency of system application 161 g3 joxxonSmart Monitor 1 m baup toms myope y Ciera Camera d Show titles b Export gt D magnifier C Stop recording Sharpness F Contrast a Contour uc Detector mask Figure 5 9 4 1 5 9 4 1 De interlacing De interlacing mode is used only if the resolution for the given Camera object has been set to Full a LO Bx 10fps 9209 320x240 MOH HA KOGaES SASK Kae Ss The de interlacing mode is designed to remove the step like pattern image fluttering at the borders of the moving objects in the video To enable disable de interlacing use the surveillance window menu Click Processing then De interlacing Figure 5 9 4 2 NOTE Deinterlace command is in the functional menu of video surveillance window only if the resolution for the current Camera object has been set to Full In case of a small surveillance window size the option is ineffective therefore the Deinterlace command is not displayed in the menu 162 3 oxxon Smart _ _ _ Monitor 1 ao os 5 9 4 2 DE 2 wa 4 9fps 608256 704x576 GAA ALASEN a J 18 09 08 2 s 4 PEET Y ia O COROECE CR CECE OE GOES Camera Show titles ye He Deinterlace gt Export Stop recording Di
226. mes o Period from 23 02 2009 235959 16 09 08 16 09 13 to 24 02 2009 235959 16 09 24 LE 1 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046610 16 09 39 Ias 16 09 42 Saar results E 16 09 45 16 09 51 16 10 13 16 10 35 1046610 18 00 16 10 55 24 02 2009 16 26 28 16 10 58 24 02 2009 16 26 31 16 11 01 24 02 2009 16 26 33 16 11 09 24 02 2009 16 26 40 16 11 27 24 02 2009 16 26 43 16 11 29 24 02 2009 16 26 45 16 11 32 24 02 2009 16 26 52 16 12 32 24 02 2009 16 26 55 16 13 34 4 02 2009 16 26 57 16 14 37 16 15 39 16 16 43 Titles State Additional 16 17 45 i Titl Connectio Query is c 35 16 18 45 Ea Titl Connectio Quer isc 0 16 19 48 Ba Titl Connectio Quer isc 0 eae E Ba Titl Connectio Query isc 0 P 16 26 51 F Bai Titl Connectio Query isc 0 Bai Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Bai Titl Connectio Quer isc 0 Bai Titl Connectio Query isc 0 Bal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Title Ba Titl Connectio Query isc 0 Ga Tat Connectio Queis c 0 Em TiL Conmectio Query ie c 0 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Fal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Visa 19 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Bal Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Ee Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Til C tio sc 0 Payment Authori
227. monitor window 137 5 8 3 Changing the number of surveillance windows displayed on the video monitor By default in the left part of the video monitor tools panel a row of buttons for choosing surveillance windows number is located 1 4 6 9 16 all cameras The number of buttons available can vary depending on the number of cameras used for the given video monitor The choice of windows number is based on the needed surveillance mode and operator tasks Every button shows the number of the surveillance windows Figure 5 8 3 1 BoxxonSmart __ Monitor 1 KEET HH gio at gt b gt 11fps 8926 320x240 192105 zia FA ee m iep O AAAA AAAA SSAA iaz g s Figure 5 8 3 1 5 8 4 Surveillance cameras windows layout on the video monitor Add the layout for the video surveillance windows with the Layouts button in the video monitor tools panel You shape the layout position of the monitors by dragging and dropping the windows with your mouse To save the current layout use the Add command from the Layouts menu The layout covers the number and position of surveillance windows displayed on the screen Figure 5 8 4 1 The number of displayed cameras can be set using the corresponding button on video monitor tools panel 138 BoxxonSmat Monitor 1 oOo 12fps 8860 320x240 isskot yia aa 16 31 0A Miis AA Fie O AAAA AAAA SSAA E Lo als isgkot 7g Figure 5 8 4 1 5 8 5 Selecting
228. multi channel audio playback and other modifications are also available An Audio object is automatically created in the Axxon Smart object tree for each standard sound card The card type model name is assigned and displayed in the Board field of the Audio object settings panel for example Realtek HD Audio input Figure 8 2 6 1 The card type model name is also displayed in the Board field of the Audio object settings panel representing the second standard sound card installed in the computer Select the audio digitizing frequency sampling rate from the Grab Frequency drop down list The range of sampling rates depends on the sound card type The maximum sampling rate supported by the Axxon Smart software is 96 kHz irrespective of the sound card type 241 S Grabber 13 gf Audio 3 Audio 4 La Monitor 1 LE Monitor 2 LE Monitor 3 Monitor 4 Unused microphones Grab frequency p Figure 8 2 6 1 8 2 7 Microphone object setup To set up the Microphone object in Axxon Smart do the following Figure 8 2 7 1 242 oe Microphone 5 m Microphone 6 of Microphone 7 efi Microphone 8 ofl Microphone 9 off Microphone 10 of Microphone 11 ol Microphone 12 i Microphone 13 i Microphone 14 oi Microphone 15 H Microphone 16 a i Audio 2 E Microphone 1 Board 2 Channel Camera 1 ki Disable Show Figure 8 2 7 1 1 Inthe Board field the Audio object number is automatically
229. n icon in the top left corner of the surveillance window NOTE In the standard monitor interface mode the rays can be controlled using the indication icon only 259 Monitor 1 H o LIX 10fps 26453 640x480 lt amp 5 a A amp BAL o gt G AAGAGAAAAA AAVCCAALK Sap Figure 9 6 1 2 9 6 2 Using macros and schedules in the ray ray subsystem Macros are designed to provide interaction of the ray ray subsystem with other subsystems and to program its operation logic Macros allow building the scheme of reasons and consequences of the interaction of these objects with the objects in other subsystems To use macros in the ray ray subsystem do the following Figure 9 6 2 1 e Inthe Device field select which object s event should trigger the action e Inthe Event field select the event on the specified object to trigger the action e Inthe Device drop down list select the device to execute the action upon e Inthe Action drop down list select the action to execute 260 The Schedule object is designed to automatically execute the specified action upon reaching the specified date and time Figure 9 6 2 2 Ray 1 Alarm Ray 1 End of alarm Ray 2 Any event Ray 2 Alarm CJ all cameras Any event Ray 1 Ray 1 Ray 2 Ray 2 All cameras Disarm rm Disarm Arm Figure 9 6 2 1 Specify the date and time for the action execution Line 17 S Line 18 Line 19 Line 20
230. n one of the local disks of the video server together with video in the Video folder Figure 8 1 1 1 Renaming the file extensions to wav allows playing them in any audio player The numbers in existing extensions indicate the camera from which the sound has been recorded 233 G 03 01 09 17 Hja x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt z Ba Search gt Folders HBL Address i C Wideo 03 01 09 17 by b i i i aie File and Folder Tasks a Make a new Folder 7d _02 7e _02 7f 02 17a 01 d Publish this Folder to the Web ty ls E3 Share this folder i7a wil 17b O1 1Fb wl l c _ O1 17c w01 17d _01 17d w0 1 Other Places ie hs Ly a ie bs hs E wr petali a lve O1 L e wil 17F 01 17FwO1 a0 Of BO woz 61 O02 L ke Ibs i I La is E BL woz 179 O1 LYS 01 1650 O1 180 001 161 O1 181 01 S E s pe S E L 162 01 182 401 183 01 133 401 164 01 134 0401 185 01 E is is Ly by ty is 135 0401 F 08 Fe WOE Fo OF Fo 08 Fowl Foie cs Ls 2 E x Figure 8 1 1 1 8 2 AUDIO OBJECT SETUP To set up the Audio object do the following Figure 8 1 1 1 1 Select the digitizing device type and the PCI channel number Axxon Smart assigns the numbers to the analog digital converter ADC channel automatically 2 Select the sampling rate of the sound card ADC or FS WS video capture card in the Grab Frequency field The rate is assigned in Hz Available rates are 8 000 16 000 or 32 000 Hz
231. n the alarm triggered the beginning and the end of the recording process To make post event analysis of the causes and effects of an alarm event more effective Axxon Smart software features enhanced options of video recording to extend recording fragments Figure 5 5 1 4 shows the following recording periods a Pre alarm video fragment preceding the event that triggered the recording Pre alarm recording allows analyzing the possible causes of the alarm Pre alarm recording is enabled if the recording was triggered by a camera alarm or if the operator activated the Record with a Pre alarm action 107 Figure 5 5 1 4 b Post alarm video fragment immediately following the ending of the recording Post alarm recording allows analyzing the consequences of the alarm c Hot recording video fragment which will be saved to disk regardless of whether the recording was started and ended by an alarm or not Increasing the video recording rate of the hot fragment allows to analyze the alarm event more effectively The Hot recording segment always starts from the recording start time on the main auxiliary detector alarm The Hot recording segment is finished at the recording end time on the main or auxiliary detector alarm or some time earlier depending on the Hot recording settings and event duration 6 Set the Hot Recording Rate in the Hot Recording field in frames per second fps Figure 5 5 1 5 NOTE The Hot recor
232. n the Windows account on the computer onto which the Axxon Smart is being installed select the Windows Account connection mode This mode can be chosen in the following cases 1 The SQL Server from Axxon Smart installation disk or a third party manufacturer disk and the Axxon Smart software are installed on the same computer 2 The SQL Server and Axxon Smart are installed on different computers connected via TCP IP and are located in the same network domain In this case the MS SQL computer and the Axxon Smart computer must have the same Windows accounts i e e with identical user names and passwords 3 The fully functional SQL Server installed separately and the Axxon Smart software are installed on different computers connected via TCP IP and located in the same network domain In this case an account should be created on the remote SQL Server computer for the Windows user currently authorized on the computer where Axxon Smart is being installed To use a specific user name and password for SQL Server connection select the Use User Name and Password radio button and enter the user name and password in the fields below Figure 1 2 3 12 iF AuxON Smart 1 0 1 471 Database Server Choice Database Server and authentication method Choose Database Server From the list local SGLEXPRESS Choose user identification procedure based on system user account or SOL Server identity check Use Windows user acc
233. name 4 Cte inet T crt te Figure 12 3 2 4 12 3 3 Titles display setup in the surveillance window The receipts from the POS terminal are displayed as titles over the video image from the camera monitoring this terminal To set up the titles display use the Titles tab of the Camera object settings panel Do the following Figure 12 3 3 1 315 10 pa Camera 7 ee et Camera 3 3 Grabber 5 pe Camera 9 hon pe Camera 10 3 Grabber 6 i pg Camera 11 jo pe Camera 12 3 8 Grabber 7 poh Camera 3 p Camera 13 i pe Camera 14 3 Grabber 8 ip Camera 15 hope Camera 16 3 Grabber 3 poh Camera 17 pe Camera 18 ideo V Compression Detector Titles Highlight words Title window Word seet Coor x GY amp Fresh bananas Word Green _ ca 3 w 0 H 50 Fresh tangerines Word Tan end of the document String E Yellow Font Courier Hew beginning of the document String E Yellow cece Oo Word E Black or a Show titles Figure 12 3 3 1 Check uncheck the checkbox for color highlighting of the specified symbol sequences words in the titles displayed in the monitor In the Word column enter the symbol sequence word to highlight In the Select column choose the highlighting method Two options are available e To highlight just the symbol sequence word select Word e To highlight the whole line select String In the Color column select the color to be us
234. nd height Position X Y are set up in the Parameters tab of the settings panel for the Monitor object Figure 5 7 2 1 The values for the monitor position are given in per cent of the screen size 120 TET Grabber amp Bae Grabber 7 a Grabber 8 Grabber 9 Grabber 10 a Grabber 11 E Grabber 12 Hg Grabber 13 Avge Audio 1 oft Audio 2 il Audio 4 E Audio 5 ai Audio 6 Monitor 3 oY Monitor 4 CSetinas advanced General Monitor aA k C Overlay Type Overlay Type Il Allow Control panel Allow moving Hame 7 C Don t show disabled cameras Ratio 4 3 Figure 5 7 2 1 The size of the monitor window is set up in the W and H fields width and height The values for the monitor position are given in per cent of the screen size You can size the monitor by entering the required value into W field The H field can t be modified As the W value is automatically assigned to this field You can also enable disable the dragging option for the monitor window in the Allow Moving heckbox The Allow Moving checkbox if checked enables dragging the monitor window around the screen with a mouse 121 X 100 100 Figure 5 7 2 2 NOTE The Allow Moving option is available only if the control panel for the monitor is displayed 5 7 3 Setting up multi monitor systems The multi monitor systems i e hosting more than 1 monitor allow to distribute Monitor and Scen
235. neees 124 57 0 Hide IDISA DIOR Camera aaan AA A aa a Sentouuiteatieeians 125 5 7 7 Enabling the option for keeping the standard 4 3 w h window size cccccceeecceceeceeeeeecceeaueeceeansces 126 5 7 8 Selecting the monitor alarm operation mode cceeccseccsecceeccsececceeccsecceeeeeeeeuceeuceeuceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeees 127 S79 Ena pN GeEInterla cN E aen a A A E E a E 128 5 7 10 LOOMING OP UON S rrera A A E A A a S A rA O 129 5 7 11 Enabling the surveillance monitor icon in the system tray s esessessessessesersrrserseesessessessrssrsersersee 130 5 7 12 Switching on and setup of the slide show Option sssssessessessessrsrrsessessrsersrrserseeseesessessesseserserserse 131 5 7 13 Andoe MONITOR SUD sci 55i llc is aetna E ho icin dastee ae pia era atninwtioes iaumeausineeiacsinemeess aues 132 5 8 Video monitor WINDOWS vrais cciveiat cet casi can acess veneseuesencncyens eae uvsenyac esas ouvec suave weraumsneacdesessous E 133 5 8 1 Displaying the control panel tools on the video surveilance MONITOLS ccceeccsccseceeceeceeeeeeceeeeseeeess 134 5 8 2 Toolbars layout on the video INONITON a ccccceccussasnauaryaceavorses mucuaws pecteenns cum ie anlarecanicaeecae apne w ere 136 5 8 3 Changing the number of surveillance windows displayed on the video MONItOL ccceeceeeeeeeeeeees 137 5 8 4 Surveillance cameras windows layout ON the video monitor ccccceeceeeceseeeeeeenceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeness 137 S
236. ng mode During surveillance and video recording operations the detector mask is hidden from Operator for clearer viewing To disable the mask display editing mode select Processing then Detector Mask then Detection Zone N again 5 11 2 Main motion detector main motion detector zone The main detector recognizes any motion that occurs in the field of view of armed cameras main detector zone and generates alarms 5 11 2 1 Setup The main detector parameters are to be set up for each camera individually You can set up a main detector in the Detector tab of the settings panel for a Camera object The main detector is always matched to Detector Detection Zone N20 You can set up the main detector in the Detector tab of the settings panel for a Camera object using the following controls Figure 5 11 2 1 1 The Sensitivity slider Sensitivity defines the minimum movement intensity of the moving object to be distinguished from the noise snow rain etc 184 2 The Contrast slider This setting value corresponds to the detected object contrast This setting affects the operation of the motion detection algorithm It is adjusted experimentally For most cases a mid value is sufficient 3 The Filtration slider This setting corresponds to the object s upper speed threshold at which the detector must trigger minimum filtration value makes the system detect objects moving at any speed This setting allows eliminating detector t
237. ng the phone buttons 1 left 2 up 3 right 288 5 down 6 zoom in 9 zoom out NOTE Use the button to switch between live and archive modes To display e the SmartPhone software version e installed java version e free memory needed for the software e jpeg support availability e use the Phone Info menu item To quit the program use the Exit menu item 11 USER RIGHTS 11 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Axxon Smart provides flexibility in user rights setup The following generic user groups are available 1 Administrator 2 Operator with control and monitoring rights 3 Operator with monitoring rights only An account is created for each user containing the user name password and individual set of rights for administration control and or monitoring functions The Users settings panel contains two tabs Users and Rights Figure 10 4 5 1 289 Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 B PTZ 1 Line S Line 2 S Line 3 S Line 4 S Line 5 S Line 6 S Line 7 S Line 8 S Line 9 S Line 10 Users Rights 2 aa oe Rights d Administrate Default user Figure 10 4 5 1 11 2 THE USERS TAB The Users tab of the Users object settings panels allows creating an account with certain rights using the following columns in the table Name Rights User Name Password Figure 10 4 5 1 290 Audio oe Audio 8 Monitor 1 s Monitor 2 H Monitor 3 s Monitor 4 B
238. nitor To play the password protected recordings use the password that was active at the time when the recordings were made 12 POS OPERATIONS CONTROL SUBSYSTEM 12 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The Axxon Smart POS operations control subsystem provides the following functionality 297 1 Remote video and audio surveillance of the points of sale POS equipped with cash registers Simultaneous sales operation registration and video and audio recording the recording starts when the first line of the receipt is received continuous recording can be set up as well 3 Archiving of the sales information receipts and the corresponding video and audio recordings in the database for subsequent analysis of the situation 4 Searching video recordings and synchronous audio recordings by the contents of the receipts using the Titles Search window 5 Printing and exporting the reports into various formats containing textual information from the receipts and video frames corresponding to the moment of registration of specific lines of the receipt 12 2 POS TERMINAL CONNECTION SCHEMES If the POS terminal for example IBM4614 has an available COM port and can send the receipt text to this port the following connection scheme can be realized Connect the COM port of the POS terminal to the COM port of the server Figure 11 2 2 1 Smart OEM Printer Jeet Ba ee NE B F356 POS Terminal COM Port Figure 11 2 2 1 Printer Axxon Smar
239. nnel ial k _ Activate WatchDog 6 Figure 5 4 1 18 5 4 1 4 Receiving the video Set up the Camera object of the Axxon Smart software to receive video Figure 5 4 1 19 The Video tab of the Camera object displays the number of the Grabber object that matches the ADC grabber on a FS 6C card which is processing analog video signals from the camera In the Channel Number field specify the channel number according to the BNC socket number to which the camera is physically connected As needed you can change the channel number 81 Ll Computer h i Grabber 1 A a Grabber 2 eo Camera 1 ei Camera 3 po Camera 4 ia Ray 9 Ray 10 SY Ray 11 Ey Ray 12 By Ray 13 oon Relay 10 ooo Relay 11 g Relay 12 afte Relay 13 h m Grabber 3 Grabber 4 2 W T z T4 B Aoli emel D Post alarm record U Hot record time 0 es nE Record alarms Hot rec rate _ Disable Recording rate Color Brightness Contrast a a ie 4 ima i ii p ie 2l zL lE E ee el Real tire processing recording ome E fre fl Fos Figure 5 4 1 19 5 4 1 5 P camera setup AXIS The following software is used to set up the IP cameras Figure 5 4 1 20 1 The utilities and other software included in the installation kit allowing to search for IP devices connected to the computers in the local area network and to assign IP addresses to them If the IP address is not specified for
240. nnnnnnnnnnnnnn 296 12 2 GENERAL INFORMATION sisvsessvaeviccavcanies sviwadvsdensvivesvanvcesascaniesestaaisaed ncens gens cawanan ddssonayscansans a a a 296 122 POS TERMINAL CONNECTION SCHEMES wis cosscssocscecdtccsevensadedeceacedeasdadedeenivensviededs spancevedeasdededsanieenevaeseenceas 297 12 3 POS SUBSYSTEM SETUP wicsscaccavczesavaneacsersesxiscsisenseadseeuseadavexdeedensidoss gt bas saasseanvinah cea a a R Ai 299 12 3 1 POS ODJECE SETUD sene suas voeann as suena see tuna ea AEA E AE AA 299 12 3 1 1 Selecting the camera to show the receipt titles over the video image cccceecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 299 U2 3212 POStermiNai COMMECTION SCEUD soracsaa Graces A EA T A A 300 12 3 1 3 Testing POS terminal CONNECTION ccecccecceseceseceeeceecesecaseeeeeceecceecceeseeeseeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeaaees 302 123 14 POS terminal MOGEl SElECTION sissiieutsscdictsiseaiouesisdiai E NA 304 12ko ARECCOROING IVIOGS SOLU Dacre acrcaG suse GP aevencnaadanns A E A 305 12 3 16 Receipt start and end markers SCLUD snack cautetel cetera ceeenk hens adewn sacs E 306 12 3 1 7 Removing the titles from the monitor setup ccc ceecceecceecceeececceeeceeeceeeeceeuecseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaaees 308 12 3 2 Titles database setup using the idb exe utility ce eeccecccseccseeeecceeeeeceeseeesceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeees 309 TAS AE ISIS TINS IOs OX SUTIN EY aaa a datceest tate aaiaaancuraae vaclecadcavucun uedeteauaicauuees aderaeveascnaesndees
241. ntinue using the system or click the Shutdown button to exit the system To enter the system under another account enter a new user name and password and click the Register button While the password is not entered the system operates in hidden mode We recommend using this mode when the workstation is disconnected from the security computer In this case only registered users will be able to affect the system operation intentionally or unintentionally 295 IMPORTANT If you enter an invalid user name or password three times in a row the system will be locked for 60 seconds The Main control panel contents depend on the access rights assigned to the user The following options are available 1 Administrator the System Settings item is included Figure 11 2 2 2 About programm E3 System settings amp Log OFF Zaisew T Shutdown Figure 11 2 2 2 2 Monitoring and or control operator the System Settings item is not included Figure 11 2 2 3 About program amp Log OFF Timofeeva K Shutdown Figure 11 2 2 3 3 Monitoring and or control operator with no right to shut the system down the System Settings and Shutdown items are not included Figure 11 2 2 4 ees A About program amp Log OFF Safonova L Figure 11 2 2 4 11 6 PASSWORD PROTECTION OF THE VIDEO AND AUDIO ARCHIVE To prevent unauthorized access to the video archive Axxon Smart provides password protection of the
242. o Microphone 4 Microphone 5 df Microphone 6 f Microphone 7 i ELN Microphone 8 Unused microphones Board FS 6 0 E a Add a l Figure 8 2 4 2 8 2 5 Audio subsystem setup in case of using standard soundblaster cards The IDC 16 d SUB 9 audio extension bracket Figure 8 2 5 1 is designed to connect additional audio channels up to 8 audio sources simultaneously to the internal IDB 16 socket of the FS 8 video capture card The sockets of the D SUB 25 BNC 8 cable D SUB 9 1 IDC 16 1 239 Figure 8 2 5 1 IMPORTANT The labels on the audio cable do not match the card channel numbers The DB9 socket on the card represents right channels while the DB9 socket on the bracket represents left channels Table Table 8 2 1 shows the correspondence between the DB9 channel numbers on the card and the labels on the audio cable Table 8 2 1 a S ee S a Table 8 2 2 shows the correspondence between the DB9 channel numbers on the bracket and the labels on the audio cable 240 Table 8 2 2 ee 8 2 6 Microphone object setup The standard SoundBlaster sound cards can be connected to the motherboard via the PCI socket or are integrated in the motherboard and are designed for playback of digitized audio in 2 4 6 or 8 channels and or for digitizing the analog video The sound cards usually have 1 output for headphones or speakers and 2 inputs for microphones cards with 2 or 3 outputs for
243. o eee KES Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open se E Cancel Browse Figure 5 4 2 3 The command line window will open To check the chosen IP address type ping 192 168 0 121 or any other IP address assigned by an administrator in the command line Figure 5 4 2 4 If the IP address does not belong to any device the following message will be displayed Request timeout expired c Cr WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows XP Uersion 5 1 2600 fC Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova ping 192 168 0 121 Pinging 192 168 0 90 with 32 bytes of data timed out timed out timed out timed out bee statistics for 192 168 0 90 Packets Sent 4 Hecelved O Lost 4 100 loss gt Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova gt _ Figure 5 4 2 4 2 Assign the required IP address to the Axis IP server To assign an IP address to a device in the list right click the corresponding object to open the context menu and select Set IP Address In the IP address setting panel enter the IP address and click Set IP to confirm the assignment Figure 5 4 2 5 The settings will be enabled immediately after the IP address is assigned 94 AXIS IP Utility Server View Help Pra 2 Name i CSC C dL Phar
244. o the desired positions Compression TAB Video images are compressed and transmitted in either Record to disk or Network mode Axxon Smart allows to choose Motion Wavelet compression settings An increase in compression rate leads to degradation of the video image Compression settings are adjusted in the Compression tab of the settings panel for the Camera object Figure 5 5 3 1 110 1 Setting up image Quality for the exported video You can set up poorer or better quality of the exported video with the Quality slider You can set up this value with different slider positions between max and min These match the relative maximum and minimum values 2 Motion Estimation setup The Motion Estimation defines the minimum intensity value of any delta frame point at which the given point will be covered by the delta video signal frame compressed with the Motion Wavelet Motion Estimation units are relative The Motion Estimation parameter can take values from 5 to 255 Default value 7 Decreasing this value enhances the quality of compressed video However the archive size increases adding load onto the communication channels during the video transmission over the network 3 Keyframe rate settings The Keyframe Each defines how often the key full frames are inserted in the video compressed using the Motion WaveLet algorithm The Keyframe Each parameter can take values from 1 to 100 By default it is eq
245. ocal network of the surveillance system valid IP addresses should be assigned Before assigning the IP address to the Axis network camera do the following 1 Ensure that the Axis camera is turned on and connected to the network Receive a unique IP address from the network administrator 3 Ensure that the device displays its own MAC address correctly The MAC address is identical to the serial number for Axis cameras To assign the IP address to the Axis network camera do the following 1 Check if this address does not belong to other devices This is done using the Windows command line To display the command line click Run in the Windows Start menu Enter cmd in the Open field of the Run dialog box then click OK Figure 5 4 1 22 SS 8X A Type the name of a program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open Cancel Browse Figure 5 4 1 22 The command line window will open To check the chosen IP address type ping 192 168 0 90 or any other IP address assigned by the administrator in the command line Figure 5 4 1 23 If the IP address does not belong to any device the following message will be displayed Request timeout expired 84 e C2 WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows HP Version 5 1 2600 LC Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova gt ping 192 168 0 90 Pinging 192 168 0 90 with 32 b
246. of the FS 8 card Table 5 3 3 a aaa Resolution pixels Daaa Video input rate per non multiplexed channel per card fps PAL NTSC Total video input rate for all multiplexed channels fps PAL 128 704 288 352 288 standard 96 704 576 full Total video input rate for all multiplexed channels fps NTSC 160 640 240 320 240 standard 76 640 480 full Total video input rate for non multiplexed channels fps PAL 200 240 NTSC Number of ray lines 4 16 Galvanic isolation V 2000 Open collector interface 24 V 30 mA Audio digitizing frequency kHz 8 16 32 Watchdog hardware control of OS hang up Yes 5 3 3 HARDWARE COMPRESSION CARDS 5 3 3 1 Introduction The WS hardware compression cards use the Motion Wavelet algorithm to digitize and compress up to 4 channels of live video Besides these cards can digitize up to 8 audio channels in parallel with the video processing The WS 7 card is a four channel PCI card for hardware video processing WS 17 is a four channel PCl express card for hardware video processing allowing the high speed transmission of the digitized compressed signal over the PCl express bus Each WS 7 or WS 17 card has four analog digital converters ADC thus each WS 7 or WS 17 is represented by 4 Grabber objects in the Axxon Smart system Each ADC processes one video signal Thus each video capture card processes video from up to 4 cameras depending on the available video channel
247. oice modem should be installed in the computer NOTE A A voice modem should be installed in the computer to send voice messages Axxon Smart supports any voice modems with no audio flow encoding compression or the modems using the following audio encoding algorithms 4 bit Rockwell ADPCM 7200 Hz 4 bit IMA ADPCM 4800 Hz 4 bit IMA ADPCM 7200 Hz 4 bit IMA ADPCM 8000 Hz 8 bit unsigned linear PCM at 7200 Hz 8 bit unsigned linear PCM at 8000 Hz 4 bit Rockwell ADPCM 7200 Hz 8 bit u law G 711 at 8000 Hz 8 bit A law G 711 at 8000 Hz NOTE B Remember that if Axxon Smart configuration includes the POS subsystem then COM1 port is used by POS subsystem by default Figure 10 1 4 1 and Figure 10 1 4 2 show the Call object setup procedure 1 Enable disable the voice message control To send a voice message upon registering an event check the checkbox in the left column in the corresponding row To disable sending voice messages uncheck the checkbox NOTE If any value is selected in the Device Event Modem Dial Type Sensitivity Delay columns this checkbox is checked automatically 2 Select on which device an event should occur to trigger sending the voice message Select a device in the Device column A particular camera detection zone ray or the All Cameras value All Rays can be specified In the latter case the control will apply to all devices of this type registered in Axxon Smart 3 Select an event on the selected device
248. omatically The number of tabs to be created is determined by the license key file 12 3 1 1 Selecting the camera to show the receipt titles over the video image In the Camera drop down list Figure 12 3 1 2 select the camera to monitor the POS terminal in question Depending on the Camera object setup the text of the receipts printed by this POS terminal will be displayed over the video image from this camera 300 NOTE A POS object POS N tab can be linked to one camera only a camera can receive the receipt texts titles from one POS terminal only Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 Line 24 Phe Line 25 Telemetry panel System security service E Schedule tect Posi Receipts processin camera FF Tema Cah e Words to recording s beginning Connecti i Record modes separator Type Continuous record Beginning of the document TEF p15 Words for recording s ending Recording time eo Ser separator _ Motion Detector End of the document Speed Parity Corr Receipts only Beic Repeats processing Disabl Clear screen if there is no data received within T f 19 Figure 12 3 1 2 12 3 1 2 POS terminal connection setup To receive the receipts from the POS terminal do the following in the Connection Settings section Figure 12 3 1 3 301 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ot Line 25 Telemetry panel E System sec
249. one then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 The Sensitivity parameter specifies the minimum detected loss of sharpness calculated as the difference between the average number of contours and the number of contours in the received frame 4 The Filtration slider This parameter specifies the upper limit of object speeds that do not trigger the alarm sone Relay 11 one Relay 12 one Relay 13 Grabber 3 wai Camera 4 eh Camera 5 oC Camera 6 Grabber 4 ph Camera 7 on ph Camera 8 3 Grabber 5 pea Camera 9 on pe Camera 10 3 4 Grabber 6 Video Advanced Compression eteco Tile Detection zone Direction No BE Name iv Alarmed Always armed Filtration Size Sensitivity Contrast View v Show Detection frequency Edo O Detector type Activity Frame scale Figure 5 11 5 1 5 11 5 2 Detector in operation This detector reacts to any change in video camera position The video signal stability detector is used to identify deliberate or accidental camera signal distortion The detector operation is based on a comparison between each frame s parameters and the average parameters It uses high frequency filtration to detect the objects contours if they are distinct enough 5 11 6 B
250. onitor the object but will forbid controlling it To disable archive viewing uncheck the checkboxes of specific cameras in the Archive column The system can be set up to forbid operators from exiting Axxon Smart shutting down the local system If system shutdown is forbidden for an operator the Shutdown item is not included in the Run menu of the Main control panel In this case exiting the system is possible upon entering the password of the administrator or operator with shutdown rights To forbid the user from shutting down the system uncheck the Exit checkbox 11 4 DEFAULT USER The default user must be set up for automatic user authorization on Axxon Smart startup The default user can be set up in the Users tab of the Users object Create a user account beforehand To set up the default user do the following Figure 11 2 2 1 1 Check the Default User checkbox 2 Select the desired user account in the drop down list below 294 Ei Audio 2 see Audio 3 Audio 4 Users Rights O Name Rights faisev T Administrate zaisey Timofeeva kK Control tima Safonova L Monitoring saf O Administrate Q beatus D1 Zai D2 EEBSAI Figure 11 2 2 1 11 5 AUTHORIZATION WINDOW Loom EF nter password Figure 11 2 2 1 The authorization window contains the Login and Enter Password fields and the Register and Shutdown buttons Click the Register button after entering the user name and password to start or co
251. ontrolled scene Detected moving objects are outlined on screen 5 11 3 1 Setup The motion is detected by calculating gradients between consequent frames The detector is set up using the settings panel Figure 5 11 3 1 1 To enable the auto recording option for the selected camera when a detector zone is alarmed check Alarmed Note A If the Recording alarms option in the Camera object settings is deactivated then no video recording is performed after the detector has triggered Note B If alarm recording option is disabled in the settings of the given detector zone then arming this zone is ineffective though the name of the zone in the functional menu of video surveillance window is highlighted by yellow square 2 When Always Alarmed is checked the detection zone cannot be disarmed from the surveillance window 3 When Show is checked a moving object is outlined in the surveillance window The Color drop down list It specifies the color for the outlining of a moving object 5 The Sensitivity slider Sensitivity defines the minimum movement intensity of the moving object to be distinguished from the noise snow rain etc 6 The Contrast slider This setting value corresponds to the detected object contrast This setting affects the operation of the motion detection algorithm You set it up based on experience and observation For most cases a mid value is sufficient 7 The Filtration slider This setting corresponds to th
252. operate the surveillance monitor ccceccecceeceecencceeceecenccseeeeceseeseeeeceueeseeeess 168 5 10 USING THE VIDEO ARCHIVE iicicens vier dceavsnscacocavetev estes ATOE OEA AE O O EA T 169 5 10 1 Archive Dla VO ACK OCS craie a a 170 5 10 2 Archive TOOLASe playbacku EEE A T N A N 172 5 10 3 Archive Ma VIS AU OM aicaconraiseceisnanseeSoececuestess a a aa a a a a a 172 5 10 4 Date and time indication during recording playback cccccssccsecsecescceecceuecseeceeeceeeeeeaseeaeceeeeees 173 5 10 5 Searching recordings in the archive by time StaM ccccceeccsecceeceeccecceeeeeeeeeuceeueceeeeseeeseeeeeeaaees 174 5 10 6 Synchrono s recordings DIV DdC escssssccessasenctacdanaesdnesasaannnerreeaiiesuantienans a A N a 175 5 10 7 Video SEQUENCE EXPO rnrn A EAA A A a E N a ie cetetades 176 SIL DETECTORS parn E AEE AA ES aes vonsensauarereecenedes 177 5 11 1 AGGING and removing detectors ann a E invests insnacsineresasesues 178 SIECI Usinge GOLCCTION ZONES eon a manie eaten orks 180 SAREL SIMIASKING sicsast vate ralevaicgatevotetn a a R ia eiaduea os a E aieettentedestons 181 5 11 2 Main motion detector Main motion detector ZONE cccceccceecceeccsecenceesceeeceeceeeceeeceseeegeeaneeeeees 183 aoe Mme 0 Nee eRe Re RO TCE a en ne erro ee ee ae a Or ee See 183 SIL Detector moped UO uated hasetasibacciceite A adden A A EE winan onan A 185 5 11 3 WIOTION detectoren A a a a a a a a a a a a 186 SLL SEUD ienie A A A T a a a a 18
253. ount Use user name and password User name ltatyana makarova cti cta ct pta i ot Password Next Cancel Figure 1 2 3 12 22 This mode of connection is available in the following cases 1 The SQL Server from the Axxon Smart installation disk and the Axxon Smart software are installed on the same computer Then you can connect to the SQL Server with this user name and password from any remote computer located in the same TCP IP network domain as the SQL Server computer 2 The SQL Server from the Axxon Smart disk and Axxon Smart are installed on different computers connected via TCP IP and are located in the same network domain Then the user name and password specified here should match the user name and password used to access the SQL Server Step 11 The files are being copied into the Axxon Smart program folder Wait until the process is finished To cancel the installation click Cancel Figure 1 2 3 13 i Ankon Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup l Installation progress Please wait while the Setup Wizard installs Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 This action will take same time and depends on computer s configuration and software that already installed Status Validating install EEEE Cancel Figure 1 2 3 13 Step 12 After all files are copied the installation wizard will inform you that the Axxon Smart installation is complete To confirm click Finish Figure 1 2 3 14 23 ia AxxOnN Smart 1 0 1 470
254. owser and enter the video server IP address The browser can be opened on the video server locally as well We recommend this for module testing 2 For wide area network Internet operation A fixed static IP address should be allocated by an Internet provider in this case Any computer connected to the Internet can access the video server The user opens the browser and enters the IP address or URL The routing parameters from the internal to the external network should be specified Figure 10 3 1 1 shows the diagram of the system using a router for forwarding the requests from the Internet to the video server in the internal sub network Let s take an example of using the router in case of an external request from the Internet Consider External Request 1 in Figure 10 3 1 1 External Request 1 has been sent to the following IP address 216 171 63 226 Upon receiving the request the router forwards this request according to certain rules to the 192 168 0 50 IP address in the internal sub network where the AXXON Web Server is installed 273 INTERNET External Request 1 External IP assigned by the provider Internat subnetwork IP 216 171 63 226 IP 192 168 0 1 External Request 2 ROUTER ITV Web Server WORKSTATION 1 WORKSTATION 2 WORKSTATION 3 WORKSTATION N IP 192 168 0 50 IP 192 168 0 60 IP 192 168 0 61 IP 192 168 0 62 IP 197 168 0 NN Figure 10 3 1 1 10 4 1 Web Server module setup Java R
255. phone PTZ line Object PTZ control gt Object PTZ device 12 In the field 7 of the table Figure 3 3 3 2 7 state name of the model of IP device 48 Note To change brand and model in the table of IP device dropdown lists should be used are called with the click of i button on the right of the corresponding column 13 When necessary in the field 8 of Figure 3 3 3 2 change the user name for connection to IP device on default factory name is stated 14 When necessary in the field 9 of Figure 3 3 3 2 change the password for connection to P device on default factory name is stated Note To display password set the cursor in any place of the given password 15 In the field 10 of Figure 3 3 3 2 device s Ip address is displayed unaccessible for editing 16 When necessary in the field 11 of Figure 3 3 3 2 change the connection ort of IP device to the Intellect Server 17 To change objects tree according to the given settings click Apply button Figure 3 3 3 2 12 Note Number of objects accessible for adding to the tab Hardware are automatically displayed in the table Availiable hardware Figure 3 3 3 2 13 18 In result in the objects tree the required changes will be displayed Figure 3 3 3 3 heg Relay 1 ake Relay 2 oath Relay 3 Log Relay 4 Sag Grabber 2 spe Camera 3 on pea Camera 4 2 EERE hon pea Camera 5 Bsa Grabber 4 ph Camera 6 ph Camera 7 ope Camera 8 Bg Grabber 5 pes Camera 9
256. pplication start computer re start to restore the service Figure 2 3 3 1 39 C Computer Management i S oj x m Fil Action View Window Help es Mm Eene e ai Computer Management Local cm System Tools lg Event Viewer Shared Folders sa Services Description Ss MET Runtime Optim Microsoft stop the Service ity Alerter Notifies sel Restart the service Application Layer Gateway Service HAES Local Users and Groups H Performance Logs and Alerts beeen Sa Device Manager aS Storage so Application Layer G Provides s iy Application Manage Provides s ae ASP NET State Service Provides s iy Automatic Updates Enables th Description Provides support For 3rd party protocol plug ins For Internet Connection Sharing ag Removable Storage j Disk Defragmenter deme Disk Management and the Windows Firewall 84 Background Intellig Transfers SEE Services and Applications 84 ClipBook Enables cli ba Services ity COM Event System Supports 5 ity COM System Appl Manages t iy Computer Browser Maintains 4 ity Cryptographic Servi Provides th DCOM Server Proce Provides la iy DHCP Client Manages n iy Distributed Link Tra Maintains li Bi eo ge a a je ia y Extended Standard fh WMI Control E SQL Server Configuration Me C So Indexing Service eee eee eee Figure 2 3 3 1 2 4 Clo
257. provides the software zoom for video images The CPU and RAM resources of your PC are used to run the software zoom You can run the hardware zoom to re allocate resources used for zooming in Thus using extra video card resources for the hardware zoom you can free up the CPU and RAM resources of your PC NOTE Some video cards do not support the hardware zooming If this is the case you should use the software zoom to prevent skewing You can select a zooming option by checking Hardware Zoom or Software Zoom in the Zoom settings panel Figure 5 7 10 1 130 em Audio 2 Audio 3 Audio 4 PTZ 1 e Line 1 E Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 S Line 6 S Line 7 Zoom O Software Sequence tec el Enable deinterlacing by default Figure 5 7 10 1 5 7 11 Enabling the surveillance monitor icon in the system tray Use the monitor icon in the Windows OS system tray to restore the surveillance monitor and pin it on top of other windows This is handy to jump to the monitor while working with multiple objects at a time e g overlapping monitors scenes PTZ windows By default the video monitor is not displayed in the Windows OS system tray To enable this option go to the General tab of the Monitor object settings panel and check Show in System Figure 5 7 11 1 NOTE This will show the icon of the video surveillance monitor in the System Tray To complete setting up the monitor icon in the Windows OS
258. r JPG frame exported from Axxon Smart The utility executable file is located in the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder To verify the frame authenticity click the Open button and select the file containing the frame using the standard file opening dialog box Figure 12 4 9 1 To select another file format BMP or JPG use the File Type drop down list 338 x Look in gt export de ci E 01 26 02 09 17 24 10 jpg My Recent Documents Deskto p My Documents My Computer a Mi Network File name a Places Files of type JPEG Files jpa jpeg Cancel we Figure 12 4 9 1 The verification results will be displayed in the window below If the selected file was not saved using the Axxon Smart software or was changed afterwards the Verification failed message will be displayed Figure 12 4 9 2 EA signCheck Fa CAD ocuments and Settings tatyana makarvasDesktop sins jp Verfication failed Figure 12 4 9 2 If the file passes the test the creation and exporting dates source camera number software name network name of the exporting computer and the name of the user who exported the frame are displayed Figure 12 4 9 3 339 xl G C SmarleM export 26 02 09 12470 jpg IT export frame Frame time 26 02 09 17 24 10 Export time 26 02 09 17 24 14 Camera 1 Sytem Smart0E ha Computer M NERAYATA User tatvana makarova
259. r icon on the taskbar after the system startup The POS Server window will open Figure 12 3 1 6 POS soro p moseas Figure 12 3 1 6 The window outlined in red displays the data after preliminary processing Figure 12 3 1 7 Readable text in this window indicates that the POS terminal is connected correctly 304 POS server _ O x File View Clear Tools Help POS 1 GET_SUPPORTED_POS POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt id lt 1 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 1 gt id lt 1 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 1 gt id lt 2 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 2 gt id lt 2 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 2 gt id lt 3 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 3 gt id lt 3 gt POS 1I SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 3 gt id lt 4 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 4 gt id lt 4 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 4 gt id lt 5 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 5 gt id lt 5 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 5 gt id lt 6 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 6 gt id lt 6 gt POS 1 SEND_ CAM ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 6 gt id lt 7 gt POS 1 SEND_CAM_TITLE ip_address lt 127 0 0 1 gt parent_id lt 7 gt id lt 7 gt
260. ras send the same image or some cameras send no image The cameras may be set up for the same channel Verify the camera settings Channel Number drop down list and assign different channels to the cameras if matching channels are found 15 3 Possible problems in IP devices setup IP device setup problems are usually caused by an invalid IP address and or non integrated P device firmware In the first case Figure 15 2 4 1 use the setup utilities for IP devices and Web interface In the second case Figure 15 2 4 2 install the integrated firmware ey CA WINDOWS system32 CMD exe Microsoft Windows KP Version 5 1 2600 CG Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings sAdministrator sping 192 168 0 253 192 168 060 253 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out iRequest timed out KHequest timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 0 253 Packets Sent 4 Received 0 Lost 4 100 loss gt C Documents and Settings Administrator gt Figure 15 2 4 1 367 Live view AXIS 207 Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help sek X z x al FN JO search ST Favorites ral 2 2 x LJ ee rel Address a http 192 168 0 160 view index shtml gt Go Links Snagit Si AXIS 207 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Video format Trigger Snapshot Motion se E 00 oO Playmg Motion JPEG Click here to install or upgr
261. rding to the desired rights In the Login column enter the user name for logging in the system In the Password column enter the password for logging in the system Repeat the password in the second Password column 292 il Audio 2 olf Audio 3 if Audio 4 olf Audio 5 Monitor fi Monitor Line 8 Users O Name NI Rights O N Logn Password Password i EEE Faisew T Administrate EE i i Control i ee Safonova L Monitoring ee Administrate 2 Default user Figure 11 2 2 1 11 3 THE RIGHTS TAB if Audio 2 s Audio 3 i Audio 4 if Audio 5 E Monitor E Monitor Monitor 1 Ray 1 Monitor 2 Ray 2 Monitor 3 Ray 3 Monitor 4 Ray 4 Timofeeva K Safonova L Figure 11 2 2 1 293 Axxon Smart allows to distinguish the operators with the rights for 1 Monitoring and control 2 Monitoring only To set up individual user rights select an account in the Rights tab of the Users object settings panel The User list displays the accounts of all users registered in the system Use the Access section to set up individual access rights To enable disable monitoring or control of the system objects monitors cameras rays or relays check uncheck the corresponding checkboxes in the left untitled column of the lists Unchecking the Hide checkbox will allow the user to monitor the object but will forbid hiding the object from the screen Unchecking the Control checkbox will allow the user to m
262. re 2 5 3 1 The information tips box displays the error messages The Interface Menu button allows starting and closing the user monitors the Scene object PTZ control windows POS operations video control windows as well as starting the Moment Quest module The Run button allows opening the System Settings window closing the session by an authorized user new user authorization and system shut down To hide the Main control panel move the cursor away from it 3 2 STARTING AND CLOSING THE USER INTERFACE The Axxon Smart user interface comprises of the Monitor the PTZ and the POS Up to 4 video surveillance monitors are available to an operator The system settings determine which Monitor objects are available To open or close an interface window use the Interface Menu button in the Main control panel The Interface menu that opens contains the list of Monitor objects and their interface objects PTZ POS To open an interface window click the Interface Menu button then select the required Monitor in the list The selected object in the list will be indicated by the dot inside the circle To open several Monitors repeat the procedure for each of them To close a user window click the Interface Menu button then select the required Monitor in the list To close all interface windows click the Hide All item in the Interface Menu Figure 2 5 3 1 43 pay Telemetry panel mh POS Hide al Figure 2 5 3 1 NOTE If the syst
263. re 7 5 3 1 Axxon Smart supports the joystick Figure 7 5 3 1 Any joystick with USB interface can be used Any PTZ camera is automatically assigned to the joystick 128 buttons are supported HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE AXXON SMART SMART TELEMETRY ood bi ZOOM_IN 2 ZOOM_OUT 231 128 AUTOF Table 7 5 2 describes th AUTOFOCUS ON AUTOPAN END P AUTOPAN START AUTOPAN START P AUTOPAN STOP CLEAR PRESET D2OFF D2ON DOWN FOCUS IN FOCUS OUT FOCUS STOP GO PRESET HOME IRIS CLOSE IRIS OPEN IRIS STOP LEFT LEFT DOWN LEFT_UP PATROL_LEARN PATROL_ PLAY PATROL_STOP RIGHT OCUS_ON e complete list of available controls Table 7 5 2 Control Enable auto focus Set the autopen auto move end point Start autopen auto move Set the autopen auto move start point Stop autopen auto move Clear the selected preset Disable additional dynamic settings for the Panasonic PTZ cameras designed to enhance the analog video signal quality Enable additional dynamic settings for the Panasonic PTZ cameras designed to enhance the analog video signal quality Pan the camera down Zoom in Zoom out Stop the zooming Pan the camera to a preset position Pan the camera to the original home position Close the iris Open the iris Stop the iris Move the camera to the left Move the camera down and to the left Move the camera up and to the left Start patrol programming by recording the camera movement
264. re protection key will be installed automatically in this case To install the workstation configuration of the system choose Remote Workstation Click Next to confirm your choice Figure 1 2 3 7 18 i AHON Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Setting up the Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 configurat Choose software configuration Choose 4xxon Smart 1 0 1 470 configuration you This system component can be prefer press Nest button to proceed used For configuration of your video system and will manage Video Server the Functionality of the whole system IF you plan to use Remote Operator Workplace additional hardware equipment in vour system capture boards sound cards etc or manage other video components or units vou must choose this component Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 7 Step 7 Installation of license key file window will open Figure 1 2 3 8 Enter your Axxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 license key and click Next to continue i AxxOnN Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Installation of license key file Choose your Axxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 license key File To proceed with the installation you should define your Axccon Smart v 1 0 1 470 license key File To choose your Axxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 license key File click on Browse button press Meck button to proceed C Documents and Settings tatyana makarovalDesktoplasxon smartiwls Key Browse Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 8 19 Step 8 You
265. reated in the object tree of the Settings panel under the Grabber object up to 4 Ray and Relay objects in case of 4 4 ray relay card and up to 16 Ray and 4 Relay objects in case of a 16 4 card The location of the Ray and Relay objects in the object tree can be changed The Ray and Relay objects can be placed under any Grabber object corresponding to any ADC of the video capture card where the ray relay card is physically installed 9 5 1 Ray object setup To set up the Ray object do the following Figure 9 5 1 1 1 Inthe Board drop down list specify the Grabber object number corresponding to the ADC of the video capture card where the ray relay card is installed 2 Inthe Channel drop down list specify the channel number according to the input number DI of the socket s to which the ray is physically connected 3 Inthe Camera drop down list select the number of the Camera object to assign the Ray object to This assignment is used when an Alarm event is automatically generated upon the ray triggering and for the Ray object indication in the surveillance window of the camera The video image from the selected camera will be displayed in the video surveillance window 4 Inthe Name field specify a name for the Ray object which will identify the ray s interface elements in the surveillance monitor 5 Select the ray triggering mode On Closing or On Opening 6 To display the ray icon in the assigned camera surveillance window c
266. ress NOTE In case of an invalid or absent default router IP address the camera will fail After the camera IP address has been set up start setting up the Axxon Smart software for interaction with the Axis camera 5 4 1 5 4 Possible errors in the IP cameras setup The possible IP device settings errors mostly include an invalid IP address Figure 5 4 1 30 or non integrated firmware Figure 5 4 1 31 If the IP address is invalid use the Web interface or the utilities to set up the valid address In case of non integrated firmware install the integrated firmware 89 p p aps een re eee nna tem3 z2 cmd exe Microsoft Windows AP Version 5 1 2600 LC Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C N Documents and Settings tat yana makarova gt ping 192 168 0 90 Pinging 192 168 0 90 with 32 bytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 0 90 Packets Sent 4 Kece1ved O Lost 4 100 loss gt Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova _ E l l x Pa a Mpaskra Bha Fla pahkhoe Cepehc Cnpaska gt Hasan gt x A P Novick Se Usdpannoe 4 ae H J Bx Live view AXIS 215 PTZ Network Camera Microsoft Int Agpec http 192 168 0 253 viewsindex shtml E Mepexoa Links a AXIS Live Y Wideo format Source Tea Up TILT Flaymng MPEG 4 usma Unicast RTF
267. riggering on the noise snow rain etc NOTE To setup a motion detector properly assign minimum initial values to the Sensitivity Contrast and Filtration parameters The Sensitivity is selected so that the detector does not trigger on the static image 4 The Size slider This setting value corresponds to the part of the total frame square occupied by the smallest detected object The detector triggers an alarm if it detects the movement of an object bigger than the specified size The setting is adjusted experimentally by selecting the minimum object size that does not generate false alarms 185 3 Grabber 5 on pe Camera 9 pal Camera 10 Grabber 6 peal Camera 11 pal Camera 12 a Grabber 7 pa Camera 3 pal Camera 13 i pa Camera 14 3 Grabber 8 on ph Camera 15 pal Camera 16 _ Nideo V Advanced Compression Detector Titles Detection zone Direction No 1 arg ee min lisardon Sensitivity Name Main 2 Contrast Alarmed Always armed Filtration Detector type Detection frequency Color Activity Frame scale smart oem Monitor 1 amp C 2x mm zs se e mis gt 8 5fps 60932 800x600 SESS sA SAUS SEON R E gt y Oi ttti t AL 186 A detector recognizes moving objects within the controlled scene When motion is detected it triggers and alarms the camera Figure 5 11 2 2 5 11 3 Motion detector A motion detector recognizes moving objects within the c
268. rrent frame size in kilobytes is displayed next to the camera name in the bottom left corner Telemetry speed Applet messages parameter 10 4 4 Using the browser to operate the web server The Axxon Smart can be set up for remote video surveillance using the web browser telemetry speed Messages name value namez Web Server video surveillance makes use of the Web browser and the TCP IP communication environment The set of cameras displayed in the Web Server monitor is determined at the Web Server setup and can include any cameras of the surveillance system connected to the same or different video servers 278 To start the Web Server video surveillance monitor enter its IP address in the address line of the Web browser and press Enter Figure 10 4 4 1 The login window will open requesting you to enter the user name and password defining user rights and privileges Figure 10 4 4 1 NOTE If user rights authorization is not enabled in the Axxon Smart system no users are registered the login window is not displayed upon Web Server startup 279 4 WebServer Client Microsoft Internet Explorer _ Ioj x Back gt r x B A Kq Search Ke Favorites Ea E a lw rel Address http 10 0 1 133 g co Links Snagit Fe e Bj a i iii WebServer client 20 01 09 15 09 11 Select camera Rec stop N tocat intranet A Disarm a e Applet e
269. rsor appears at the centre of the video surveillance window 149 Monitor 1 15 20 20 T ee d Camera b Show titles b pE Zoom gt 9 Magnifier be Sharpness ee Contrast Contour vy Detector mask Export Stop recording Disarm 1520 20 F Figure 5 9 1 4 To create the mask over the surveillance window image do the following 1 Move the cursor to the video image and press the left mouse button AO ox 7 7fps 13122 320x240 w AAA yN 15 20 20 F CARH HAKKAR HH MS 5 20 20 FZ 2 Drag the cursor diagonally still holding the mouse button pressed a rectangular field is created 3 Release the left mouse button A rectangular netted pattern mask will be displayed over the image indicating the area where motion detection is disabled Figure 5 9 1 5 150 EB oxxon Smart _ Monitor 1 a OO ax CIEE wii lt e 14fps 8270 320x240 CE RUGS GeKKeeAEs SACK Ses Figure 5 9 1 5 To delete edit the main detector mask right click and hold the mouse button then drag the cursor across the image NOTE This is the only way to delete a mask After exiting the masking mode the netted pattern over the image becomes invisible but the defined mask persists You can check this by re entering the masking mode During surveillance and video recording operations the main detector mask is hidden from the operator for clearer viewing of the entire image To di
270. rt and all its modules By default None is selected Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 Line 24 Module Status Response time sec Number of restarts Ot time Period type Restart y telemetry 3564 started 1 pos 3860 af webserver 3881 started 4f cam title 264 started y telemetry pane started af vms 1484 started af titleviewer z58 started y audio 2592 started hours none yi sms 3680 started hours none es oll a bowb J 4 Deven __ Pon hours none hours none hours none hours none hours none hours none hours none FSIYSO EN ca EDMESH SUED KS KS YS Se SES KS ES eS d Hi ss es es a Hd Figure 10 1 4 1 10 3 WATCHDOG The Watchdog cable Figure 10 1 4 1 is used to enable the restart of the computer after failure The Watchdog cable has 2 PBD 2 sockets 270 Figure 10 1 4 1 A specialized cable is included with the video capture card for connecting the Watchdog hardware performance tester to the video servers with video capture cards installed Figure 10 1 4 1 A specialized socket for connecting the Watchdog cable is provided on each video capture card Figure 10 1 4 2 Figure 10 1 4 2 To connect the Watchdog to the video server with video capture cards installed do the following Disconnect the cable connecting the motherboard to the Reset button of the system unit from the motherboard Figure 10 1 4 3 Connect the cable from the Reset button
271. ry isc 0 E3 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 B5 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 g Titl Connectio Query isc 0 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 24 02 2009 16 26 28 EEN Titl Connectio Query is c 0 19 26 26 24 02 2009 16 26 28 E Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Visa 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 EN Titl Connmectio Query is c 0 Balance Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 EN Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Em Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 5 Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Titl Connectio Query is c 0 Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Ea Tit Connectio Quer isc 0 Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 13 23 1 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Amex 92 01 Balance Due 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Lee Out 2A N INNA 16 70 90 Figure 12 4 9 4 13 UTILITIES 13 1 GENERAL INFORMATION This section describes the Axxon Smart utility programs Figure 12 4 9 1 333 f C Axon Smart Tools File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ack a Bi Search Folders x ie m Address E Ciasexon SmartiTools Go Date Modified JH dudioWizard exe 1192 KE
272. s Start patrolling Stop patrolling Move the camera to the right N UW N RIGHT _DOWN Move the camera down and to the right RIGHT_UP Move the camera up and to the right SET_PRESET Save current position to selected preset STOP Stop moving the camera 8 AUDIO SUBSYSTEM 8 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The following audio input devices can be used in the audio subsystem 1 Standard sound cards installed in personal computers or integrated into motherboards Multi channel sound cards Comart Hera MidiMan Delta Olkha 9P The Ekholot USB 32 external hardware module for multi channel audio input 32 channels Audio inputs of the network devices Audio inputs of the FS WS cards Due to an absence of audio output from these cards a sound card is needed for audio playback The audio subsystem supports the following functions oe YY PP Processing the audio signal Storing audio data Transmitting audio data Audio playback Voice notification A standard sound card usually provides one stereo input To increase the number of audio input channels do one of the following p Por Use standard stereo input as two mono inputs Use FS WS card audio inputs Use multi channel audio input cards Use the Ekholot USB 32 external hardware module for multi channel audio input 32 channels 8 1 1 The file structure used for storing audio files If the audio is recorded together with video the audio files will be saved o
273. s the date and time box in the bottom right corner can be used to search the desired fragment by entering the date and time criteria To display the desired recording frame enter its date and time into the date time box To enter the date and time criteria do the following Figure 6 2 4 6 1 Double click the date time box The first digit in the box will turn green indicating the editing mode Enter the time value 3 Similarly enter the date value the date can be also entered using the calendar 220 4 Press Enter on the keyboard The system will search for the desired video fragment according to the criteria with up to 1 second definition and display the first frame of the found recording 221 E oxxon Smart Scene 1 a g Ax o HAOn Aung a CZELE 5900 of 02 03 04 05 o6 0 o D 10 1i 12 13 5 if x gt ne jni zA April 2008 MT Wisk FS S a1 Acasa 4 amp 6 7 86 91011 1213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 a gt amp HH 18 03 53 Figure 6 2 4 6 7 TELEMETRY SUBSYSTEM 7 1 INTRODUCTION Multicore cable z RS 422 485 RS 422 485 RS 232 gt RS422 485 RS 232 gt RS422 485 RS 23 es Videoserver Figure 6 2 4 1 222 To integrate the PTZ devices into the Axxon Smart system Figure 6 2 4 1 these devices must be controlled via RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces a converter from RS 485 to RS 232 is used for the latter interface Soeed dome PT
274. s Tools Help Q ek k gt x a gt Search gt Folders ly E x ie HA StartPocketPC arm CAB 12 07 2008 1 29 ea SmartPocketPCInstall exe 232 KB Application 12 07 2008 1 29 Figure 1 5 7 1 34 1 5 8 Iface This folder contains the resource dll file which holds the information about the color schemes for the Scene and Monitor interface objects These files are required for system operation so its modification or deletion is forbidden Figure 1 5 8 1 B C Akton Smart iface Oj x Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help a bak hi gt k _ Search gt Folders i x if m Address E Chaon Smartiiface Go amp Snagit er Date Modified a Smarten dll 264K6 Application Extension 09 07 2009 16 30 Figure 1 5 8 1 2 STARTING AND CLOSING THE AXXON SMART SOFTWARE 2 1 GENERAL INFORMATION There are several ways to start the Axxon Smart system Manual start e from the Start menu Programs submenu in the Windows taskbar e using the Axxon Smart shortcut on the desktop Automatic start e by placing the shortcut in the Startup menu e instead of the Windows standard shell e by installing Axxon Smart as a service 2 2 STARTING AXXON SMART FROM THE WINDOWS START MENU Generally Axxon Smart is started from the Windows taskbar Click the Start button and select the following menu sequence Start gt Programs gt Axxon Smart gt Axxon Smart Figure 1 5 8 1 35 ES Microsoft Office T TRADOS Multi
275. s detected the camera window is alerted If you disarm the camera the main motion detector is disarmed too and does not detect motion Masking the image is used to set up detailed motion detection The mask defines the image areas which will not be covered by the Apart from the main motion detectors you can use the extra ones extra motion detector face detector lost items detector image sharpening detector etc The procedures to arm disarm cameras or edit the main detector mask are different and depend on the extra active detectors 147 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a gaw gi giii p llel 7 2fps 13023 320x240 I tudy j Camera Show titles Processing Export gt Start recording Disarm CE MOMMA dattan SOCK KEES To arm a camera check Arm option in the functional menu of video surveillance window Figure 5 9 1 2 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a g aK ai W ia 7 1fps 12965 320x240 15 12 42 7 I tudy Camera Show titles Processing Export gt Start recording GHG GAM K aad Shee K ses 15 12 42 F When a camera is armed the relevant camera s ID icon and the border of the camera window become highlighted in yellow From this moment on the main detector starts motion recognition routine while recording the alarm events Video recording can be performed only if Record alarms function has been enabled for the corresponding Camera object 148 5 9 1 2 Camera disarming To disarm a camer
276. s on one WS 7 or WS 17 card The WS 7 17 cards compress video as well The digitized and compressed signal is sent to the PCI bus in two video flows e Compressed to maximum resolution for recording to the hard drive and displaying on the operator workstation e Compressed to normal resolution for local display only 67 When the WS 7 or WS 17 cards are used the processor resources are not used for compression 5 3 3 2 WS 7 WS 17 cards Figure 5 3 3 1 shows the general view of the WS 7 card General view of the WS 7 card Figure 5 3 3 1 Figure 5 3 3 2 shows the general view of the WS 17 card General view of the WS 17 card Figure 5 3 3 2 Table 5 3 4 compares the technical characteristics of WS 7 and WS 17 cards Table 5 3 4 mv Power consumption W Video inputs V Ohm 0 75 1 25 75 68 Resolution pixels or Number of multiplexed video inputs oe ee Video input rate per non multiplexed channel per 25 30 card fps PAL NTSC 69 5 3 4 Analog video out card installation Figure 5 3 4 1 Before installing the FS 6C card you may need to install additional hardware such as the analog video output card the ray relay card or the Watchdog The analog video out card allows to send the video directly from one of the cameras connected to the video capture card bypassing the digitizing to an analog monitor The analog video out card has three sockets compatible with the FS 5B
277. s the names of the POS terminals registered in Axxon Smart Titles N objects Checking the checkbox on the left includes the terminal in the search unchecking the checkbox excludes the terminal from the search NOTE Double clicking a Titles N object opens the real time video image from the camera linked to this terminal in the surveillance window 324 2 The State column indicates the connection availability between the POS terminal and the video server If connection is established the corresponding cell in this column reads Connection established NOTE If connection between Axxon Smart and the terminal is lost for example due to video server disconnection or Axxon Smart shutdown it is restored automatically after the source of the disconnection is eliminated The titles search is impossible if no connection to the terminal is established 3 The Add Info column displays the progress and the result of the search request execution After the search is completed the corresponding cells in this column read Search completed 4 The Total Recordings column displays the number of receipts found for each terminal Saar SLISI water and bananas v Parigel one 16 01 2009 1123 59 59 ig 17 01 2009 7 23 59 59 Connectio Query is c Titl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio Query is c itl f Connectio
278. sable masking select Processing then Detector Mask if only the main detector is used If auxiliary detectors are used select Processing then Detector Mask then Detector Zone 5 9 2 Video recording 5 9 2 1 Recording initiated by operator command Operator can start a recording manually initiated recording in Axxon Smart from any camera To start a recording choose the Start recording menu item from functional menu of video surveillance window Figure 5 9 2 1 This command overrides the current camera armed disarmed status 151 EB axxon Smart Monitor 1 a g SX UOCE E 12fps 7169 320x240 a UNS e AN aN A ELKANN a N 15 43 08 ay a Camara i Camera Show titles Processing Export Start recording Disarm O ONAN HACKS SACK KAS i ASS Ma A SRR N 15 43 08 P a Figure 5 9 2 1 If an alarm event is detected during recording initiated by Operator the automatic recording start command is ignored for elimination of video sequence dubbing as well as automatic stop command Only manual stop command can stop a manually initiated recording NOTE Pre event recording can not be performed if the manual recording is started via functional menu of video surveillance window 5 9 2 2 Stopping the recording An alarm event is recorded automatically as per the system settings You can manually stop a recoding triggered by an alarm To stop a recording choose the Stop recording menu item from funct
279. sarm 160303 fe Figure 5 9 4 2 Zooming in on the image To examine image details a 16x inclusive zoom can be applied To enable this mode use one of the following methods Method 1 In the surveillance window menu select Processing then Zoom Figure 5 9 4 3 The image will zoom in by a factor of 2 Point the cursor at the image left click it several times to zoom in right click it to zoom out NOTE Instead of clicking to zoom in and out you can roll the mouse wheel Push the wheel to zoom in pull the wheel to zoom out Method 2 1 Hold the Shift key and double click the image The image will zoom in by a factor of 2 2 Hold the Shift key while clicking or right clicking the image to zoom in or out respectively To exit zoom mode using the first method click the Zoom menu item again its highlighting will be removed indicating that this menu item is inactive To exit Zoom mode using the second method hold Shift and click the mouse until the image is scaled down to its original size When any area of the image is zoomed the system is still capable of analyzing events occurring in the other currently invisible to the operator areas of the scene image 163 Zoom mode does not interfere with image processing and detector operation You can move the zoom frame over the image using the mouse The zoom tool can be used along with outlining contrasting and image masking functions Monitor 1 H O Bix
280. scene Figure 6 2 4 1 3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 a o OX O MAO Aww EE CED To enter the archive video recording playback mode click the corner icon in the bottom right corner of the Scene window The playback control panel will open at the bottom of the Scene window the panel showing the recordings starting timestamps will open at the right side of the window the archive navigation timescale will open at the top Figure 6 2 4 2 Another way to switch to archive playback mode is to press the Tab key on the keyboard Select a timestamp in the panel to the right to view the first frame of the corresponding recording When you initially enter the archive playback mode the first frame of the last recorded fragment is displayed 217 NOTE The archive depth is limited by the hard disk size When the disk space runs out the earliest recordings are deleted i e the video is recorded in a loop When several logical disks are used the video is recorded sequentially to all disks When the last disk runs out of space new video is recorded onto the first disk and the cycle is repeated The video archive in this case consists of several sequential parts corresponding to several logical disks The field in the left corner of the timescale in Figure 6 2 4 2 shows the hour previous to the beginning of the timescale e if the timescale is displayed in maximum detail calibrated in minutes this field shows the current hour E o
281. search strings entered previously are displayed in the drop down list that opens by clicking the down arrow in the right corner of the Search String field Select a previous search string to add it to the current search string The previous search strings list is cleared upon the administrator command for clearing the search request history To extend the search capabilities use the AND or OR operations searching for all of the search strings in the request and searching for any one of the search strings respectively To add the AND or OR operation do one of the following e Click the lt button next to the Search String field and select AND or OR in the menu that opens Figure 12 4 3 1 e Enter the AND or OR words manually in the Search String field surrounded by space symbols 321 Period tiene 16 01 2009 235959 ram 17 01 2009 A235959 i itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio Titl Connectio itl Connectio itl Connectio itl No conne Titl No conne z Titl No conne Titl No conne z4 Titl No conne itl No conne Titl No conne Titl No conne itl No conne Fi
282. sienss tetenaseousteasstatepaiesauensseeniarieaes 271 10 4 WEB SERVER sisscscsessessvsesivenvaads rE E TAA I a a a aa 271 10 4 1 Web SERVEl MOGUIE SetU eesin ana a N N S aa 273 10 4 2 me home Pare TEM Plate escola n tec ei Masud lls Gaels sn tived dedaateeaae iaueataiantindeinwmeraebees 274 10 4 3 ADDI EU Dal alte E S cisscseeonsconsweheoninctioncaede Yeanweseteneconawebiswant on ieexndunides aa a A seep meme N N 275 10 4 4 Using the browser to operate the Web server sinini a a a N 277 10 4 5 Tatric Calculation cana andl SIS 65 sentence i555 a taivadasdacienadssauivoadudantlade tau meet iautiaes inner meeamecs 279 105 OCTET Cc ators A ec eons EEE elas enn sae seni E ceca ols enn aa ean pea S 280 10 6 SMARTPHONE iiaaaeaoe aa E AE AA E AAE E EE ces cuateeneneeamenesss 283 bE USSR NG ES zinonaninni e 288 111 GENERALINFORIVIATION ierann nine EE E O E 288 DESDE AHE USERS TAB sesute E E ET OE suse E E O E 289 11 2 1 ACCESS E ES aonr RE E E RN T te atau N E aT O 290 11 2 2 Creating a User ACCOUMES is iictats ois sone T areca T TAT T O ENA 291 DES THERIGHTS TAB rurana 292 ILA DEFAULT USER ciosan A A E A 293 11 5 AUTHORIZATION WINDOW soscsccsccicanccacicaisacscsacsavisesccsacscastcoesdeusnebdascdapeesgenduesapens aaar asaan eanan aean iae 294 11 6 PASSWORD PROTECTION OF THE VIDEO AND AUDIO ARCHIVE csssccsssccsssccssccsssccssscsssccssscesseseass 295 12 POS OPERATIONS CONTROL SUBSYSTEM sssssnssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
283. sing AXXON SMART To close the Axxon Smart software point the cursor to the top right corner of the screen to open the Main control panel click the Run arrow down button on the panel and select Shut Down in the drop down menu Figure 2 3 3 1 About program System settings IP Devices Wizard Shutdown Figure 2 3 3 1 The user authorization request window will open Figure 2 3 3 2 Ogm Ente password Figure 2 3 3 2 If the access rights management is used in the system and program settings require password authorization on closing the system enter the password After entering the password and clicking Shutdown the system shuts down If no access rights management is used the system shuts down after the Shutdown menu item is selected Figure 2 3 3 3 About program 5 System settings IF Devices Wizard amp Log OFF Elena Ryazanowa Figure 2 3 3 3 NOTE If the rights and privileges settings in Axxon Smart forbid the user to close the system the Shutdown item is not included in the Main control panel menu 2 5 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS AT AXXON SMART START UP 2 5 1 Cards or guardant drivers not loaded Aids Wipe is correct 09 A Fights Reserve Figure 2 5 1 1 The startup information window shows the Card s type is incorrect message Figure 2 5 1 1 41 Check e if the hardware is in good order e if the driver is installed NOTE The problem may occur if an old
284. sseciv tenses 35 2 2 STARTING AXXON SMART FROM THE WINDOWS START MENU sccssccssccssccssccssccssccssccsccnsscnsccsscoess 35 2 3 AUTOMATIC SPAR TD si ssaveicnsecscvccsseccscutscenstesinentevenasencuccesepentaa assess vedeusesesoeneswun ounce ounsssedsuuaoudaeeesaseabwesanteeeeass 36 2 5 AXXON SMART In the Star euiosn Criliaice iaa a senses dodvanaatt Sasssagecauweateeiiesatlaryrasceatedieat 36 2 3 2 Automatic start of AXXON SMART on computer power on instead of the standard Windows shell 36 2 3 2 1 Setting up Windows to start with NO password QUtTHOriZAatiON ccccscceeceeccscceececeseceeeeeceseeseeees 37 2302 2 FOr ed Starr OL EXOIONGN rE aE a I TA Grin saevea tad event a 38 2 3 3 Start AKKON SMART aS a SENCE nenna an a a a a aa anbewtwes 39 2 4 Clos nE AXXON SMART ecveinvseceewiiets eeto AT AE U OOA O T T E 40 2 5 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS AT AXXON SMART START UP essessessessecsecsecsesecsecsecsecsscescessecsecsecsecsecsecsecssesssee 41 2 5 4 sCaras Or SUAFOANTONVElS MOL LOAGDOO senpa a a a a a a 41 X92 Key MOL TOU O reaR AA A a N a a a a a aA 42 2523 Keydoesn t maten theta die a E a A A a eunis see aeaeeraewe 42 3 BASIC PRINCINPLES OF THE USER INTERFACE sssssnnnnnunnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 43 3 1 MAIN CONTROL PANE Lesesaal 43 3 2 STARTING AND CLOSING THE USER INTERFACE ccsscossccssccssccsccssccssccsscnsscnsccnsscssccsscosscsscnsscnssosscoess 43 3 3 THE AXAON SIVIART SETTING
285. sssseeeccccccsssssececccccccesssecececceceeessses 255 95 1 Ray Object Setup sissies eile ii al ene erates A eras 255 WSA REV 6 1 6 100 cece nce ar ee ee nee eee 256 9 6 USING THE RAYS RELAY SUBSYSTEM wsccwssccesessccceccvsceseecnecndvanateeduceceesduinewectecdegeedareawecdeshouisteanetedtielavicians 257 96k WSIS TMC aV o tae este cute deine rise aceasta AE Scueacaateuaeanae lease aia devine ee adeaidandaatiaeatiiawinereevieauaees 257 9 6 1 1 RIVICO M oae clea Goh rec A ares peas oaca beau cask beaic saan bra Cates 49 an See omnes cin oats Ga Mea ey ahaa a ee ee 258 9 6 2 Using macros and schedules in the ray ray subsystem ccccseeccecesscceceecceeeeecceeeeeceeeeeeceeseeecetsueeeenes 259 10 SERVICEMODULES iisscaissisanpinneciesnahanausissendeudvasussasauenssssssnvansnenvisunasesusacuansessiivunieaiivutetisetee 261 10 1 NOTIFICATION MODULES sicrcerss sos dicecccscctcscceausoverecedieatedacencascedescasresaveecsveuseauesiuvaveseavsnewss EENES 261 10 1 1 VOICE notification SetuP aeina ar a A a a A a a a 262 10 1 2 Short Message Service NSMS saeni N aa aa T 263 10 1 3 Electronic Mail Message Service E MAIL ssssssessssseeserserrrrsersersrrrrrsrsrrsrrserserserserserserreseeseeserseesee 264 10 1 4 VOICE Message Service call naaranmann n a N E A AR 266 10 2 SYSTEMSECURITY SERVICE sinsir csensceveaceswsvenstentucwr cans vues NETE OAE E R 268 TOS WATCHDOG cerere E N N E E O A 269 10 3 1 Watc NOOB SETUD eaen bean seennennsara
286. st Aur nuticx LWA ma Figure 1 2 3 3 Step 3 The welcome dialog screen will open The installation process is interactive Please monitor the installation process closely and enter the required information when prompted by the wizard Click Next to continue Click Cancel to cancel the installation Figure 1 2 3 4 16 is Axon Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Welcome to the A4xxon Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard will install Axxon Smart v 1 0 1 470 on your computer Click Nest to continue or Cancel to exit the Setup Wizard cone Figure 1 2 3 4 Step 4 Accept or decline the licensing agreement for using the Axxon Smart technology Click Print to print out the text of the agreement Familiarize yourself with the agreement conditions then click Next otherwise the software installation will quit Figure 1 2 3 5 ie AxxONn Smart 1 0 1 4 70 Setup End User License Aqreement Please read this text carefully It contains 4xxan Smart v 1 0 1 470 Licer Agreement You must confirm that you accept all conditions before proce End User License Agreement EULA Important Read the following terms carefully before installing copying and or using AXX ON SMART software Installing copying or using the product indicates your acceptance of these terms This AXON End User License Agreement EULA is alegal agreement between you the end user of the License nghts gran
287. subsystem setup in case of using the FS 5B video capture cards The WS 7 Figure 8 2 3 1 and WS 17 Figure 8 2 3 2 cards have 8 dedicated line audio inputs Up to six WS 7 or WS 17 cards can be installed in a single video server allowing to process up to 48 microphones The WS 7 and WS 17 cards use the sampling rate of 16 kHz General view of the WS 7 Figure 8 2 3 1 WS 7 card 237 _ General view of the WS 17 Figure 8 2 3 2 WS 17 card 8 2 4 Audio subsystem setup in case of using the FS 8 video capture cards The FS 5B cards have two audio line inputs Figure 8 2 4 1 NOTE The FS 5B cards do not have headphone outputs To play audio third party sound cards should be used for example standard SoundBlaster cards These cards provide sampling of up to 2 audio channels simultaneously Up to 4 FS 5B cards can be installed in a single video server which allows processing audio from up to 8 microphones The FS 5B cards allow choosing the 8 16 of 32 kHz sampling rates When the FS 5B card is installed select FS 6 0 in the Board drop down list in the Audio Card object settings Figure 8 2 4 2 If several FS 5B cards are installed select FS 6 0 for the first one FS 6 1 for the second one FS 6 2 for the third one and so on 238 Figure 8 2 4 1 p Camera 20 S a Grabber 11 p Camera 21 ony Camera 22 S E Grabber 12 i p Camera 23 hugg Camera 24 Sg Grabber 13 ff Microphone 2 Microphone 3 w
288. system settings panels Start TweakiAxxon Smart exe from the Tools folder or from Windows taskbar Start gt Programs gt Axxon Smart gt Tweaking utility To save changes click OK To cancel the changes click the cross button in the top right corner of the window 351 Tweaky Axxon Smart xj Delay between commands m 250 Priority delay ma 30000 Speed lirit Min peed 0 10 Max speed 0 10 AIL Secor sorh com Ok Figure 13 7 6 1 13 8 1 Windows section Table 13 8 1 describes the Windows section settings Tweaky 4xx0n Smart Edl p gt oD Video shell D Telemetry f Explorer see About File Po a Auto login l Enable User name ame Password e o Domain WANA aeeonsork com Or Figure 13 8 1 1 Table 13 8 1 cds cn 352 E Explorer loads as the Windows shell on computer power on This is the standard Windows setting It is selected by default If you select this radio button specify the file in the field below which should start upon Windows start up instead of Explorer Choosing Axxon Smart here allows restricting using this computer for other purposes This restriction is useful for workstations used for monitoring and archive viewing To start Axxon Smart instead of Explorer select the File radio button and enter the full pathname to the Axxon Smart executable in the field below for example C Axxon Smart video exe Auto ine
289. system tray restart Axxon Smart 131 oft Audio 3 i Audio 4 olf Audio 5 oof Audio E E Monitor 2 E Monitor 3 Settings Advanced General gt Camera status colors Hormal On alarm Alarm Mo connection Please restart to apply changes Figure 5 7 11 1 5 7 12 Switching on and setup of the slide show option i Audio 2 em Audio 3 Show on alarm To analog output O Hardware Enable deinterlacing by default Figure 5 7 12 1 132 The slide show calls up close up images from several cameras in turns The slide show is controlled by the relevant buttons on the video monitor control panel You can set up the slide show speed in the Slide Show located in the Advanced tab of the Monitor object settings panel Figure 5 7 12 1 Dwell period is in seconds It ranges from 1 to 999 By default it is equal to 3 5 7 13 Analog monitor setup Axxon Smart has the facility to output video signal from a selected camera to an analog monitor Video signal is transmitted to the analog monitor directly from the video capture card from one of the cameras connected to the video server with no digitization For transmitting output video signal to an analog monitor the video capture card should have an analog video output The FS 8 video capture card has an integrated analog output For FS 5B FS 6C and FS 16 EXP video capture cards an auxiliary analog video output card should be installed WS 7 WS 17 cards wi
290. t POS terminal COM port The length of the connection cable between DTE and DCE devices is restricted due to noise and active reactive resistance in the cable The official maximum length of the RS 232 cable is about 15 m at a 20 Kbit s transmission rate However in practice the cable can be much longer depending on the transmission rate The quality of the cable also affects the rate to length ratio The distance can be bigger for cables with low electric capacity The interfaces that are described below such as RS 449 RS 422A or RS 423A support faster data transmission over longer distances than the RS 232 interface 298 Table 12 2 1 shows the connection cable length between DTE and DCE devices Table 12 2 1 a a If the POS terminal or POS server is able to send the receipt text or other structured information about 9 9 9 15 15 15 152 76 76 POS operations to the local network using TCP IP or UDP protocols the following connection scheme can be realized Figure 11 2 2 2 bi ae s 5 n e i gt 7 i S naa Smart OEM Printer Local network connection r gt g L gt 3 Pad POS Terminal Figure 11 2 2 2 Printer Axxon Smart Local network connection POS terminal 299 Ask the network administrator who installed Axxon Smart with POS for the availability of such connection To use this connection scheme make sure the router of the local network has an avai
291. t Deselect All in the context menu Figure 12 4 3 3 To enable scanning all terminals right click any terminal object in the list and select Select All in the context menu Figure 12 4 3 3 4 Click the Search button to start the search process Figure 12 4 3 4 To stop the search process click Cancel aaron suectrine bananas and water v 4 Pete fone 16 01 2009 Y 235959 17 01 2009 if2asas9 Saas fesules Titles State Additional Total reco sai Titl Connectio Connectio Bra Titl Bl Titl Baa Titl Bra Titl Bal Titl Bra Titl Ea Titl Z Titl Connectio Ea Titl Ea Titl g Titl Bra Titl Bal Titl Ea Titl Ea Titl Bal Titl g Titl H M Ea Tit Ea Titl Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Connectio Figure 12 4 3 4 12 4 4 The indication of POS terminal connection availability and search process execution The terminal list indicates the availability of the connection of POS terminals to the Axxon Smart video server The search progress is also indicated in this table The terminal list contains the following columns Figure 12 4 4 1 1 The Titles column contain
292. t messages modi At least 398M6 of Free space on the hard disk Available 11166 of free space on the hard disk Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 10 Step 10 Select a Microsoft SQL database server and authorization method and parameters for connecting to the server Use the Database Server drop down list to select the MS SQL server To use the server located on this computer leave the local value which appears in the field by default Figure 1 2 3 11 iis AHON Smart 1 0 1 470 Setup Database Server Choice Database Server and authentication method Choose Database Server From the list local SQLE PRESS Z Choose user identification procedure based on system user account or SOL Server identity check f Use Windows user account Use user name and password User name Passmord Figure 1 2 3 11 21 Select the authorization parameters to connect Axxon Smart to the MS SQL Server Figure 1 2 3 12 The following data may be used for connecting to the server The user name and password used to install the MS SQL Server in Axxon Smart installation Account information entered when registering users in Windows on the computer where MS SQL Server is located if Windows Account was selected for authorization 3 Usernames and passwords specified when registering accounts in a fully functional MS SQL Server installed separately To use the user name and password specified i
293. t the name of IP device from the dropdown list Model Figure 3 3 3 2 4 To add IP device to the table IP devices of IP Wizard utility click Add Figure 3 3 3 2 5 In result parameters of the required device will be displayed in the table IP devices Figure 3 3 3 2 6 12 9 oS Note To delete IP device from the table the following command order of the contectual menu should be performed Delete camera lt IP address gt from the list is called with wright mouse click upon the corresponding line of the table 10 In field 6 of the table Figure 3 3 3 2 6 brand of IP device is stated To display the list of objects accessible for the following device click on the left of the field Note To hide the list press on the left of the field 11 To register objects of IP device in the objects tree certain check marks should be set To delet objects from the objects tree uncheck the mark in the check box Figure 3 3 3 2 6 Note To register delete all the objects it is enough to check uncheck the mark in the check box opposite the brand of IP device Object names in IP Wizard correspond to the branch of the objects tree Table 3 3 2 Table 3 3 2 Correspondance of IP Wizard objects to brances of objects tree Table 3 3 2 Object name in IP Wizard Branch of objects tree PC Intellect Video channel Object Video capture card gt Object Camera Audio channel Object Sound card gt Object Micro
294. t the video surveillance windows layout in the Scene window use the Layout button on the Scene toolbar To add current layout select the Add item in the menu To select a layout click its name in the menu Figure 6 2 2 7 To remove available layouts click the Delete item The following video image processing functionality is available in the Scene window moving the images over the window perspective correction restoring the image proportions rotation cropping scaling To enable disable these modes use the Scene toolbar Figure 6 2 3 1 NOTE To make changes to an image display click it to activate The active video image becomes outlined by the red border E3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 ff O Lx POR Anna eed CED Navigation mode is used for viewing the created scene the cursor takes the shape of a hand Figure 6 2 3 2 Other image processing modes cannot be used in this mode the buttons are disabled This mode is enabled by default This is indicated by the yellow color of the button 212 3 oxxon Smart Scene 1 Ex O tjon QuwQ a GEES oa a F The image moving mode allows placing the video images in the Scene window in convenient locations The images can be moved by dragging To enable the moving mode click the Move button in the Scene toolbar When the mode is enabled the button turns blue To move an image Figure 6 2 3 3 1 Enable the moving mode 2 Point the cursor at the vid
295. tart the Device Manager from the Windows Control Panel which can be opened using the Start menu In the Control Panel double click the System icon 3 Inthe System dialog window open the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager option The Device Manager window will open In the hardware tree expand the Audio Video and Play Devices branch and ensure that all installed video capture cards are represented by objects 5 Figure 5 4 1 12 Note that each ADC in a card should correspond to a separate object in the tree m Computer Management l ol x m File Action View Window Help E Computer Management Lacalt H Guardant dongles f System Tools H a Human Interface Devices gig Event viewer Hy IDE ATA ATAPI controllers e Shared Folders H keyboards E Local Users and Groups H Mice and other pointing devices H Monitors F Performance Logs and Alerts i HE Network adapters Sa Device Manager D NVIDIG Network Bus Enumerator See Storage 2 Removable Storage B Disk Defragmenter i Disk Management ge Services and Applications H T Ports COM amp LPT H Processors Se Sound video and game controllers Audio Codecs AOR ITY F556 h ITY F55 6 b ITY F55 6 b ITY F55 6 vee Legacy Audio Drivers e Legacy video Capture Devices 3 Ji Media Control Devices A NVIDIACR nForce TM MIDI UART Realtek AC 97 Audio dF J ve Standard Game Port
296. ted herein and AZAON covering the use of the above identified software SOFTV ARE accompanying this EULA including any and all associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation protected by copyright Taarra i accept Licence agreement I don t accept Licence agreement Print Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 5 17 Step 5 Specify the key file path By default it is located in the Key folder of the installation CD If the installation wizard finds a previous installation path in the registry this path is specified If necessary click Browse and choose another path to the key file To copy the key file later leave the field blank Verify the validity of the path and click Next to confirm Figure 1 2 3 6 Step 6 Select the Axxon Smart installation type To install Axxon Smart for video and audio processing and controlling all system components choose Video Server Video capture card drivers and the ile AxxONn Smart 1 0 1 4 70 Setup E Select the Azzon Smart 1 0 1 470 program directory 5 x Choose 4xxon Smart 1 0 1 470 program directory Axxon Smart 1 0 1 470 software will be installed in the Following directory Ic oasccon Smart Browse I Add shortcut to Start Menu I Add shortcut to desktop Press Next to proceed IF you want to change the installation directory press Browse Back Cancel Figure 1 2 3 6 Guardant hardwa
297. ter the date in the same manner an alternative way of using the calendar is described above Press Enter on the keyboard On pressing Enter automatic fragment search starts using the criteria entered Soon the first frame of the needed sequence is retrieve with retrieval accuracy of 1 second and displayed on the screen 175 E3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 aa Ss 33 8 G2 J Ki amp L lx 0 1fps 65292 800x600 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 i 16 16 31 16 17 51 16 19 11 16 20 31 16 21 51 16 23 11 16 24 31 16 25 51 16 27 11 16 26 31 16 23 51 16 31 30 17 31 21 17 54 51 17 56 32 17 58 10 17 53 31 18 00 51 18 02 12 18 03 33 18 04 53 18 06 14 18 07 34 18 08 54 18 10 14 18 11 36 18 12 58 18 14 18 18 15 38 8 16 59 181813 18 1947 18 21 27 18 23 07 18 24 47 18 26 27 18 28 10 18 23 51 18 31 38 10 04 08 446 446 a OG GOGO GaeKaars BACKS SS 18 33 07 To view the recordings made at the same time from different cameras enter the playback mode in the corresponding windows Select the required times in the time stamp lists Control the synchronous playback using the control panel on the active window The recordings are synchronized automatically during playback Figure 5 10 6 1 The playback stops either if you click the Stop button or when the most recent recording reaches its end 176 E3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 amp o Ax mits ee Ie b gt 11fps 13799 32
298. th hardware compression do not support video signal transmission from connected cameras to the analog monitor Video signal from any video server camera can be transmitted to an analog monitor By default a video signal can be transmitted to an analog monitor only from a camera connected to the same video capture card as the monitor AXXON SMART software has the facility to output video signals from cameras to analog video inputs of the cards to which these cameras are connected Set up this mode with the drop down lists Video Out of the Monitor object settings panel You can set up feeding video signals to the analog video output for several Monitor objects The cameras available to be displayed on an analog video monitor are listed in the table under the drop down Video Out list The following Video Out options for video signals are available 1 None No video signals are from the cameras configured for Video Out in the Monitor object 2 Active Camera The video image from the camera which is active on the monitor at the moment is fed to the analog monitor To activate a camera left click on the corresponding camera window 3 Alarm Camera the video image from the currently alarmed camera is fed to the analog monitor If several cameras are alarmed at the moment the analog monitor will display a video signal from the camera with the latest alarm event Figure 5 7 13 1 4 Selected Cameras Feeding video signals from th
299. the beginning of a new receipt Thus receipt processing saving and display may be incorrect in this case To eliminate such errors select Ignore Repeats in the Repeats Handling drop down list Line 19 e Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 Line 24 2 el Line 25 E Telemetry panel of System security service E Schedule Posi Camera 1 Terminal FIT ords to recording s beginning Connection settings Record modes separator Type Port Continuous record m GoM SS Recording tine S peed 3600 Motion Detector Parity None anty None Receipts only BB DTA CI ATS L Disable C Clear screen if there is no data received within Default Figure 12 3 1 10 12 3 1 7 Removing the titles from the monitor setup By default the text of the last receipt is displayed in the monitor if no more receipts are registered To remove the titles from the monitor in case no receipts are registered for a long period of time check the Clear Screen After checkbox and in the Sec field enter the time interval after the last line of the last receipt when the text is to be removed from the screen Figure 12 3 1 11 Enter the time in seconds 309 C Pos t Camera 1 Terminal Connection settings Record modes Type Fort COMI Recording time Speed 9600 as Motion Detector Receipts only ae OPE C DTA C RTS Parity C Disable Figure 12 3 1 11 12 3 2 Titles dat
300. the AAC Decoder you must have Administration rights on this computer and you must answer Yes when asked if you wish to allow the installation i Internet Figure 5 4 2 12 5 4 2 2 SETTING UP A GRABBER OBJECT Use the settings panel for the Grabber object to choose an P device and connect Axxon Smart to it To set up the Grabber object do the following Figure 5 4 2 13 Select the video digitizing device local or network Specify the Type for IP server IP device Choose the type of the IP server in the BrandName list 99 To receive video signals from the IP server enter the IP address of the IP server into the IP Address field The IP address must be assigned beforehand Enter the user name and the password into the User Name and the Password fields to access the IP server Authorization parameters are identical to the ones used to access the device from the Web browser By default the user name and password included in the documentation are used LJ Computer Bi Grabber 1 pea Camera 1 pea Camera 2 pea Camera 3 oo pea Camera 4 SH Ray 1 Ray 2 ZY Ray 3 Q Type IF device Figure 5 4 2 13 5 4 2 3 Receiving the video Set up the Camera object of the Axxon Smart software to receive video The Video tab of the Camera object displays the number of the Grabber object that matches the IP server in the Card field In the Channel field specify the channel number according to the number of the socket on the IP
301. the IP server or one of the analog cameras connected to the IP server Figure 5 4 2 9 96 Live view AXIS 207 Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q O ix 2 TRN Jo search Se Favorites O O ee 3x EY y Address http 192 168 0 160 view index shtml Links Snagit B Sy AXIS 207 Network Camera Live View Setup Help Video format Trigger Snapshot Motion JPEG a 00O Playing Motion JPEG Click here to install or upgrade the AAC Decoder AAC Decoder which enables streaming AAC audio in Microsoft Internet Explorer has not been installed or could not be registered on this computer To install or upgrade the AAC Decoder you must have Administration rights on this computer and you must answer Yes when asked if you wish to allow the installation Figure 5 4 2 9 5 4 2 1 3 Configure of the network parameters for an IP server using the Web server To set up the IP server network parameters open the Setup section of the Web server menu Open the TCP IP folder Enter IP address Subnet mask and Default router in the given insert Click Save to confirm the settings Figure 5 4 2 10 97 Live view AXIS 207 Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a O Back Q 7 x B A po Search Se Favorites 4 2 jas lee rel Address http 41 92 168 0 160 adminAcpip shtml id 1 7 g Go Links
302. the full pathname of the audio file to be played after the recipient answers the call Specify the filename in the WAV File field NOTE A The full pathname should be specified NOTE B The audio file should be of WAV format 10 In the Confirmation Code enter the numerical confirmation code the recipient should enter upon message receipt NOTE This function is available if the recipient uses a touch tone telephone 268 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 ere Line 25 Telemetry panel E System security service E Schedule EE Dial type Sensitivity wAY File Confirmation code Ci SmartOEM w avicam_ala 7855212 Ci SmartOEMiwayicam_ala 4574216 CA SmartOEMiWayicam_ala 7878798 Figure 10 1 4 2 10 2 SYSTEM SECURITY SERVICE The System Security Service provides continuous operation of all Axxon Smart software modules It restarts the modules that do not respond for a specified time period The slave exe module implements the service functionality To configure the system security system use the System Security Service object settings panel Figure 10 1 4 1 1 The Module column contains the list of the Axxon Smart software modules running on the computer Working modules are marked with a tick next to the module name The modules that do not work are marked with an exclamation mark 2 The Status column displays the state of the modules The service monitors the state of Windows processes relat
303. the video image from the corresponding camera If a PTZ device is connected to the camera you can control it directly in the surveillance window by moving the mouse 11 The button for switching to video and audio archive playback mode 206 Se tO Anag 95 08 99 51 Figure 6 2 2 1 6 2 2 2 SCENE WINDOW SETUP To open the Interface Setup panel click the ay l button in the top right corner of the window The panel includes the following components 1 The Control Elements tab allowing to set up the Scene toolbar show hide the toolbar elements and place the elements onto the toolbar 2 The Advanced tab allowing to enable disable displaying the tool tips and locking the toolbar elements location 3 The Apply Cancel and Close buttons allowing to apply or cancel the changes and to close the toolbar setup panel The Interface Elements tab contains the following elements Figure 6 2 2 2 1 The Interface Elements list containing available element groups to be placed onto the Scene toolbar The Reset button allowing to cancel the changes made to the elements list and restore the default list The Clear All button allowing to quickly remove all elements from the toolbar The Available Buttons list containing available elements to be placed onto the toolbar in the corresponding groups It also contains the Separator element which is a dummy element creating a space between the elements in the toolbar The Reset
304. the video image received from the IP camera or one of the analog cameras connected to the IP server Figure 5 4 1 28 87 E Live view AXIS 207W Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer Fie Edit view Favorites Tools Help Q 9O x 2 QD pO search SY Favorites ral Te J By lt 4 AXIS a AXIS 207W Network Camera Live View Setup Help COrmenicatens Video format Motion JPEG Playmg Motion JPEG OO00 Click here to install or upgrade the AAC Decoder AAC Decoder which enables streaming AAC audio in Microsoft Internet Explorer has not been installed or could not be registered on this computer To install or upgrade the AAC Decoder you must have Administration rights on this computer and you must answer Yes when asked if you wish to allow the installation 2 E Figure 5 4 1 28 5 4 1 5 3 Setting up the network parameters of an IP camera using the Web server To set up the network parameters of an IP device open the Setup section of the Web server menu Select the TCP IP tab in the Setup section Enter the IP address Subnet mask and Default router in the tab Click Save to confirm the settings Figure 5 4 1 29 88 3 System Options Basic TCP IP Settings AXIS 207W Network Camera Microsoft Internet Explorer Oj x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae 9 Search Jervos Z a l Ei Back J x B A p Search Favorites 4 o Roe 2 Ez rel Address
305. the workstation do the following 1 The video server and the workstation should be included in the TCP IP communications environment 2 The Axxon Smart software should run on both computers NOTE If P cameras are used make sure the cameras are in good order and a TCP IP connection exists between the cameras and the video server A user interface should be configured for each operator operator group during the system setup as well as personal rights for system functions and resources usage The rights and duties of the operator and the operation procedures are detailed in the operator s personal manual 14 3 1 Connecting to several servers Axxon Smart allows connecting to up to 4 servers simultaneously Figure 14 3 1 1 E oxxon Smart Monitor 1 H O Ax CE ms 1001133 F 03 0309 18 00 52 0 1 133 4 18 00 52 ame Figure 14 3 1 1 The video image from cameras connected to different servers can be displayed in separate surveillance monitors Figure 14 3 1 2 362 BoxxonSmatt Monitor 1 H CL LX Bix lt gt foo Pe 03 03 09 18 00 52 Ai 18 00 52 Figure 14 3 1 2 15 POSSIBLE PROBLEMS IN USING AXXON SMART 15 1 POSSIBLE AXXON SMART STARTUP PROBLEMS 15 1 1 Card or guardant driver not loaded aeexom Smart TR ne C Axxonsoft LLE 2008 Figure 15 1 1 1 The Card s type is incorrect message is displayed Figure 15 1 1 1 Check e if the hardware is in good
306. the zoom frame over the image using the mouse The Zoom mode does not interfere with image processing and detector operation 143 E oxxon Smart Monitor 1 a0 gK OEE E is gt 12fps 6145 320x240 O CLO Os OOO KK CSS HHS Figure 5 8 9 1 5 8 10 Functional menu of video surveillance window Functional menu of video surveillance window serves for surveillance modes control image processing and exporting To display the functional menu left click the active camera number icon Figure 5 8 70 1 3 oxxon Smart _ Monitor 1 KEERT CUE wie gt 24fps 9003 320x240 Camera Show titles Processing b Export p Magnifier gt Start recording Ee Sharpness Disarm kel Contrast al Contour vc Detector mask O AAAA AAAA CKOCRAAAA Figure 5 8 10 1 5 8 11 Selecting a camera from the functional menu of video surveillance window You can select an available for display camera from the functional menu of video surveillance window It will be displayed in the current monitor window This can be done in the functional menu of the camera control icons 144 Select Camera in the menu Clicking this option opens the list of the cameras not shown in the monitor Choose the camera to be displayed Figure 5 8 11 1 EB oxxon Smart EEE E gt gt Camera 8 r 7 Pe s bza s7 s7 baza s s 2 L f f e Camera HE Show titles Processing Export o
307. tles display select this menu item again NOTE When the titles are not displayed in the surveillance window they are still processed saved in the database and used to start and stop video and audio recording according to the markers setup 12 4 Using the Titles Search object The Titles Search interface object window is used for searching the receipts in the database and corresponding video and audio recordings in the archive according to certain search criteria The Titles Search window provides the following functionality 1 creating search requests e by symbol sequences words e by date 2 viewing the list of receipts satisfying the search criteria 3 viewing the contents of the receipts found in the search 4 viewing video frames corresponding to the selected receipt line 319 12 4 1 Opening the Titles Search window i Monitor 1 E Telemetry panel Hide al Figure 12 4 1 1 The Titles Search window is not displayed by default at Axxon Smart startup To open the Titles Search window select POS in the Interface menu in the Main control panel Figure 12 4 1 1 12 4 2 The Titles Search window Saar suoctriney Amex x a Period from 23 02 2009 23 5959 to 24 0220093 235959 16 09 08 16 09 13 16 09 24 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046610 16 09 39 f 16 09 42 16 09 45 16 09 51 16 10 13 16 10 35 1048610 18 00 16 10 55 16 10 58 16 11 01 16 11 09 16 11 27 16 11 29 16 11 32 16
308. to set up the device network parameters ci C2 WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows KP Version 5 1 2600 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2001 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings tatyana makarova gt ping 192 168 0 90 Pinging 192 168 0 90 with 32 bytes of data 10 0 0 1 Destination host unreachable 10 0 0 1 Destination host unreachable 10 0 0 1 Destination host unreachable 10 0 0 1 Destination host unreachable Ping statistics for 192 168 0 90 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost O 0z loss gt Approximate round trip times in milli second Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average C 5 Documents and Settings tatyana makarovar_ Figure 5 4 1 25 5 4 1 5 2 Opening the on the Web server To open the home page open Internet Explorer and enter the IP address in the URL line http assigned IP address Figure 5 4 1 26 Address jE htto 192 168 0 90 Figure 5 4 1 26 A dialog box will open asking for a user name and password for accessing the device home Figure 5 4 1 27 The user name and password are included in the device documentation for Axis the default name is root the password root 86 Connect to 192 168 0 3 Figure 5 4 1 27 Enter the user name and password then click OK If a valid user name and password have been specified the window will show
309. ual to 10 This setting means that every 10th frame is a key frame saved in full while other frames so called delta frames will contain only the differences to the key frame Increasing this value allows to cut the video flow size thus relieving some load from the network However it increases the danger of the detectors not being able to recognize the alarm situations 4 Working out the average frame size archive size and video stream size from the camera at given compression settings If you change compression settings you get a different size for key and delta frames and consequently a different size for the archive as well as different traffic in the network Compressed Frame Size panel allows to control the frame size see 4a field in the Compressed Frame Size The Archive Size shows the average size of the archive at the given compression settings for video signals and frame rate of the exported video see 4b field in the Archive Size The Feed panel 4b field Data shows the video stream size from the camera at the given compression settings for video signals and frame rate of the exported video see 4b field Frames This helps to estimate the channel s bandwidth capacity to transmit video Note when you set up the video feed you can see in the Camera object settings panel which image is saving to the archive 111 kath Relay 8 i Grabber 2 hep Camera 1 ae Camera 3 ee Aay Rap 10 ci
310. uld be set for automatic Axxon Smart start up instead of the shell Some registry parameters should be changed using the TweakiAxxon Smart exe utility Start the utility from the Tools folder of the Axxon Smart program folder e g C Axxon Smart Tools or from the Windows Start menu In the Windows section in the Autolog group enable automatic authorization mode by checking the Enable checkbox and entering the default user name and password in the corresponding fields which will be used for automatic authorization Figure 2 3 2 2 37 Tweaki 4xxonSmart xj oo D gt Window oD Video shell D Telemetry Explorer see About f File E son Smarkideo exe i Auto login W Enable User name Jelena Watery Password Ea Domain IT GROUP CXM MAHAL Seorysorh com Ok Figure 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 Forced start of Explorer To manually start Explorer open the Task Manager window press Ctrl Shift Esc Select menu File then New Task Run In the dialog box that opens type explorer and click OK Figure 2 3 2 3 C Windows Task Manager i Ioj x Fie Options View windows Help Create New Task T xj Type the name of 4 program Folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it For you Open explorer Cancel Browse K End Task Switch To Hew Task Processes 35 CPU Usage 8 Commit Charge 704M 2461M os 38 Figure 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 Start AXXON SMART as a service
311. umerous surveillance windows are simultaneously displayed on the screen the archive mode button may not be seen In this case enlarge the active window until the triangular button becomes visible 5 8 8 Scaling the surveillance windows To expand a surveillance window double click the image in the relevant camera window Figure 5 8 8 1 The number of double clicks needed depends on the number of cameras displayed in the current layout To decrease the window size right double click the image To return to the original size make the same number of right double clicks as you made while scaling the image up 142 3 oxxon Smart Monitor 1 O Lx Bi Bg aa 24fps 6273 320x240 CE GCEGHHES GHGATEGS CLC GMM Figure 5 8 8 1 NOTE Surveillance window scaling does not work if Overlay is chosen for image processing To enable scaling change the overlay type in the monitor settings panel 5 8 9 Image scaling in the window To examine image details a 16x inclusive software zoom can be applied You can use the mouse wheel to zoom in or out on the images Point the cursor to the desired area of the active window and roll the wheel towards the screen to zoom in or from the screen to zoom out Hot keys can be used for video image scaling in the surveillance windows Hold the Shift key while left clicking the image area to zoom in on it Hold the Shift key while right clicking the image area to zoom out on it You can move
312. untime Environment v 1 1 or higher must be installed on the computer to run the Web Server module The Web Server setup includes the following stages 1 Basic settings in the Web Server object settings panel 2 User interface including the video image parameters and gateway settings in the home page template The Web object is listed in the object settings tree of Axxon Smart NOTE The Web Server surveillance monitor requires authorization upon connection use the same user name and password as on the video server with the cameras to be viewed Figure 10 4 1 1 and Table 10 4 1 describe the Web object setup 274 Line 19 S Line 20 Line 21 Line 22 Line 23 oe Line 24 8 Line 25 Telemetry panel S System security service E Schedule Disable Compression E i i ot number The same as camera settings Users amount 490 Port number 5003 Users amount 700 Figure 10 4 1 1 Table 10 4 1 eS Compression The level of decimation of the video signal transmitted via the Web Server If the Same As Camera Settings checkbox is checked the camera compression levels are used HTTP Server Port Number HTTP Server port number NOTE The Web Server home page can display up to 9 surveillance windows at a time 10 4 2 The home page template The Web Server default home page template is represented by the index htm file in the Modules webroot subfolder in the Axxon Smart program folder for example C
313. urity service E Schedule SEH ES Test search Pos 1 i Receipt processin Camera 1 Terminal Cash ee i 3 or Words to recording s beginning Record modes separator Beginning of the document Continuous record E Words for recording s ending Recording time a separator Motion Detector End of the document _ Receipts only C Match case Repeats processing Disable Clear screen if there is no data received within T sec Ignore repeats Figure 12 3 1 3 1 Inthe Type drop down list select the type of the connection data exchange with the POS terminal The following connection types are available a RS232 POS terminal connection to the COM port of the video server TCP IP POS terminal connection to the video server via the local network of the store using the TCP IP protocol c UDP POS terminal connection to the video server via the local network of the store using the UDP protocol d AXXON POS terminal connection to the video server via the local network of the store using the AXXON protocol 2 Inthe Port drop down list select the port number for connecting the POS terminal to the video server In case of RS 232 connection select the COM port In case of TCP IP or UDP connection enter the port number manually for example 2555 3 Inthe Port Speed drop down list select the data transfer rate for the COM port NOTE In case of TCP IP or UDP connection the Port Speed Parity
314. us viewing of archive recordings for a given camera and live surveillance for other cameras 2 Time based syncro viewing of archives for several cameras 170 EB oxxon Smart Monitor 1 agm e A ERIE 7 8fps 28022 640x480 Figure 5 9 6 1 5 10 1 Archive playback mode O OOOO HOO BOCK KL aS To enter the archive viewing mode activate the surveillance window then click the triangle icon in the lower right corner of window Figure 5 10 1 1 171 EB oxxon Smart _ Monitor 1 0 HK wir a ie Joya e e O 1fps 7869 320x240 Co OOOO OOS Soe eee as 141439 r I A Pre Dy 14 1439 T Figure 5 10 1 1 You can also press Tab on the keyboard to enter the archive playback mode Playback control panel will appear at the bottom of the window The list of time stamps corresponding to existing archive video fragments will appear to the right The time scale and the zooming export and printing buttons will appear on top of the window NOTE When using export and printing buttons no message on completing the export or printing is displayed Click one of the time stamps to display the first frame of the corresponding video recording in the surveillance window Upon entering the archive mode the first frame of the most recent archive video recording will be displayed in the surveillance window The menu of the surveillance window remains accessible in archive mode You can arm disarm the camera and start stop the live vi
315. ut relay GND Ground computer casing CGND External ground Install the 16 4 ray relay card onto the video capture card using the special connecting sockets Figure 9 3 1 2 Secure the card by screws 253 Baa tah N N D n r lt R d Figure 9 3 1 2 9 4 RAY CONNECTION DIAGRAMS FOR 4 4 AND 16 4 RAY RELAY CARDS DI DI 24V PASSIV SENSOR Figure 9 3 1 1 PASSIVE RAY The rays are connected to the 4 4 and 16 4 ray relay cards according to the ray relay cards layout The connection scheme depends on whether the ray is passive with no external power supply for example the contact ray or active external power supply is used The connection procedure is similar in both cases The relays are connected to the 4 4 and 16 4 ray relay cards according to the ray relay cards layout The connection scheme depends on whether the relay is a power relay with external power supply or a low current relay power supply from the ray relay card Figure 9 3 1 2 shows the connection scheme of the power relay to the DO1 pin of the J6 socket of the 4 4 or 16 4 ray relay card 254 Figure 9 3 1 3 shows the connection scheme of the low current relay to the DO1 pin of the J6 socket of the 4 4 or 16 4 ray relay card Connection option of a power RELAY using external power supply Connector J6 Collector Emitter DI Digital in sensor DO Digital out relay GND Ground to the computer tower CGND
316. ve Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound Wave Sound I PERES ee Figure 1 5 5 1 1 5 6 Smartphone Axxon Smart provides the option of remote video surveillance and camera control using a mobile phone which satisfies the following requirements e Java MIDP 2 0 support e GPRS support e color display 65K colors e display resolution not less than 100x100 pixels and the specialized software included with the Axxon Smart system in the Smartphone folder Figure 1 5 6 1 33 E C Anon Smart smartphone loj xj File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Q Back a r pi e Search gt Folders Address Ciaran Smart smartphone Go amp Snagit Date Modified f SmartPhone jad 1KB JADFile 26 03 2009 3 56 Pi SmartPhone jar 35 KB Executable Jar File 26 03 2009 3 36 Figure 1 5 6 1 1 5 7 Smartppc Axxon Smart provides the option of remote video surveillance and camera control using the PocketPC computer To use this option you need a PocketPC that supports any available technology for network access and the specialized software included equipped with Axxon Smart and located in the SmartPPC folder Figure 1 5 7 1 E CAnon Smart smartppc Fie Edit View Favorite
317. vice The address should match the hardware address of the device set using the jumpers on the device itself or using the setup software delivered with the device S PTZ 1 EH Line Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 8 Line 9 Line 10 Line 11 Line 12 Line 13 Line 14 Line 15 Line 16 Line 17 Miz fal P i oe A B af z j f fis d K y f J f g 5 P A f hit a A j FY z te i f J W i di j Le x go gy h g Ad E E E E E E Channel Camera Address Figure 7 4 1 1 7 5 Using the PTZ devices PTZ devices can be controlled using the 1 telemetry panel 2 monitor mouse 3 joystick The Telemetry panel is a universal interface for controlling any PTZ camera The user can also use the monitor to control any PTZ camera A joystick looks similar to a mechanical control manipulator It allows controlling any PTZ camera 7 5 1 Using the monitor interface to control PTZ cameras To control the viewing direction of the camera using the monitor drag the cursor over the video image on the screen the camera PTZ will follow the cursor movements To zoom in or out click and hold the left or right mouse buttons to control the focus press and hold the Shift key while using the mouse 7 5 2 The Telemetry Panel object The Telemetry Panel object is used to control the PTZ devices To set up the Telemetry Panel object do the following Figure 7 5 2 1 227 1 Int
318. ware included in the Axxon Smart installation kit The SmartPPC functionality includes e video surveillance e camera control e PTZ control To install the SmartPocketPC module do one of the following 1 Run the SmartPocketPClnstall exe installation file on your computer This file is located in the Smartppc ru subfolder of the Axxon Smart program folder NOTE The SmartPocketPCInstall exe is copied to the hard drive of your computer if you check the Yes Want to Install Mobile Modules checkbox in the corresponding wizard window during Axxon Smart setup 281 2 Copy the SmartPocketPC arm CAB to any folder of your PocketPC Then run the file NOTE Prior to SmartPocketPC module installation consider the following 1 Your PocketPC must satisfy the following requirements e compatible with the devices controlled by Windows Mobile 2003 Windows Mobile 2003 SE Windows Mobile 5 0 Windows Mobile 6 0 including VGA screens e screen with 65K colors e CPU frequency not less than 200 MHz e network access GPRS Bluetooth or Wi Fi PocketPC can be connected to the computer using e USB cable included with the PocketPC e Bluetooth connection e R port 2 The PocketPC should be connected to your computer and synchronized using the specialized software The PocketPC can be synchronized with the computer using the ActiveSync utility version 3 8 or higher The ActiveSync utility is installed and run automatically
319. window allows selecting the layout for the video surveillance monitors camera windows This button allows to a Add remove layouts of the surveillance window b Add anew layout with the Add menu item c Remove layouts using the Delete menu command 3 Use Current Cameras to select the cameras to be displayed in the relevant video monitors It opens the list of all the cameras in the system The buttons for displaying the windows as a slide show in the monitor The slide show calls up close up images from several cameras in turns Video surveillance monitor name Current date and time The Screen button allows adding and selecting the layouts of the control panel This button allows to a Add remove layouts of the surveillance window b Adda new layout with the Add menu item c Remove layouts using the Delete menu command 8 9 The button for opening Window Interface Setup The button that hides the video monitor from the screen NOTE You can also hide a video monitor with the help of Windows Menu button 10 11 12 13 14 15 The button for quitting Axxon Smart Ray status indication The indicator of the ray status is displayed in the monitor window only if you set up the Ray object accordingly The indicator colour render the ray status Surveillance window This area displays the video image received from the corresponding camera If a PTZ device is connected to the camera you can use
320. x cscn tances oe case paces a wea ah a a duds eiveesiaereanks 198 5 11 11 1 SE Le ata E E cient nena area E aa tenth t ae te eat cing 198 5 11 11 2 DETECTOR opera OM ene a boa anon bea ca ana caste mods O E caer a neater 199 SALI Classical detecto saion A widens seaoetmsaeetaies 200 5 11 12 1 SUD eae a T E A E T T A TE 200 5 11 12 2 Detector In OP Chall ON eesi a A ay danneasgeetiiasecunisanetwAbtamadaaecneisasetemsdutecenioestaneeemancieais 201 6 THE SCENE WINDOW sisisscsccccsccacccecscasecssnervnviaecasecasevaisiceeneteasdcciavaunnsussdncatanzianstnssiavadateaneweaes 202 6 1 THE SCENE WINDOW SETUP iiocaiscctecstccccssctecctecetivitsiatecstecsccadesete di dededetocouisesi cease susewiuewss svanauouceaeesecouaneds 202 6 2 USING THE SCENE OBJECT ncra aa aa A E ANO AEA AEKn ene 204 62 1 OPENING THE SCENE OBJECT WINDOW cariera AT T T a E N 204 62 2 COMPONENTS OF THE SCENE WINDOW vcsccsscccvudasitnanscageays wan a aa a a a aa oer atanieass 204 OAA TES CE NE WINDOW cariera r Aa N O 204 02224 SCENEVWINDOW S E AE E guna evan ane sae aoeanieeaes 206 6 2 2 3 MOVING THE ELEMENTS ALONG THE TOOLBAR cccceccecsececeececeeceeceeceeceeceeceeeeeseeseeeeeeeeees 208 6 2 2 4 SCENE TOOLBAR WAV OUTS wicsveii curs esicnntietacagssms garam TTT E A E T E ciataainas 209 62 2 5 SELECTING THE DISPLAYED CAIVIERAS a eau manedau poagateua ten ccou sean ences sian sosdcieeaes 209 6 2 2 6 VIDEO IMAGE LAYOUT IN THE SCENE WINDOW cccccccccsccsecsec
321. xtension 09 07 2009 16 27 4V20005DK dll 1183 KB Application Extension 12 12 2008 12 53 cvO9 dll 632 KB Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 cxcored9 dll z4 KE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 E Elink dll 44 KE Application Extension 09 07 2009 16 30 a highquid dll S48 KE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 30 Mlidb exe 452 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 33 product config 1KB CONFIG File 21 07 2008 15 11 a ProFUIs252m all 3696 KE Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 31 simple_ detector dll 322 KE Application Extension 10 12 2008 4 11 Slave exe 1 648 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 32 Gey SaliteDbUpdate exe 592 KB Application 09 07 2009 16 33 P SgliteFile exe 32 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 31 E video exe 068 KE Application 09 07 2009 16 52 video sec 1KB SEC File 14 07 2003 16 16 vitaminCtrl dil 1 175KB Application Extension 09 06 2008 17 24 Figure 1 2 3 1 1 5 1 Databases data The C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL Data Figure 1 5 1 1 f Data F A DBEOIO71 940C 4093 923B 1 taster mdr File and Folder Tasks 2 Security Certificate SQL Server Database Primary 1 KE 4096 KB Make a new Folder ee Publish this Folder to the mastlog ldf Ji model mdf web SOL Server Database Transac a SOL Server Database Primary Share this Folder 1 260 KB 240 KB modellog ldF msdbdata mdf a0 SQL Server Database Transa SQL Server Database Primary Other Places a 768 KB 5 S568 KB G
322. xxon Smart Scene 1 AO ax o HAOn Aung a CZELE 0000 02 03 o4 05 o6 0 08 09 10 11 12 13 5 16 7 gt 22 23 24 ot a gt amp NN gt 18 03 53 Figure 6 2 4 2 6 2 4 2 ARCHIVE RECORDING PLAYBACK To play the archive recordings use the playback control panel The playback control panel has a standard configuration and set of buttons It contains the Play Pause Stop Next Fragment Previous Fragment buttons Figure 6 2 4 3 To play a fragment select its starting timestamp in the list on the right and click the Play button Use playback control buttons to manage the recording playback Clicking and holding the Play button for some time enables continuous non stop playback of all recordings Non stop playback stops when you click the Stop button or when the end of the last recording is reached In the Pause mode clicking the Next or Previous button right and left arrows displays the next or previous frame of the recording NOTE The recordings from all cameras are played in playback mode If no image was recorded for a camera in the displayed time interval the corresponding window will be shown blank If all cameras have been recording video during the displayed time interval the images from all cameras will be played 218 oxxon Smart _ Scene 1 a 0 ak o HAOn Aung a CZELE noe 02 03 a4 05 06 07 08 09 10 ti 12 13 5 16 7 3 20 at 22 23 2 4 ot a b ENH DK 18 03 53 Figure 6 2 4 3 6 2 4 3 VIDEO
323. y ment Authorization Pay ment Authorization Amex S436 Balance Due 54 36 Pay ment Authorization Pay ment Authorization Log Out LogIn Devere Jhaun Smimotf 6 00 1 ee ee Oe Te 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 24 02 2009 sA 0O ee 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 31 16 26 32 16 25 32 16 26 32 16 26 32 kn an a T a a a In the archive playback mode the following action buttons are available Figure 12 4 9 4 1 Print the frame 2 Save the frame in jpg format 3 Zoomin NOTE Click the same button to restore the original size of the image Figure 12 4 9 3 332 Saari subctriney Amex ma Period frome 23 02 2009 235959 to 24 02 2009 2359 53 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1048610 Sash results amp Titles 1 55 Transaction Date Time Cd 24 02 2009 16 26 28 24 02 2009 16 26 31 24 02 2009 16 26 33 24 02 2009 16 26 40 24 02 2009 16 26 43 24 02 2009 16 26 45 24 02 2009 16 26 52 24 02 2009 16 26 55 24 02 2009 16 26 57 Titles State Additional a Titl Connectio Query is c 35 3 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 Bai Titl Connectio Query isc 0 B3 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 E Tit Connectio Query isc 0 B3 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 E3 Titl Connectio Query isc 0 B3 Tit Connectio Que
324. yment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 F Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 ni ee ogee Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 itl Connectio Query is c Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Connectio Query is c Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 itl Connectio Query is c Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Connectio Query is c Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 19 29 10 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 92 0 402 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 z n oa Nut 2A N INNA 16 76 79 _ Figure 12 4 7 1 To view the video frame corresponding to certain receipt lines do the following Figure 12 4 7 1 1 Double click the receipt in the Search Results panel The video frame corresponding to the first line of the receipt will be displayed in the surveillance window NOTE Sometimes the frame corresponding to the last line of the previous receipt is displayed instead of the first line of the selected receipt This is due to the high rate of receipt registration more than 1 line per second in Axxon Smart when the last line of the previous receipt and the first line of the selected receipt are registered in less than one second 2 Double click the desired line in the Titles panel The corresponding video frame with the titles will be displayed in the surveillance window 12 4 8 Viewing the real time video image from t
325. your mouse to control this PTZ directly from the surveillance window Surveillance window border The color of the border indicates the status of the camera and detectors The button that switches the playback of video and audio records mode on Cameras control buttons The camera status is indicated through different colours and the symbol on button The functional menu opens when you click the camera control button If the camera window is displayed on the monitor then the functional menu for the camera control is identical to the one for the surveillance monitor If the camera window is not displayed on the monitor then the functional menu for the camera control features only Start recording and Stop recording 16 17 Camera name A name can be given to the camera during its setup in the Axxon Smart system If the surveillance window does not show any name it has not been set up during the system setup Camera ID icon The indicator in the video surveillance window shows the camera ID in an icon The colour of the icon border renders the recording status The functional menu of the video surveillance monitor opens when you click the camera ID icon The functional menu of video surveillance window features a The nested Cameras menu to select the cameras to be displayed in the relevant video monitors 136 b The nested Subtitles On menu to display images of the POS receipts as subtitles in the monitor c The nested
326. ytes of data Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Request timed out Ping statistics for 192 168 0 90 Packets Sent 4 Kecei1ved 0 Lost 4 100 loss gt Co Documents and Settings tat yana makarova _ Figure 5 4 1 23 2 Assign the IP address to the Axis camera To assign an IP address to a camera in the list right click the corresponding Camera object to open the context menu and select Set IP Address In the IP address setting panel enter the IP address and click Set IP to confirm the assignment Figure 5 4 1 24 The settings will be enabled immediately after the IP address is assigned ia ARIS IP Utility Serer Wiew Help pra 2 DIS 2U dl Saita OGL DADB 7AF 458 O OOOO 7 s 217 server Home Page 192 168 0 76 OO408C 70D DE AelS 24 BRS eet 10 0 1 121 OO408CFEEEOS Test IP Address Set IP Address Properties Set the IF address of AXIS 24104 OO4F08C7EEEOS Serial Number O0408C7EEEOA IP Address 192 168 0 90 Workstation mtertace 2 10 0 1 35 Set IP HEV honie Page Figure 5 4 1 24 85 3 Check the IP address assigned to the camera The check up procedure is described in step 1 If the IP address is assigned correctly the ping 192 168 0 253 command will generate the response shown in Figure 5 4 1 25 After the IP address has been successfully assigned to the network device use the built in Web server
327. zation 24 02 2009 16 26 28 ar a _ A Adjust Payment Check 1048610 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Se CEED a e Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 5 Titl Connectio Queis c 0 Subtotal 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 SeN Titl Connectio Query is c O Tax 0 00 24 02 2009 16 26 28 S Titl Connectio Quer isc 0 Total Due 18 00 24 02 2009 16 26 26 19 29 10 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Balance Due 92 01 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 Payment Authorization 24 02 2009 16 26 28 leo Dut 94 N INNA 16 98 90 Figure 12 4 5 1 12 4 6 Viewing the receipt contents To view the receipt contents double click it in the Search Results panel The receipt contents are displayed in the Titles panel in table form The Text column contains the lines of the receipt the Date Time column shows the time of registration of each line The lines containing the search strings are highlighted in red Figure 12 4 6 1 To view the video frame corresponding to one of the receipt lines double click the desired line in the receipt contents The video frame with the titles will be displayed in the surveillance window of the Titles Search window 326 Searer substring mes I Period fren 23 02 2009 235959 i ix 24 02 2009 235959 NEW RECEIPT Open Ticket 1046610 Search results K mm o aoe zation Transaction Date Time a cheg 1045610 18 00 34 24 02 2009 16 26 28 60 24 02 2
328. zation the user will be authorized automatically when he she starts Axxon Smart on the workstation subsequently if the option is disabled the user must enter a user name and password each time he she starts Axxon Smart on the workstation as well as when accessing the video archive 360 pe Camera 2 RY Ray 1 Dy Rap 2 oR Ray 3 Ray 4 loge Relay 4 BSH Grabber 2 pea Camera 3 pe Camera 4 Grabber 3 10 01 21 Video Server 1 Monitor 1 7 Cc E 5 com Set connection password oo ff Paine for p Connected Save passworde M w Figure 14 2 3 1 4 Inthe Monitor drop down list select the number of the Monitor object to be used for displaying the image from the server 5 Click the Connect button to connect to the server The connection progress is indicated in the information text area under the button 6 The connection status is displayed in the information area under the Connect button Table 14 2 1 describes the messages Table 14 2 1 Disconnected Connection is not established Connection error Cannot connect Possible reasons 1 No network connection exists between the workstation and the video server 2 Axxon Smart is not running on the video server Invalid password Invalid user name or password is entered in the Login and Password fields 361 Versions do not match Axxon Smart versions on the server and the workstation do not match 14 3 USING THE REMOTE WORKSTATION To use

Axxon Soft Inc Axxon Smart Software Package The User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents